JP2020099642A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine which can appropriately carry out an abnormality notification.SOLUTION: A game machine includes detection means (switch, sensor etc.) for detecting a predetermined event, and control means which carries out a predetermined control on the basis of an input signal from the detection means. When the control means and the detection means are turned into a non-connection state in power supply to the game machine, a predetermined abnormality notification can be carried out. When the control means and the detection means are turned into a connection state in an execution of the predetermined abnormality notification, the execution of the predetermined abnormality notification is continued for a predetermined period.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 88

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

A conventional gaming machine is provided with a main control means capable of controlling the progress of the game and a performance control means capable of controlling a performance according to a signal (command or the like) from the main control means. Is common.

Among such gaming machines, there is one that executes an abnormality notification based on an input signal from a predetermined detecting means (for example, refer to Patent Document 1).

JP, 2016-187648, A

However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is a possibility that the abnormality notification may not be properly performed.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately performing abnormality notification.

To solve the above problems, according to the present invention, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, detection means (starting mouth detection switch, magnetic detection sensor) for detecting a predetermined event (starting winning, magnetism, radio wave, etc.) , A radio wave detection sensor, etc.) and a control unit (main control board 110 and/or effect control board 130) for performing predetermined control (big hit determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on an input signal from the detection unit, When the control means and the detection means are in a non-connected state (connector disconnection, disconnection, etc.) during power supply to the gaming machine, predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.) When the control means and the detection means are connected during the execution of the predetermined abnormality notification, the predetermined abnormality notification is issued for a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds have elapsed, power is turned off, etc.). It is characterized by continuing execution.

According to the present invention, it becomes possible to appropriately notify an abnormality.

It is a figure showing an example of a front view of a game machine. It is a figure showing an example of a block diagram of the whole game machine. It is a figure which shows the main process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the timer interruption process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the input control process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the 1st starting opening detection switch input process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the special figure special electric power control process in a main control board. It is a diagram showing the types of commands transmitted from the main control board to the effect control board. It is a diagram showing the types of commands transmitted from the main control board to the effect control board. It is the figure which shows the main processing in the production control section. It is the figure which shows the timer interruption processing in the production control section. It is the figure which shows the customer waiting production process in the production control section. It is a figure which shows an example of a demonstration waiting time determination table. It is the figure which shows the pre-reading type production processing in the production control section. It is the figure which shows the icon change production decision processing in the production control section. It is a figure which shows an example of an icon final display mode determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a change scenario determination table. It is a figure which shows the icon display mode update process in an effect control part. It is a figure which shows an example of the change pattern determination table for hold icons. It is a figure which shows an example of the 1-step change pattern determination table for the said icon. It is a figure which shows an example of the two-step change pattern determination table for the said icon. It is a figure which shows an example of the said icon change pattern determination table for the time of a power failure. (A) is a figure which shows the relationship of the occurrence frequency of a hold icon display mode and change effect generation timing, and (b) is a figure which shows the relationship 1 of the occurrence frequency of change effect type and change effect occurrence timing. Yes, (c) is a diagram showing a relationship 2 of occurrence frequency between change effect type and change effect occurrence timing, and (d) shows a relationship between an icon display mode and a notification sound at the time of icon occurrence (change). FIG. It is the figure which shows the consecutive announcement production decision processing in the production control section. It is a figure which shows an example of a notice scenario determination table. It is the figure which shows the consecutive announcement production execution processing in the production control section. It is a figure which shows an example of an alternative notice pattern determination table. It is the figure which shows the lamp change production execution processing in the production control section. It is the figure which shows the big hit announcement production decision processing in the production control section. It is a figure which shows an example of a jackpot notice determination table. It is a figure which shows the main process in an integrated control part. It is a figure which shows the command reception interruption process in an integrated control part. It is a figure which shows the V blank interruption process in an integrated control part. It is a timing chart 1 of change production at the time of winning. It is the timing chart 2 of the change production at the time of winning. It is the figure which shows the production example of change production at the time of winning a prize. 9 is a timing chart 1 of a normal change pattern 01. 9 is a timing chart 2 of a normal change pattern 01. It is a figure showing an example of production of normal change pattern 01. 3 is a timing chart 1 of a character action change pattern 01. 3 is a timing chart 2 of a character action change pattern 01. It is a figure showing an example of production of character action change pattern 01. FIG. 43 is a view illustrating a sequel to FIG. 42; It is a figure which shows the timing chart 1 of the symbol action change pattern 01. It is a figure which shows the timing chart 2 of the symbol action change pattern 01. It is the figure which shows the production example of design action change pattern 01. FIG. 47 is a view illustrating a sequel to FIG. 46; It is a timing chart when variation production is started from a customer waiting state. It is the figure which shows the production example where fluctuation production is started from the waiting state for the customer. FIG. 50 is a view illustrating a sequel to FIG. 49; It is a timing chart in which the number of holdings increases during the variation production. It is the figure which shows the production example where the number of reservations increases during fluctuation production. It is a timing chart in which the number of holdings increases immediately after the decrease. It is the figure which shows the production example which increases immediately after the number of reservations decreases. It is a timing chart in which the number of holdings increases during a specific reach effect. It is the figure which shows the production example where the number of reservations increases during particular reach production. It is a timing chart in which the number of holdings increases and decreases before and after the end of the specific game state. It is the figure which shows the production example where the reservation number increases and decreases before and after the end of the specific game state. It is a figure which shows the continuation of FIG. It is a figure which shows the accessory initial process in a lamp/drive control part. It is a figure which shows the origin return process in a lamp/drive control part. It is a figure which shows the initial operation process in a lamp/drive control part. It is a figure which shows an example of a board accessory initial operation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the specific example in case there is no return abnormality in various accessory after power-on. It is a figure which shows the specific example in case the 2nd movable member has a recovery abnormality after a power supply. It is a figure which shows a specific example in case the 1st movable member has a return abnormality after a power supply is turned on. It is a figure which shows a specific example in the case where there is a return abnormality in the effect button after power is turned on. It is a figure which shows the specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessory after the power supply is restored. It is a figure which shows the specific example when there exists a return abnormality in a 2nd movable member after power supply restoration. It is a figure which shows the specific example in case there exists a return abnormality in a 1st movable member after power supply restoration. It is a figure which shows a specific example in the case where there is a return abnormality in the effect button after the power is restored. It is a figure which shows the specific example in the case where the state after a power supply restoration is displaying the change of a special symbol, and there is pending storage. It is a figure which shows the specific example in case the power-on designation|designated command was not able to be normally received at the time of power-on. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a specific example in the case where a power restoration specification command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on. It is a figure which shows the specific example in case the command at the time of power-on (power-on designation|designated command, power restoration specification command) was not able to be received normally at the time of power-on. It is a figure which shows the specific example 1 in case only the power supply to a main control board is stopped and restarted. It is a figure which shows the specific example 2 in case only the power supply to a main control board stops and restarts. It is a figure which shows the specific example 3 in case only the power supply to a main control board stops and restarts. It is a figure which shows the specific example 4 in the case of restarting after stopping only the power supply to a main control board. It is a figure which shows the modification 1 in the case where only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted. It is a figure which shows the modification 2 in the case of restarting after stopping only the power supply to a main control board. It is a figure which shows the modification when the 2nd movable member has return abnormality after a power supply. It is a figure showing an example of an effect when the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted after being stopped while the icon change effect and the lamp change effect are being executed. FIG. 85 is a view illustrating a sequel to FIG. 84; It is the figure which shows the production example when it restarts after the power supply to the game machine is stopped during execution of consecutive announcement production, reservation icon change production, and lamp change production. FIG. 87 is a view illustrating a sequel to FIG. 86; It is a figure which shows a specific example when the connection state of various detection means changes in a customer waiting state. It is a figure which shows the accessory initial process in a lamp/drive control part. It is a figure which shows the specific example in case there is no return abnormality in various accessory after power-on. It is a figure which shows the specific example in case the 2nd movable member has a recovery abnormality after a power supply. It is a figure which shows a specific example in case the 1st movable member has a return abnormality after a power supply is turned on. It is a figure which shows a specific example in the case where there is a return abnormality in the effect button after power is turned on. It is a figure which shows the specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessory after the power supply is restored. It is a figure which shows the specific example when there exists a return abnormality in a 2nd movable member after power supply restoration. It is a figure which shows the specific example in case there exists a return abnormality in a 1st movable member after power supply restoration. It is a figure which shows a specific example in the case where there is a return abnormality in the effect button after the power is restored. It is a figure which shows the specific example in the case where the state after a power supply restoration is displaying the change of a special symbol, and there is pending storage. It is a figure which shows the specific example in case the power-on designation|designated command was not able to be normally received at the time of power-on. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a specific example in the case where a power restoration specification command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a specific example in the case where a power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration specification command) cannot be normally received at power-on. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a specific example 1 in the case where only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a specific example 2 in the case where only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a specific example 3 in the case where only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a specific example 4 in the case where only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted.

(First embodiment)
Hereinafter, the first embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

(Structure of game machine)
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1 is an example of a front view of the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment.

The gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame 2, a game board mounting frame 3 rotatably supported by the outer frame 2, and a glass frame 4 rotatably supported by the game board mounting frame 3. A game board 5 is provided in which a game area 5a in which game balls flow down is formed.

The outer frame 2 is provided with a decorative plate 2b on the lower front surface of a rectangular base frame 2a whose central portion opens in the front-rear direction, and is used as a fixing member (for example, a nail or a stopper, etc.) to the island facility of a game store. ) Fixed through.

The game board mounting frame 3 is detachably connected to the outer frame 2 via the first hinge mechanism section 6 at one end side in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported with the first hinge mechanism section 6 as a fulcrum. Has been done. Therefore, when the game board mounting frame 3 is rotated with respect to the outer frame 2 like a door, the back surface side of the game board mounting frame 3 is exposed to the front, so that various devices provided on the back surface side of the game board mounting frame 3 are exposed. It becomes possible to carry out maintenance, etc.

The glass frame 4 is detachably connected to the game board mounting frame 3 via the second hinge mechanism portion 7 at one end side in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported with the second hinge mechanism portion 7 as a fulcrum. There is. Therefore, when the glass frame 4 is rotated like a door with respect to the game board mounting frame 3, the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the front portion of the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed.

An opening 8 (window) that opens in the front-rear direction is formed in a substantially central portion near the top of the glass frame 4, and a transparent member 8a (such as a glass plate or an acrylic plate) is formed so as to close the opening 8 from the rear. Is attached, and the game area 5a is visible through the opening 8 and the transparent member 8a.

Around the opening 8 of the glass frame 4, a sound output device 9 including a speaker, a frame lighting device 10 having a plurality of decorative lamps (LEDs), and a game paid out from a game ball payout device 100 described later. The upper plate 11 for storing a plurality of game balls such as balls, the lower plate 12 for receiving and storing the game balls that have not entered the upper plate 11 and flowed into the overflow ball flow passage described later, and the game balls. A firing operation device 13 that can be operated for firing is provided.

The sound output device 9 is provided at two places on the upper portion of the glass frame 4 with a space therebetween, and outputs BGM (background music), SE (sound effect) and the like so as to produce a sound (music, voice). It has become. In addition, a plurality of frame lighting devices 10 are provided around the opening portion 8, and produce an effect by lighting by changing the irradiation direction of the light of each lamp (LED) and the emission color. Further, the frame lighting device 10 includes a notification LED 10a that is controlled so as to turn on/blink when the glass frame 4 is opened or a payout abnormality described later occurs.

The upper plate 11 is such that the bottom surface of the storage portion 11a of the game ball is inclined downward toward the direction side (right direction) of the firing operation device 13, and a ball feed solenoid 11b is provided at the end of the downward inclination. .. When the game balls stored in the storage portion 11a of the upper plate 11 flow down and reach the ball feed solenoid 11b, the game balls are sent one by one toward the game board mounting frame 3 side by the operation of the ball feed solenoid 11b.

In addition, in the central front side portion of the upper plate 11, there are an effect button device 16 and a select button device 18 (see FIG. 1) which function as an input device for performing a determination operation and a selection operation related to various effects described later. They are arranged side by side.

The effect button device 16 includes an effect button 17 (not shown) capable of performing a decision operation (operation input), an effect button detection switch 17a (see FIG. 2) for detecting an operation on the effect button 17, and an effect button. A button drive device 17b (see FIG. 2) for driving 17 is provided so that the player can input predetermined information to the gaming machine 1.

The effect button 17 is capable of performing effect light emission by lighting an effect button LED (full color) which is a part of the frame lighting device 10 (see FIG. 2) in a predetermined light emission mode. Vertically moving between a standby position (origin position) located below and a production position located above by a driving force of a button drive motor which is a part of the device 17b, and/or the button drive device 17b. It is possible to perform an effect operation by vibrating in a predetermined vibration mode by the driving force of the button vibration motor, which is a part of It

The selection button device 18 is connected to the cross key 19 (not shown) capable of performing an operation such as a selection operation, and a cross key detection switch 19a (connected to the cross key 19 for detecting an operation on the cross key 19). 2) is provided so that the player can input predetermined information to the gaming machine 1.

In addition, a lending/returning operation unit 20 capable of performing a lending operation of a game ball and a returning operation of a storage medium such as a card storing the remaining money is provided in the right side portion of the upper plate 11. When the lending button (not shown) of the lending/returning operation unit 20 is operated, the remaining amount stored in the storage medium accepted by the ball lending machine (not shown) attached to the gaming machine 1 is subtracted to lend the gaming ball. When the return button (not shown) of the lending/returning operation unit 20 is operated, the storage medium is returned from the ball lending machine (not shown).

Between the upper plate 11 and the lower plate 12, an overflow ball flow path (not shown) for receiving the game balls that do not fit in the upper plate 11 and guiding them to the lower plate 12 is formed. In addition, a saucer full detection switch 32a (see FIG. 2) for detecting that the game balls are full in the lower tray 12 is provided in the middle of the overflow ball flow path, and the lower tray 12 is full by the saucer full detection switch 32a. While is detected, the payout of game balls by the game ball payout device 100 described later is stopped.

The firing operating device 13 includes a base 14 fixed to the glass frame 4, a firing handle 15 rotatably provided on the base 14, and a touch sensor for detecting that the player's hand is touching the firing handle 15. 15a (see FIG. 2), a firing volume 15b (see FIG. 2) including a variable resistor whose resistance value changes according to the rotation angle of the firing handle 15, and handle light emission for causing the firing handle 15 to emit light in a predetermined manner. A device 15c is provided. When it is detected by the touch sensor 15a that the player's hand is touching the firing handle 15, the ball feeding solenoid 11b is actuated and the game balls are fed one by one.

The handle light-emitting device 15c forms a front portion of the firing handle 15 and is formed in a dome shape that bulges forward, and a plurality of LEDs are arranged in an internal space defined by a lens member capable of transmitting light. Has been done. When the LED emits light, it is possible to execute a light emission effect in which the firing handle 15 emits light in a predetermined manner.

On the game board mounting frame 3, a game board mounting portion 25 for mounting the game board 5, a launching device 26 for launching a game ball toward the game area 5a, the game board mounting frame 3, and a glass frame. A lock mechanism 27 for locking the glass frame 4 in a closed state and an open detection switch 31a for detecting opening (opening/closing) of the glass frame 4 are provided.

The game board mounting portion 25 is formed in a recessed chamber shape having an opening at the front in the approximate center of the top of the game board mounting frame 3, and the game board 5 can be stored from the front. An opening that opens in the front-rear direction is provided in the back of the recessed chamber of the game board mounting portion 25, and various devices provided on the back surface side of the game board 5 through the opening are provided behind the game machine 1. Face.

The launching device 26 is a launching member 28 for launching a game ball, a launching solenoid 28b (see FIG. 2) for driving the launching member 28, and going up from the launching member 28 toward the lower left end of the game board. An inclined launch rail 29 and a stopper 30 for stopping the game ball A at the launch position which is the inclined lower end portion of the launch rail 29 are provided. When the game ball sent by the ball feed solenoid 11b is received at the launch position, the game ball A is launched toward the game area 5a by the action of the launching member 28.

The lock mechanism 27 is provided on the right side of the game board mounting portion 25, and the front end portion of the cylinder in which the key hole is formed is exposed on the front side of the glass frame 4. Then, when the exclusive key is inserted into the key hole of the cylinder and rotated in one direction, the lock of the game board mounting frame 3 is released and the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed, and when rotated in the other direction, the glass frame. The lock of 4 is released and the glass frame 4 can be opened and closed.

At a position near the outer edge of the game board 5, a curved inner rail 35, a curved outer rail 36 located outside the inner rail 35, and a guide member for guiding a game ball toward the center of the game area 5a. 37 is provided. Then, between the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36, a launch ball guide path 38 for guiding the game ball launched by the launching device 26 to the upstream portion of the game area 5a is formed. Further, an outlet 39 for guiding the flowing down game balls to the outside of the game area (collection section of the game board mounting frame 3) is formed at the most downstream portion of the game area 5a.

A frame-shaped decorative frame 40 that restricts the entry of the game sphere into the inside, which is a so-called center case, is provided in the approximate center of the game area 5a, and the effect space 40a is formed inside the decorative frame 40. Further, a warp device 41 for introducing a game ball flowing down the game area 5a into the interior of the decorative frame 40 is provided on a side portion of the decorative frame 40, and a warp device 41 is provided at a lower portion of the decorative frame 40 by the warp device 41. There is provided a stage section 42 that rolls down the game balls introduced into the inside of the table and flows down below the decorative frame 40.

In the lower part of the game area 5a, a plurality of (four in the present embodiment) general winning openings 43 in which game balls can be always won (winning) are provided at intervals. When the game balls that have won (entered) 43 are detected by the general winning opening detection switch 43a (see FIG. 2), a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are awarded from the game ball payout device 100 (not shown). It is paid out to the upper plate 11 as a ball.

On both sides (left side area, right side area) of the game area 5a, there are provided universal figure gates 44 (universal figure starting areas) through which game balls can pass. When detected by the gate detection switch 44a (see FIG. 2), a normal symbol hit lottery (auxiliary game determination) is performed. The winning lottery for ordinary symbols will be described later.

Directly below the stage part 42 below the game area 5a, a first starting opening 45 (special figure starting area) through which a game ball can always win (ball entry) is provided, and the first starting opening 45 is provided. When a game ball that has won (entered) is detected by the first start opening detection switch 45a (see FIG. 2), a predetermined number of game balls (for example, three) are awarded from the game ball payout device 100 as a prize ball. It is supposed to be paid out to 11. In addition to the payout of prize balls, a jackpot lottery (special game determination) of a first special symbol (identification information) described later is performed.

Below the first starting opening 45, a game ball from a closed state (basic mode) in which it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball (ball entry) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (winning a winning lottery for an ordinary symbol) The variable starter 46 is provided which is converted into an open state (special mode) in which a prize (ball entry) is possible or easy.

In the variable starting portion 46, a second starting opening 47 (special figure starting area) in which a game ball can win (win) and a second detecting a winning of the gaming ball in the second starting opening 47 (winning) A starting opening detection switch 47a (see FIG. 2), a movable member 48 for converting (changing) the second starting opening 47 into a closed state and an open state, and a second starting opening/closing solenoid for converting the opening/closing of the movable member 48. 48b (see FIG. 2) are provided. Then, when the second starting opening 47 is in the closed state, it becomes impossible or difficult to win the game ball, and when the second starting opening 47 is in the open state, the game ball is won ( It is possible or easy to enter.

In addition, when a game ball that has won (entered) the second start opening 47 is detected by the second start opening detection switch 47a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 3) are recognized as prize balls from the game ball payout device 100. It is to be paid out to the upper plate 11. In addition to the payout of prize balls, a jackpot lottery (special game determination) of a second special symbol (identification information) described later is performed.

Between the first starting port 45 and the variable starting part 46, there is provided a winning port lamp NR (not shown) for causing the first starting port 45 and the periphery of the variable starting part 46 to emit light in a predetermined manner. Therefore, it is possible to perform a light emission effect by emitting light by the panel lighting device 76 having a plurality of lamps (full-color LEDs or the like).

Above the guide member 37 and downstream of the right-side universal figure gate 44, a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won (ball entry) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (winning the special symbol jackpot lottery) A variable winning portion 49 is provided which is converted from (basic mode) to an open state (special mode) in which a game ball can be won (ball).

The variable winning portion 49 has a big winning opening 50 in which a game ball can be won (winning), and a big winning opening detection switch 50a for detecting the winning of the game ball in the big winning opening 50 (drawing). 2)), an opening/closing member 51 for converting (changing) the special winning opening 50 into a closed state and an open state, and a special winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b for opening/closing the opening/closing member 51. When the special winning opening 50 is closed, it is impossible or difficult to win the game ball. When the big winning opening 50 is open, the game ball is won (winning ball). ) Is possible or easy.

Further, when a game ball that has won a prize (ball) in the special winning opening 50 is detected by the special winning opening detection switch 50a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 15) are provided as a prize ball from the game ball payout device 100. It is paid out to 11.

On the back side of the game board 5, the general winning opening 43, the first starting opening 45, the second starting opening 47, and the big winning opening 50 are won, and the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the first starting opening detection switch 45a, The second starting opening detection switch 47a, the game ball detected by the special winning opening detection switch 50a, and the out ball flow path that receives and collects the game ball that has flowed into the out opening 39 and is provided An out-ball detection switch 52a is provided at the most downstream part of the ball flow path. The game ball detected by the out ball detection switch 52a flowing down the out ball flow path is discharged to the outside (island facility) of the game machine 1 from the discharge port on the back side of the game machine 1.

On the outside of the game area 5a, a first special symbol display device 60, a second special symbol display device 61, and a normal symbol display device 62, a first special symbol holding display device 63, a second special symbol holding display device 64, as well as. Ordinary symbol reservation display 65, a round number display 66 (see FIG. 2) that displays the number of rounds when a jackpot game (special game state) described later is executed, and a jackpot game (special game) or a time saving game state A right hit indicator 67 (see FIG. 2) that prompts the player to shoot a game ball toward the right side area of the game area 5a, and a state confirmation display indicating that the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode described later is set. A main information display device 59 including a container 68 (see FIG. 2) is provided.

A winning probability display sticker is attached near the main information display device 59 (not shown). On the winning probability display sticker, the winning probability (1/285 to 1/300) of the jackpot of the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment and the set value (4-1) are printed. The sticking position of the winning probability display sticker 200 is an example, and the sticking position is not limited to the vicinity of the main information display device 59, and may be the front surface (front surface) of the gaming machine 1.

The first special symbol display device 60 is a variable display device for displaying (notifying) the result of the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol performed on the condition that the game ball wins the first starting opening 45 (ball entry). The second special symbol display 61 is for displaying (notifying) the result of the jackpot lottery of the second special symbol performed on the condition that the game ball wins the second starting opening 47 (ball). It is a variable display device, and the normal symbol display device 62 is a variable display for displaying (notifying) the result of the normal lottery lottery that is performed on the condition that the game ball is won (ball) in the universal figure gate 44. It is a vessel.

The jackpot lottery for the first special symbol is to obtain a jackpot determination random number value (determination information) when the game ball wins (enters) the first starting opening 45, and obtains the jackpot determination random number value and the jackpot. It corresponds to comparing with the determination value and determining whether or not it is a “big hit”. In addition, when the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol is performed, the variable display of the first special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display device 60, and the stop display of the first special symbol indicating the lottery result is performed after a predetermined time has elapsed. Be seen. That is, the stop display of the first special symbol is a notification of the lottery result.

The jackpot lottery for the second special symbol is to obtain a jackpot determination random number value (determination information) when the game ball wins (enters) the second starting opening 47, and the obtained jackpot determination random number value and jackpot. It corresponds to comparing with the determination value and determining whether or not it is a “big hit”. In addition, when the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol is performed, the variable display of the second special symbol is performed on the second special symbol display 61, and the stop display of the second special symbol indicating the lottery result is performed after a predetermined time has elapsed. Be seen. That is, the stop display of the second special symbol is a notification of the lottery result.

The first special symbol display device 60 and the second special symbol display device 61 are each configured by a plurality of LEDs, and the LED of the corresponding display device in the variable display of each special symbol blinks at a predetermined interval or order. To do. Then, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the LED is turned on in a mode (a big-hit mode, a lost-mode) showing the result of each big-hit lottery.

In the present embodiment, "big hit" means a big hit lottery (special game determination) of the first special symbol, or a big hit lottery (special game determination) of the second special symbol. It refers to the state in which you have acquired the right to execute. The “big hit game” refers to a game state in which a round game in which the special winning opening 50 is opened in a predetermined mode is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times or 15 times).

It should be noted that the maximum opening number and the maximum opening time of the special winning opening 50 in each round game are predetermined, but even before the maximum opening number and the maximum opening time are reached, a predetermined number of game balls are placed in the big winning opening 50. When (for example, 9) wins (balls), one round game ends. That is, the "big hit game (special game)" is in a game state advantageous to the player who is likely to win the prize ball. In the present embodiment, it is possible to generate any of a plurality of types of jackpot games having different degrees of advantage for the player, which will be described later in detail.

Ordinary symbol hit lottery is a "hit" by obtaining a hit determination random number value when the game ball passes through the public figure gate 44 and comparing the obtained hit determination random number value with the hit determination value. It corresponds to determining whether or not. In addition, when the winning symbol of the ordinary symbol is performed, the variable symbol of the ordinary symbol is displayed on the ordinary symbol display device 62, and after the lapse of a predetermined time, the stop symbol of the ordinary symbol indicating the lottery result is displayed. That is, the stop display of the normal symbol is a notification of the lottery result.

In addition, the normal symbol display device 62 is composed of one or a plurality of LEDs, and in the variable display of the regular symbols, the LEDs blink at a predetermined interval or order. Then, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the LED is turned on in a mode showing the result of the winning lottery (a winning mode or a losing mode).

In the present embodiment, "winning" refers to a state in which a right to execute a winning state (auxiliary game) is acquired in a winning lottery for ordinary symbols. The "hit game (auxiliary game)" refers to a game state in which the second starting opening 47 is opened in a predetermined manner.

In addition, although the maximum opening number and the maximum opening time of the second starting port 47 in the winning game (auxiliary game) are set in advance, the second starting port 47 is opened even before the maximum opening number and the maximum opening time are reached. When a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 9) are won (ball), the winning game (auxiliary game) ends. That is, the "hit game (auxiliary game)" is in a gaming state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is easily executed (the starting condition of the variable display is easily established). In addition, in the present embodiment, a plurality of types of winning games (auxiliary games) having different degrees of advantage for the player are provided, which will be described later in detail.

The first special symbol hold display 63 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol (first special symbol of the first start symbol 45 stored in the game ball winning (ball)) This is for displaying the number of rights (first reserved memory) for performing the variable display, and is turned on or blinks in a mode showing the number of first reserved memories. It should be noted that the maximum number of the first reserved storages is four, but the number may be smaller or larger than four.

The second special symbol hold display 64 is configured by a plurality of LEDs, the jackpot lottery of the second special symbol (when the second special symbol is stored when the game ball wins (ball)) in the second starting opening 47 This is for displaying the number of rights (second reserved storage) for performing the variable display, and is turned on or blinks in a mode indicating the number of second reserved storage. It should be noted that although a maximum of four second storages are stored, the number of second storages may be smaller or larger than four.

The normal symbol hold display 65 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, the right to perform a random lottery of the normal symbol (variable display of the regular symbol) that is stored when the game ball wins (passes) the universal symbol gate 44. This is for displaying the number of (general figure pending storage), and is turned on or blinking in a mode showing the number of general figure pending storage. It should be noted that although a maximum of four general-use figure storages are stored, the number may be smaller or larger than four.

The first special symbol display device 60 and/or the second special symbol display device 61 can also be configured by a 7-segment LED. For example, if you win the jackpot lottery for special symbols, "7" is displayed as a stop, and if it is lost, "-" is displayed as a stop. It is good to repeat ". Before starting the variable display of the special symbol, the result of the previous stop of the variable display is displayed by turning on the LED, so when starting the variable display, the variable display is started by turning off the LED. It will be easier to understand that it has started.

The number-of-rounds indicator 66 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is for displaying the number of rounds when a jackpot state (special game state) occurs, and is an LED in a predetermined mode that indicates the number of rounds when the jackpot game is started. The lighting of the LED is started, the LED continues to be turned on during the big hit game, and the LED is turned off at the end of the big hit game. For example, if the number of rounds is a jackpot game of two times, only the fourth LED from the left is lit, and if the number of rounds is a jackpot game of 16 times, all the LEDs are lit.

The right-handed indicator 67 is composed of one LED, and in the big hit state (special game state) and in the time-saving game state, the player is prompted to shoot a game ball toward the right-side game area (so-called right-handed). It is for displaying the hit display, and the LED lights up during the big hit state (special game state) and during the time saving game state.

The state confirmation indicator 68 is configured by one LED and is for indicating that the setting change mode described later or the setting confirmation mode described later is set. The setting confirmation mode or the setting confirmation mode When shifting to, the LED starts to be turned on, and when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the LED is turned off. In this way, since the state confirmation display 68 indicating that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set is provided on the front surface (front surface) of the gaming machine, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode It is possible to easily confirm whether or not it is set to.

The installation position of the state confirmation display 68 is an example, and the installation position is not limited to the installation position of the present embodiment, and may be the front surface (front surface) of the gaming machine 1.

Further, in the present embodiment, the same display mode (lighting display) is displayed regardless of whether the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set, but it is displayed so that which mode is set can be recognized. You may do it. For example, when the setting change mode is set, the status confirmation display 68 may be lit and displayed, and when the setting confirmation mode is set, the status confirmation display 68 may be blinked. However, when the setting change mode is set, the state confirmation display device 68 and any one of the second game information display devices 69 are lit and displayed, and when the setting confirmation mode is set, the state is displayed. You may make it light-display only the confirmation indicator 68.

Further, in the present embodiment, the status confirmation indicator 68 is provided as a dedicated indicator to indicate that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set, but it may also be used as another indicator. good. For example, in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, since the main information display device 59 and the second game information display device 69 described later are turned off, these display devices may be used. Specifically, one LED of either the main information display device 59 or the second game information display device 69 may be turned on, or the main information display device 59 or the second game information display device 69 may be turned on. All LEDs may be turned on.

At the lower right inside the game area 5a, a sub first variation indicator 81, a sub second variation indicator 82, a sub first reserve indicator 83, a sub second reserve indicator 84, a sub public figure variation indicator 85. A sub information display device 80 including a sub public figure reservation display 86 and a sub right hitting display 87 that prompts the player to shoot a game ball toward the right side area of the game area 5a (so-called right hitting) is provided. It should be noted that the sub-information display device 80 is not provided with a display device such as the above-described status confirmation display device 68 that indicates that the sub-information display device 80 is set in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode described later.

The sub first variation display 81 is for displaying (notifying) the result of the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol, and the sub second variation display 82 displays the result of the jackpot lottery of the second special symbol. It is for (notification) and each is composed of one LED. Then, when the variable display of the corresponding special symbol is started, the LED blinks at a predetermined interval (variable display), and when the corresponding special symbol is stopped and displayed, the result of the big hit lottery (lights up in the case of big hit, loses) Is turned off) is displayed.

In the sub-first variation display 81 and the sub-second variation display 82, it blinks during the variation display of the special symbol so that it can be understood only whether or not the variation display of the special symbol is stopped, and then stopped. It may be turned on or off when displayed.

The sub first hold indicator 83 is for displaying the number of first hold memories, and the sub second hold indicator 84 is for displaying the number of second hold memories. It is composed of two LEDs. The left and right LEDs are turned off when the number of reserved memories is "0", the left LED is turned on and the right LED is turned off when the number of reserved memories is "1", and the number of reserved memories is "2". The left and right LEDs are lit when is, the left LED is blinking when the number of pending storage is "3" and the right LED is lit, and the left and right LEDs are blinking when the number of pending storage is "4". ..

The sub-universal figure fluctuation indicator 85 is for displaying (notifying) the result of the winning lottery, and is composed of one LED. Then, when the variable display of the normal symbol is started, the LED blinks (variable display) at a predetermined interval. Then, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, a mode (lights in the case of winning, and lights out in the case of losing) of the winning lottery is stopped and displayed.

In the sub-universal figure variation display 85, it blinks during the variation display of the ordinary symbol so that only the variation display of the ordinary symbol can be grasped, and it is turned on or off when the stop symbol is displayed. May be.

The sub-universal figure reservation indicator 86 is for displaying the number of general figure reservation memories, and is composed of two LEDs arranged side by side. The left and right LEDs are turned off when the number of saved public figures is "0", and the LED on the left side is turned on and the LED on the right is turned off when the number of saved figures is "1". When the memory number is "2", the left LED blinks and the right LED lights up, and when the universal figure holding memory number is "4", the left and right LEDs blink.

A first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) including a liquid crystal display is provided in the interior of the effect space 40a, and in the lower part of the effect space 40a and in front of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). A second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), which is a liquid crystal display having a display area smaller than that of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), is provided, and the face of the character is provided above the effect space 40a. A first movable member 73 imitating the above is provided, and a circular second movable member 74 is provided on the right part of the effect space 40a.

The image display device including the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) displays various effects according to the progress of the game. As the production display, the customer waiting demonstration production executed during the customer waiting state (waiting state in which the game is not progressing) in which the variable display of the special symbol is not performed, the production symbol executed during the variable display of the special symbol There is a variation effect accompanied by the variation display of 70a.

In the display unit (effective display area) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), three columns of variable display areas such as a left area, a central area, and a right area are formed and displayed in each variable display area. The effect design 70a is displayed in a variable manner by scrolling the effect design 70a in the vertical direction (from top to bottom in the present embodiment).

In addition, the effect symbol 70a is composed of, for example, symbols indicating numbers from "1" to "9", and variable display of special symbols executed by the first special symbol display device 60 and the second special symbol display device 61. The variation display of the effect design 70a is performed corresponding to (synchronizing with). That is, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started corresponding to the start of the variable display of the special symbol, and the temporary stop display (swing display) of the effect symbol 70a is performed before the variable display of the special symbol is stopped to change the special symbol. Corresponding to the stop display of the display, the variable display of the effect design 70a is stopped and displayed (still display). It should be noted that, as the effect design 70a, in addition to a design showing numbers, a design showing alphabets such as "A" to "F" may be provided.

The "temporary stop display" means that the effect design 70a sways slightly, or the effect design 70a is deformed to a small extent to make the player think that the effect design 70a is stopped (complete stop). Not done).

In the stop display of the effect symbol 70a, the effect symbol 70a is configured to be stopped for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) in a predetermined mode (miss mode, big hit mode, etc.) indicating the result of the big hit lottery. The jackpot mode (special result mode) is a combination of the same effect symbols such as "777" or a combination of effect symbols having regularity such as "357", and the lose mode is the other modes. is there. Note that the manner in which the effect symbols 70a are displayed in a variable manner is not limited to this, and may be one that scrolls in the left-right direction, or one that rotates (spins) on the spot.

Further, during the variable display of the effect design 70a, according to the result of the jackpot lottery, the reach effect, the background image, various effect images such as characters, movies, etc. are displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) or the second. By being displayed on the image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), the player's expectation for the jackpot (special game) being executed (hereinafter referred to as the “jackpot winning expectation”) is enhanced. There is.

Here, the "reach effect" is such that a part of the combination of the effect symbols 70a for notifying the jackpot is temporarily stopped and the other effect symbols 70a are changed, and the jackpot game is executed for the player. It means a variation that is expected to occur. For example, when the combination of the three-digit effect design 70a of "777" is set as the combination of the effect designs 70a for notifying the big hit (big hit result mode), the two effect designs 70a are set in the left side area and the right side area. It temporarily stops at "7" and the remaining effect design 70a is changing in the central area.

Further, in the present embodiment, there are five types of reach effects, namely, "normal reach effect", "SP reach effect", "SPSP reach effect", and "full rotation reach effect".

The "normal reach effect" is a state in which a background image before the normal reach effect is being displayed, two effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in the left area and the right area, and one effect symbol 70a is left in the central area. It is a reach effect executed in a state in which a fluctuating reach state is formed.

The "SP reach effect" is executed after the normal reach effect, and the effect pattern 70a in the state where the reach state is formed is reduced and displayed in the corner of the screen, and the effect effect is higher than the normal reach effect (the expectation to be a big hit is high. ) Reach production in which movies (videos, animations, etc.) flow.

The "SPSP reach effect" is a reach that is executed after the normal reach effect or the SP reach effect, and in which a movie (video, animation, etc.) with a higher effect effect (higher expectation of being a big hit) than the normal reach effect or the SP reach effect flows. It is a production.

The "full-rotation reach effect" is a reach effect that changes at a low speed in a state where all the combinations of a plurality of effect symbols 70a for notifying a big hit are complete. In the present embodiment, the reach effect is executed only when the big hit lottery is won.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot winning expectation degree related to the reach effect is higher in the order of normal reach effect <SP reach effect <SPSP reach effect <all rotation reach effect (big hit confirmation).

Further, on the display unit of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), in order to display the number of first holding icons corresponding to the first special symbol holding number (U1) which is the current number of the first holding memories. First hold icon display area 70B, and a second hold icon display area 70D for displaying a number of second hold icons corresponding to the second special symbol hold number (U2), which is the number of the current second hold storages. And, the icon display area 70C for displaying the icon corresponding (related) to the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a) being executed is formed.

The first hold icon display area 70B is divided into a first display section 70B1, a second display section 70B2, a third display section 70B3, and a fourth display section 70B4 from the side closer to the icon display area 70C, and On the display units 70B1 to 70B4, a number of first holding icons corresponding to the first special symbol holding number (U1) are displayed. That is, the number of the first hold icons is also increased/decreased corresponding to the increase/decrease of the first special symbol hold number (U1).

Specifically, the first display 70B1 displays a first hold icon H11 indicating the first hold storage in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed first, and the second display 70B2 displays 2 The first hold icon H12 indicating the first hold storage in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed is displayed next, and the variable display of the first special symbol is executed third in the third display unit 70B3. A first hold icon H13 indicating the first hold memory is displayed, and a fourth hold icon H14 indicating the first hold memory in which the variable display of the first special symbol is fourthly displayed is displayed on the fourth display unit 70B4. To be done.

The second hold icon display area 70D is divided into a first display section 70D1, a second display section 70D2, a third display section 70D3, and a fourth display section 70D4 from the side closer to the icon display area 70C, and On the display units 70D1 to 70D4, the number of second hold icons corresponding to the second special symbol hold number (U2) are displayed. That is, the number of the second hold icons is also increased/decreased in response to the increase/decrease in the second special symbol hold number (U2).

Specifically, the first display portion 70D1 displays a second hold icon H21 indicating the second hold storage in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed first, and the second display portion 70D2 displays 2 The second hold icon H22 indicating the second hold storage in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed is displayed next, and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed third in the third display portion 70D3. The second hold icon H23 indicating the second hold storage is displayed, and the fourth display unit 70D4 displays the second hold icon H24 indicating the second hold storage in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed fourth. To be done. In the present embodiment, the "first special symbol reservation number" may be referred to as the "first reservation number" and the "second special symbol reservation number" as the "second reservation number".

The icon display area 70C is the first hold icon displayed on the first display portion 70B1 of the first hold icon display area 70B corresponding to the start of the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a), or the second icon. The icon TH is displayed by moving (shifting) the second hold icon displayed on the first display portion 70D1 of the hold icon display area 70D, and when the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a) ends. The icon TH disappears (erases). In addition, you may make the said icon disappear in the middle of the variable display of the special design (effect design 70a). In the present embodiment, the “first hold icon”, the “second hold icon”, and the “corresponding icon” may be collectively referred to as “icon”.

The first movable member 73 is capable of performing production light emission by lighting the first movable member LED (full color) which is a part of the panel lighting device 76 (see FIG. 2) in a predetermined light emission mode. And a vertical direction between a standby position (origin position) located above and a performance position located below due to the driving force of the first movable member drive motor that is part of the board drive device 75 (see FIG. 2). It is possible to perform an effect operation by moving to, and the first position detection sensor (not shown) detects that it is at the origin position.

The second movable member 74 is capable of performing production light emission by lighting the second movable member LED (full color) which is a part of the panel lighting device 76 (see FIG. 2) in a predetermined light emission mode. Between the standby position (origin position) located on the upper right and the effect position located on the lower left by the driving force of the second movable member drive motor that is a part of the board drive device 75 (see FIG. 2). It is possible to perform an effect operation by moving diagonally up and down, and the second position detection sensor (not shown) detects that it is at the origin position.

Since the effect positions of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 partially overlap each other, basically, the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 operate simultaneously. By not doing so, they will not collide with each other.

If the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 do not collide with each other, at a stage where one movable member moves to the effect position and then returns to a position that does not overlap with the effect position of the other movable member. You may make it move the other movable member to a production position.

On the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 and the game board 5, a game ball payout device 100 for paying out game balls based on the establishment of predetermined payout conditions (prize ball, ball lending), island equipment, etc. A game ball storage unit (not shown) that stores the supplied game balls and supplies them to the game ball payout device 100, and a main controller 110A (not shown) that incorporates a main control board 110 that totally controls the progress of the game. And a payout control device 120A (not shown) having a payout control board 120 for controlling the game ball payout device 100 according to a payout control command from the main control board 110, and a production control command from the main control board 110. An effect control device 130A (not shown) that includes an effect control board 130 that controls an effect according to the above, and a power supply device 160A (not illustrated) that includes a power supply board 160 that supplies a power supply voltage to various control devices. A game information output terminal board 90 (see FIG. 2) for outputting game information (game signal) is provided outside the gaming machine.

The main controller 110A has a main control board 110 on which various electronic components are mounted on the surface, a transparent resin board case for housing the main control board 110 therein, and an opening of the board case. A seal seal 104 and a transparent resin seal cover member 105 attached to the substrate case so as to cover the seal seal 104 are provided.

On the front surface side of the main control board 110, the contents stored in the main controller 110m, which is a one-chip microcomputer for controlling the game, and the main RAM 110c of the main controller 110m are cleared or at the stage of the advantage degree of the game. RWM clear switch 111a for inputting a signal for updating the set value, which makes the set value changeable or a signal for shifting the set value to a confirmable state by an operation using the setting key A setting key switch 112a for inputting, and an information display 113 for displaying performance information and set values by which the actual performance of the gaming machine 1 can be grasped are mounted.

The information display 113 is for displaying setting values and performance information (normal base value described later), and four 7-segment displays (113a to 113d) having the decimal points DP are arranged side by side. It consists of: Then, an identification segment for displaying identification information indicating the type (data type) of performance information is configured on the two 7-segment displays corresponding to the upper two digits, and the two 7-segment displays corresponding to the lower two digits. A numerical segment for displaying numerical information indicating the set value and the numerical value of performance information is configured by.

The substrate case includes a lower chamber-shaped lower case member that opens at a portion facing the back surface side of the main control substrate 110, and a recessed chamber-shaped upper case member that opens at a portion facing the front surface side of the main control substrate 110. By closing the lower case member and the upper case member, an accommodation space for accommodating the main control board 110 is formed.

On the upper surface of the upper case member, a model name sticker on which the model name (model name) of the gaming machine 1 is printed so as not to overlap the front and rear of the information display 113, and a management number on the main control board 110 is printed. The number sticker will be attached to the left and right. An operation member 108 for pressing (turning on) the actuator of the RWM clear switch 111a is loosely fitted in a position corresponding to the RWM clear switch 111a. Then, when the operating member 108 is pressed, the RWM clear switch 111a is turned on.

Further, an insertion portion (not shown) for inserting the setting key into the keyhole of the setting key switch 112a is formed at a position corresponding to the setting key switch 112a. This insertion portion has an opening for exposing the keyhole of the setting key switch 112a to the outside, and a cylindrical portion extending rearward from the opening edge of the opening so as to cover the periphery of the setting key switch 112a. doing. Then, when the setting key is inserted into the key hole of the setting key switch 112a through the opening and turned to the right from the initial position, the setting key switch 112a is turned on so that the setting key cannot be removed from the key hole, and is turned to the left. When it is returned to the initial position, the setting key switch 112a is turned off and the setting key comes out of the keyhole.

The management number sticker has an opening person writing section for writing the opening person name of the main control board 110 and an opening date writing section for writing the opening day of the main control board 110 on the surface of the colorless and transparent base seal. It is provided side by side.

The unpacking person writing section is provided with four colored (white) writing areas (first to fourth writing areas) arranged at intervals in the vertical direction, and on the surface of the main control board 110 between the writing areas. A transparent window region is provided for visually recognizing (visually confirming) the mounted electronic component.

The opening date entry section is provided with four colored (white) entry areas (first to fourth entry areas) arranged vertically at intervals and mounted on the surface of the main control board 110 between the entry areas. A transparent window portion region is provided for visually recognizing (visually confirming) the electronic component thus produced.

Then, the first to fourth writing areas of the opening person writing portion are adjacent to the first to fourth writing areas of the opening date writing portion with an interval, respectively, and the surface of the main control board 110 is between the writing areas. A transparent window region is provided for visually recognizing (visually confirming) the electronic component mounted on.

As the information display 113, a performance display unit in which a circuit section including four 7-segment displays and a board is unitized may be mounted on the main control board. Even in that case, it is desirable that the model name sticker and the management number sticker are arranged so that they are not overlapped with each other so that the visual recognition is not restricted (shielded).

Further, instead of mounting the RWM clear switch 111a, the setting key switch 112a, and the information display 113 on the main control board 110, at least one of the RWM clear switch 111a, the setting key switch 112a, and the information display 113 is mounted on the dedicated board. The main control board 110 may be mounted and board-to-board connected to the main control board 110 so as to be included in the board case of the main control board 110.

Further, the RWM clear switch 111a is not mounted on the main control board 110 or a dedicated board included in the board case of the main control board 110, but is provided on the power supply board 160 at a position where the player cannot operate, It may be provided on the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 or on the back side of the glass frame 4. Even in this case, the signal from the RWM clear switch 111a may be input to the main controller 110m.

Further, because the signal for clearing the stored contents of the main RAM 110c or updating the set value is input by operating the RWM clear switch 111a, the set value is updated separately from the RWM clear switch 111a. A dedicated setting switch for inputting the signal may be provided. In this case, the RWM clear switch 111a and the setting switch may be mounted on the main control board 110 or a dedicated board included in the board case of the main control board 110, or as a position where the player cannot operate the power supply board. It may be provided on 160, on the back side of the game board mounting frame 3, or on the back side of the glass frame 4.

Further, instead of displaying both the performance information and the set value on the information display 113, another display is executed on the main control board 110 or a dedicated board contained in the board case of the main control board 110. The performance information may be displayed on one of the display units and the set value may be displayed on the other display unit.

(Control configuration of gaming machine 1)
Next, the control configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be specifically described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a block diagram of the entire gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment.

The main control board 110 comprehensively controls the progress of the game (basic operation). The main control board 110 is a one-chip microcomputer provided with a main CPU 110a that performs arithmetic processing, a main ROM 110b that stores a game control program and the like, and a main RAM 110c (corresponding to volatile storage means) that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing. And a main control unit 110m, an input port for main control, an output port, and the like. The main CPU 110a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the program stored in the main ROM 110b, and executes the arithmetic processing relating to the game while utilizing the main RAM 110c as a work area, thereby controlling the controlled devices (various solenoids and various displays). Control device, and sends a predetermined command based on the result of the arithmetic processing to the payout control board 120, the effect control board 130, and the like.

Here, the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 are configured so that commands (data) can be bidirectionally communicated, and the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130 are communicated with each other. The command (data) can be communicated in only one direction from 110 to the effect control board 130.

At the input port of the main control board 110, a general winning opening detection switch 43a, a gate detection switch 44a, a first starting opening detection switch 45a, a second starting opening detection switch 47a, a big winning opening detection switch 50a, an out ball detection switch 52a. The magnetic detection sensor 53a, the radio wave detection sensor 54a, the RWM clear switch 111a, the setting key switch 112a, the information display 113, and the payout control board 120 are connected. When detection signals and the like from various detection switches and various detection sensors are input to the main control board 110 via the input port, control processing according to the detection signals is performed.

The output port of the main control board 110, the second start opening/closing solenoid 48b, the special winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, the first special symbol display 60, the second special symbol display 61, the main information display 59, the game information output The terminal board 90, the payout control board 120, the effect control board 130, etc. are connected. A drive control signal for controlling various solenoids, a display control signal for controlling various indicators, and a game information output terminal board that notifies the outside of the gaming machine (such as a hall computer) via the output port. Information is output.

The memory area of the main control unit 110m includes a memory area assigned to the main ROM 110b and a memory area assigned to the main RAM 110c.

Access to the memory area of the main ROM 110b is prohibited, including a game ROM area in which programs and data relating to the progress of a game are stored, an information ROM area in which programs and data relating to performance of the gaming machine are stored. And a 16-byte or more unused area where "0" is stored, a ROM comment area where data such as the program title and version is stored, and a vector table in which the start address of timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is set An area and an HW parameter area in which parameters such as a start address and an end address of the access prohibited area are set are sequentially arranged.

The game ROM area stores a game program area in which a program related to the progress of the game is stored, a first unused area in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored, and data related to the progress of the game. A game data area to be stored and a second unused area in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored are sequentially arranged.

The information ROM area is an information program area in which a program related to the performance display of the gaming machine is stored, an unused area in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored, and data related to the performance display of the gaming machine. An information data area for storing is arranged in order.

In the memory area of the main RAM 110c, a game RWM area used as a work (work area) when executing the game program and an information RWM area used as a work (work area) when executing the information program are sequentially arranged. There is.

The game RWM area temporarily stores a game work area used as a work by the game program, a first unused area in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored, and data being processed by the game program. A game stack area for temporarily saving and a second unused area in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored are sequentially arranged.

In the game work area, a set value area for storing a set value, a judgment information area for storing judgment information (checksum described below) for judging an abnormality in the RWM area, and changes depending on the progress of the game. A game data area for storing game data is arranged in order.

The information RWM area is an information work area used as a work by the information program, an unused area in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored, and data being processed by the information program is temporarily saved. An information stack area for enabling the information is arranged in order.

In the information work area, a performance information area for storing information on the performance of the gaming machine 1 and an error information area for storing information on various error determinations are sequentially arranged.

Hereinafter, a gaming area (gaming ROM area, gaming RWM area) that performs processing based on the gaming program, and an information area (information ROM area, information RWM area) that performs processing based on the information program The relationship will be described.

When the main CPU 110a performs processing based on the game program, it basically refers to the game data area and also refers to and updates the contents of the game RWM area while using the game RWM area as a work. ing. Further, when performing the processing based on the information program, basically, the information data area is referred to, and the content of the information RWM area is referred to and updated while using the information RWM area as a work. ing.

However, in the process based on the game program, the contents of the information RWM area cannot be updated, but can be referred to. Further, in the processing based on the information program, the contents of the game RWM area cannot be updated, but can be referred to.

When performing the processing based on the information program, the flag register is saved in the gaming RWM area in the processing based on the gaming program, and then the information program is called to execute the processing based on the information program. Immediately after the processing based on the program ends and the game program is restored, the flag register is restored from the gaming RWM area.

Also, immediately after the information program is started, the stack pointer of the game stack area is saved in the information RWM area and then the stack pointer of the information stack area is set, and all the registers used in the game program are set as the information RWM area. The register for all the registers used in the game program is restored from the information RWM area immediately before the end of the information program and the stack pointer of the game stack area is restored.

By doing so, it is possible to protect the data used by the gaming program when performing the processing based on the information program, and when the information program returns to the gaming program, a problem occurs. Will disappear.

The payout control board 120 is a sub-control board that controls the payout of the game balls based on the reception of the payout command from the main control board 110 and controls the launch of the game balls. The payout control board 120 includes a payout control unit 121 that drives the game ball payout device 100 to control the payout of the game ball, and a launch control unit 122 that drives the launch device 26 to control the launch of the game ball.

The payout control unit 121 includes a payout CPU 121a for performing arithmetic processing, a payout ROM 121b in which a payout program and the like are stored, a payout RAM 121c serving as a work area for arithmetic processing, an input port for payout control, and an output port. .. The payout CPU 121a receives an operation clock from a crystal oscillator (not shown), reads the payout control program stored in the payout ROM 121b, and performs arithmetic processing relating to payout of game balls while using the payout RAM 121c as a work area. 100 is controlled, or a predetermined command based on the result of the arithmetic processing is transmitted to the main control board 110, the effect control board 130, or the like.

In the input port of the payout control unit 121, an open detection switch 31a, a saucer full detection switch 32a, a payout ball detection switch 100a provided in the game ball payout device 100, a ball presence detection switch 101a provided in the game ball storage unit, and the like. Are connected, and the payout motor 100b provided in the gaming ball payout device 100 is connected to the output port of the payout control unit 121.

When the payout control unit 121 receives the payout command from the main control board 110, it controls the payout motor 100b provided in the game ball payout device 100 to pay out a predetermined number of game balls, and the payout ball detection switch 100a is used. When the payout of the predetermined number of game balls is detected, the control of paying out the game balls is ended.

The firing control unit 122 includes a control circuit, an input port, an output port, and the like, which are not shown. The touch sensor 15a and the firing volume 15b are connected to the input port of the firing control unit 122, and the ball feed solenoid 11b, the firing solenoid 28b, and the like are connected to the output port of the firing control unit 122. ing.

When the firing control unit 122 detects that the player's hand is touching the firing handle 15 by the touch signal input from the touch sensor 15a, the ball feeding solenoid 11b and the firing solenoid 28b are allowed to be energized. When it detects that the rotation angle of the firing handle 15 is changed by the detection signal from the firing volume 15b, the ball feed solenoid 11b is driven and the firing strength is set according to the rotation angle of the firing handle 15. The game solenoid 28b is driven to shoot a game ball.

The firing solenoid 28b is composed of a rotary solenoid, and the hitting member 28 is directly connected to the turning shaft. When the turning shaft rotates, the hitting member 28 turns and hits the game ball A. .. Since the operation of the firing solenoid 28b is set to about 99.9 (times/minute) from the frequency based on the output cycle of the crystal oscillator provided in the firing control unit 122, the game ball is fired for one minute. The number is about 99.9 (pieces/minute). That is, the game ball is shot about every 0.6 seconds.

The performance control board 130 is a slave control board (slave control means) that controls performance related to the game (performed by the gaming machine 1) based on the reception of the performance command from the main control board 110. The effect control board 130 includes a sub CPU 130a that performs arithmetic processing, a sub ROM 130b that stores an effect control program, an effect control unit 130m that includes a sub RAM 130c that serves as a work area for arithmetic processing, and a first image display device 70 (main. Liquid crystal), second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), audio output device 9 (speaker), display/audio control unit 140, frame lighting device 10, handle light emitting device 15c, button driving device 17b, and board. A lamp/drive control unit 150 for controlling the lighting device 76, the board drive device 75, and the like, and an input port and an output port for effect control are provided.

The sub CPU 130a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the game program stored in the sub ROM 130b, and uses the sub RAM 130c as a work area to perform arithmetic processing related to the effect, thereby receiving a command from the main control board 110. Control is performed to cause various control units (display/sound control unit 140, lamp/drive control unit 150) to perform various effects in accordance with input signals from the display button detection switch 17a and the cross key detection switch 19a ( Output data and commands).

An effect button detection switch 17a, a cross key detection switch 19a, a button position detection sensor (not shown), and the like are connected to the input port of the effect control board 130. In the effect control board 130, an effect button detection signal indicating that the effect button 17 has been operated is input from the effect button detection switch 17a, or a cross key detection indicating that the cross key 19 has been operated from the cross key detection switch 19a. When a signal (upper button detection signal, left button detection signal, lower button detection signal, right button detection signal) is input, processing for executing an effect according to the detection signal is performed.

The display/sound control unit 140 receives a command from the effect control unit 130m and controls to display a predetermined image on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). Or perform control to cause the voice output device 9 to output a predetermined voice.

The display/sound control unit 140 includes an overall CPU 142 that performs arithmetic processing, an overall ROM 143 that stores an overall control program, an overall control unit 141 that includes an overall RAM 144 that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and a VDP (image processor). An image control unit 145 composed of a video display processor, a CGROM 146 storing image data and the like, a frame buffer provided inside the image control unit 145, and temporarily storing drawing data generated from the image data, and the like. It has a VRAM 147 that it has, a voice control unit 148 as a voice processor, a voice ROM 149 that stores voice data and the like, and an input/output port.

The overall CPU 142 receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the display control program stored in the overall ROM 143, and performs arithmetic processing related to the effect while using the overall RAM 144 as a work area, thereby receiving from the effect control unit 130m. In accordance with the effect instruction command or the like, the image control unit 145 or the audio control unit 148 performs control for outputting various effects (outputs data or commands).

The general ROM 143 is composed of a mask ROM or the like, and displays a display control program for displaying an image, a display list generation program for generating a display list including a drawing control command group, and an animation of effect patterns. The animation pattern, animation scene information, etc. are stored.

This animation pattern is referred to when displaying an animation that constitutes the concrete contents of the effect by the image, and the animation pattern is associated with the animation scene information, the display order of each animation scene, and the like. The animation scene information includes wait frames (display time), target data (sprite identification number, transfer source address, etc.), drawing parameters (sprite display position, display magnification, transmittance, etc.), drawing method. , The first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), and various information such as a duty ratio as a parameter of luminance.

The image control unit 145 (VDP) is connected to a CGROM 146 that stores various image data, and commands (display list, drawing command, etc.) from the overall control unit 141 (overall CPU 142) and the CGROM 146 are stored. Based on the image data, drawing data which is a source of a video signal (RGB signal etc.) is generated. The image data is an image (frame) to be displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), for example, an effect design image, a background image forming the background of the effect design. Material data representing individual images such as a character image and a serif image. On the other hand, the drawing data is synthetic data that represents an image of the entire frame configured by combining (superimposing) individual images.

The CGROM 146 is composed of a flash memory, an EEPROM, an EPROM, a mask ROM, etc., and compresses and stores image data (sprite, movie) and the like, which is a collection of pixel information in a predetermined range of pixels (for example, 32×32 pixels). ing. The pixel information is composed of color number information designating a color number for each pixel and an α value indicating the transparency of the image. The CGROM 146 is read by the image control unit 145 (VDP) in image data units, and image processing is performed in image data units of this frame.

Further, the CGROM 146 stores, without compression, palette data in which color number information designating a color number and display color information for actually displaying a color are associated with each other. Note that the CGROM 146 may have a structure in which not all the image data is compressed but only a part thereof is compressed. As a movie compression method, various known compression methods such as MPEG4 can be used.

The VRAM 147 is composed of an SRAM that can write or read image data at high speed. The VRAM 143 includes a display list storage area for temporarily storing the display list output from the overall control unit 141 (overall CPU 142), the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the second image display device 71 (sub-display). It has a frame buffer area corresponding to liquid crystal).

The frame buffer area is a storage area for drawing or displaying an image, and further includes a first frame buffer area and a second frame buffer area. Then, the first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area are alternately switched to the "drawing frame buffer" and the "display frame buffer" each time the drawing is started.

Therefore, the image control unit 145 (VDP) uses the drawing data stored in the CGROM 146 as a “drawing frame buffer” in the frame buffer area of the VRAM 147 based on an instruction (display list) from the overall control unit 141 (overall CPU 142). Drawing, reading drawing data from the “display frame buffer” in the frame buffer area, generating a video signal (RGB signal, etc.) based on the read drawing data, and outputting the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), Also, various images are displayed by outputting to the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal).

The image control unit 145 (VDP) is supplied with an operation clock from the crystal oscillator, and by dividing the operation clock, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device are displayed. A synchronization signal (horizontal synchronization signal/vertical synchronization signal) for synchronizing with the device 71 (sub liquid crystal) is generated, and the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) are generated. Output to. In the present embodiment, the frame rate of the image control unit 145 (VDP) is 30 fps (1/30 second=about 33 ms) so that drawing (image display) is performed 30 times per second. It may be set to 60 fps (1/60 seconds = about 16.6 ms) so that drawing (image display) is performed 60 times per second.

In addition, a general-purpose device that converts image data into a predetermined image format and outputs the image data between the image control unit 145, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). The substrate 72 is connected. The general-purpose board 72 has a bridge function of converting the image data into an image format corresponding to the performance of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). , For example, the difference in resolution when connecting a 19-inch liquid crystal display device of SXGA (1280 dots × 1080 dots) and that of a 17-inch liquid crystal display device of XGA (1024 dots × 768 dots). Absorb.

The audio control unit 148 is connected to the audio output device 9, and based on various effect data (including commands) transmitted from the effect control unit 130m, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the first image display device 70. The audio output device 9 is controlled to output audio data, music data (BGM, SE) and the like in accordance with the display of the two-image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal).

The lamp/drive control unit 150 includes a lamp CPU 150a that performs arithmetic processing, a lamp ROM 150b that stores a lamp/drive control program, a lamp RAM 150c that is a work area during arithmetic processing, and an input/output port.

The lamp CPU 150a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads the lamp/drive control program stored in the lamp ROM 150b, and performs the arithmetic processing related to the effect while using the lamp RAM 150c as a work area. In accordance with the received production instruction command or the like, control is performed to cause a controlled device such as various lighting devices and various driving devices to perform a predetermined production (outputs data and commands).

The frame lighting device 10, the handle light emitting device 15c, the button driving device 17b, the panel lighting device 76, and the sub information display device 80 are connected to the input/output ports of the lamp/drive control unit, and the effect control unit Lighting of various LEDs of the frame lighting device 10, the handle light emitting device 15c, the board lighting device 76, and the sub information display device 80 based on various effect data (including commands) transmitted from 130 m (sub CPU 130a). Control is performed, and drive control of the button drive device 17b and drive sources such as the motor and solenoid of the board drive device 75 is performed.

The power supply board 160 generates a main power supply (operation power supply) necessary for the operation of the game machine from a power supply supplied from the outside of the game machine, and supplies the main power supply to the game machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, Supply to the production control board 130 and various electronic components). The power supply board 160 detects whether or not a power failure (power failure) has occurred, and outputs a power failure detection signal to the main control board 110 based on the occurrence of the power failure (power failure). A backup power supply circuit 163 is provided for supplying backup power to the main control board 110 when the power is cut off (power failure).

Further, the power supply board 160 is for switching between an ON state in which main power is supplied to the gaming machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, effect control board 130 and various electronic components) and an OFF state in which the main power supply is stopped. The power switch is provided so that it can be operated by a clerk of the game store, and when the power switch is turned on, the supply of main power is started and the operation of the gaming machine 1 is started. The backup power supply to the main control board 110 is maintained even when the power switch is off.

The power failure detection circuit 162 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine 1 and outputs a power failure detection signal to the main control board 110 when the power supply voltage becomes equal to or lower than a predetermined value. More specifically, the main CPU 110a in which the power failure detection signal is at a high level is in an operable state, and when the power failure detection signal is in a low level, the main CPU 110a is in an operation stop state.

The backup power supply circuit 163 includes a capacitor that stores electricity when the game machine is energized, and the power supply voltage for backup stored in the capacitor when the power is cut off (power failure) is supplied to the main RAM 110c of the main control board 110. Supply. As a result, the stored contents of the main RAM 110c and the payout RAM 121c are retained even when the power is cut off (power failure), and the control state of the game is set to the state before the power cut (power failure) after recovery from the power cut (power failure). Can be restored. Note that backup power may be supplied to the payout control board 120 and the effect control board 130.

(Explanation of game state)
Next, a game state when the game progresses will be described. In the present embodiment, there are a "low-probability game state" and a "high-probability game state" as states related to the special symbol jackpot lottery, and "non-time saving game" as a state regarding the movable member 48 included in the second starting opening 47. It has a "state" and a "time saving game state".

In this embodiment, the following three gaming states are provided.
(1) Low probability non-time saving game state which is "low probability game state" and "non-time saving game state" (2) Low probability time saving game state (3) which is "low probability game state" and "time saving game state" High-probability time-short game state that is "high probability game state" and "time-short game state"

In addition, the game state when the game is started, that is, the initial game state of the gaming machine 1 is set to the "low-probability non-time saving game state", and this game state is defined as "normal game state" in the present embodiment. ". In the present embodiment, the "low-probability time short game state" and "high-probability time short game state" may be referred to as "specific game state" because they are game states that are more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. ..

In the present embodiment, the "low-probability gaming state" is, for example, a stage of the degree of advantage of the game (when the jackpot probability in the jackpot lottery) is "1", the first start opening 45, or In the jackpot lottery of the special symbol performed on the condition that the game ball has entered the second starting opening 47, the jackpot winning probability is about 1/300, which is a low gaming state. On the other hand, the "high probability gaming state" means that the jackpot winning probability is improved compared to the low probability gaming state, and when the set value is "1", the jackpot winning probability is as high as about 1/60. Says the set gaming state.

Specifically, there are four types of setting values, "1" to "4", and when the setting value is "1", the winning probability of the jackpot in the low-probability gaming state is about 1/300, and The probability of winning the jackpot in the stochastic gaming state is about 1/60, and when the setting value is "2", the winning probability of the jackpot in the low-probability gaming state is about 1/295, and that of the jackpot in the high-probability gaming state. The winning probability is about 1/59, and when the setting value is "3", the winning probability of the jackpot in the low-probability gaming state is about 1/290, and the winning probability of the jackpot in the high-probability gaming state is about 1/58. When the setting value is "4", the jackpot winning probability in the low-probability gaming state is about 1/285, and the jackpot winning probability in the high-probability gaming state is about 1/57.

Therefore, in the “high-probability game state”, it is easier to win the jackpot than in the “low-probability game state”. Also, the low-probability game state is changed to the high-probability game state after the jackpot game described later is finished. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the jackpot that triggers the transition to the high-probability gaming state is referred to as a “probable variation jackpot”. Also, the jackpot that triggers the transition to the low-probability gaming state is called a "normal jackpot".

In the present embodiment, the "non-time saving game state" means that in the normal symbol hitting lottery performed on the condition that the game ball has passed through the universal gate 44, the average fluctuation of the ordinary symbol corresponding to the lottery result. It is a gaming state in which the time is set to be longer than the "time saving game state" and the opening time of the second starting opening 47 when winning the winning is easily set to be short. For example, when the game ball passes through the universal symbol gate 44, a normal symbol hit lottery is performed, and a variable symbol of the ordinary symbol is displayed on the ordinary symbol indicator 62, but after the variable symbol of the ordinary symbol is started, For example, the display is stopped after 30 seconds. Then, if the lottery result is a win, the second starting port 47 is controlled to be in an open mode for, for example, 0.2 seconds after the stop display of the normal symbol.

On the other hand, the "time saving game state" means that in a normal symbol hit lottery performed on the condition that the game ball has passed through the universal symbol gate 44, the average fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol corresponding to the lottery result. A game state that is set shorter than the "non-time saving game state" and that the opening time of the second starting opening 47 when winning a hit is, for example, 2.5 seconds, which is set longer than the "non-time saving game state" Say Furthermore, in the "non-time saving game state", the probability of winning in the normal symbol hitting lottery is set to a low value, for example, 1/128, and in the "time saving game state" the probability of winning in the ordinary symbol lottery is 127, for example. It is set as high as /128. Therefore, in the "time saving game state", when the game ball passes through the universal gate 44, the second starting port 47 is more easily controlled in the open state than in the "non-time saving game state". As a result, in the "time saving game state", the player can advantageously proceed with the game without consuming the game ball.

In the embodiment, the "time saving game state" is advantageous in the variation time of the ordinary symbol, the opening time of the second starting opening 47, and the winning probability of the ordinary symbol lottery, as compared with the "non-time saving game state". Is set. However, the "time saving game state" may be set such that only one of the variation time of the ordinary symbol, the opening time of the second starting opening 47, and the winning probability of the ordinary symbol lottery is advantageous. .. Further, in the non-time saving game state, the probability of winning per hit in the normal symbol hit lottery may be 0/128, for example.

In this embodiment, the probability of winning the jackpot in the high-probability gaming state is five times the probability of winning the jackpot in the low-probability gaming state (common regardless of the set value). The probability of being determined to be 5 times is not limited to 5 times, and may be set to any value such as 3 times or 8 times as long as it is 10 times or less.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the jackpot lottery, the jackpot which is less advantageous to the winner than the jackpot is not won, but for example, the jackpot is won with a probability of about 1/100. May be. In this case, regardless of whether the setting value is "1" to "4", it is preferable that the small hit probability be the same.

Also, the larger the set value is, the more advantageous the player is (the higher the jackpot probability is). On the contrary, the smaller the set value is, the more advantageous the player is (the higher the jackpot probability is). You may

Further, in all the set values (1 to 4), the probability of being judged as a big hit may be the same in the low-probability game state and/or the high-probability game state, for example, two or three set values ( 1 and 2, 1 to 3, etc.), the probability of being determined as a big hit may be the same in the low-probability game state and/or the high-probability game state.

Further, the set value of the present embodiment has four stages of 1 to 4, but the set value is not limited to four stages, and may be more or less than four stages.

(Type of jackpot game)
Next, the types of jackpot games will be described.

In the present embodiment, as the types of jackpot games that can be won in the jackpot lottery based on the winning of the game balls into the first starting opening 45, there are "first jackpot game", "second jackpot game", and "first jackpot game". "3 jackpot game", "1 jackpot game" and "2 jackpot game" as the types of jackpot games that can be won in the jackpot lottery based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 47 doing.

In the "first big hit game", a round game in which the special winning opening 50 is opened for up to 29.5 seconds and then the special winning opening 50 is closed for 2 seconds is executed up to 10 times. In the round game, one round game ends when a specified number (eg, 10) of game balls have won the special winning opening 50 even before the opening time has elapsed.

After the end of the first jackpot game, it is set to the highly accurate short time gaming state until the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed 10,000 times. Therefore, from the jackpot winning probability in the high-probability gaming state, the next jackpot is substantially fixed.

The "second jackpot game" executes a round game up to 10 times. After the end of the second jackpot game, the low-probability time short game state is set until the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed 100 times.

The "third jackpot" executes a round game up to four times. After the end of the third jackpot game, the high-precision short time gaming state is set until the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed 10,000 times. Therefore, from the jackpot winning probability in the high-probability gaming state, the next jackpot is substantially fixed.

It should be noted that the variable display count (in the present embodiment, 100 times or 10000 times) of the specific game state (high-probability time short game state, low-probability time short game state) set after the jackpot game is referred to as “high probability. It may be expressed as “number of times” or “time saving number”.

In the present embodiment, there are three types of jackpot games, but the number is not limited to three and may be less than or more than three. Further, the opening time of the opening/closing member 51 is set to 29.5 seconds in any big hit game (first big hit game to third big hit game), but the open time may not be 29.5 seconds. The opening time may be different depending on the round game.

(Type of winning game)
Next, the type of winning will be described.

In the present embodiment, there are "first winning game" and "second winning game" as types of winning games that can be won in the winning lottery based on the passage of gaming balls to the universal gate 44. If the winning lottery is executed in the non-time saving game state, it becomes the "first winning game", and if the winning lottery is executed in the time saving game state, it becomes the "second winning game".

The "first winning game" is to open the second starting opening 47 for up to 0.2 seconds. In other words, it is a game in which the movable member 48 is opened once.

The "second winning game" is to open the second starting port 47 for 2.6 seconds, then close it for 1.5 seconds, and open it again for 2.6 seconds. In other words, it is a game in which the movable member 48 is opened twice.

In the first winning game and the second winning game, the winning game ends when a specified number (for example, 10) of game balls enter the special winning opening 50 even before the opening time elapses.

As described above, in the "time saving game state", the game ball is easier to win in the second starting opening 47, and the player is more advantageous in consuming the game ball than in the "non-time saving game state". It is possible to proceed.

Next, the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1 will be described using a flowchart.

(Main processing of main control board)
Main processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the main control board 110. This main processing is performed by inputting a system reset generated by the supply of power supply voltage from the power supply board 160 to the main CPU 110a.

First, in step S1, the main CPU 110a prohibits all interrupts, in step S2 CPU initialization such as setting of internal registers is performed, and in step S3, waiting processing for starting another board is performed. Specifically, it waits for one second until the payout control board 120 and the effect control board 130 are activated so that no command is missed from the main control board 110.

The main CPU 110a permits access to the RWM area of the main RAM 110c in step S4, and transmits a launch permission designating command to the payout control board 120 in step S5. As a result, the payout control unit 121 performs a process for permitting the launch of the game ball by the launching device 26.

In step S6, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the backup flag indicating that the power is restored is saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. If the backup flag has been saved, the process proceeds to step S7 as the power restoration, and if the backup flag has not been saved, the process proceeds to step S8 as the first power-on.

In step S7, the main CPU 110a calculates a checksum (abnormality determination data) of the game RWM area (excluding the set value area) of the main RAM 110c.

In step S8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there is a setting change operation. Specifically, it is determined whether the setting key switch 112a and the RWM clear switch 111a are in the ON state. If there is a setting change operation, the process moves to step S9 as if the mode is changed to the setting change mode, and if there is no setting change operation, the process moves to step S10.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting change process in step S9. Specifically, a state confirmation display indicating that the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed is displayed on the state confirmation display 68, and a set value area of the game RWM area is displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 113. The current setting value saved in is displayed, and a setting change designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

Further, each time the RWM clear switch 111a is operated, the set value is changed (updated) within the range of "1" to "4", and the set value after the update is displayed on the 7-segment LED, and the setting key switch 112a is changed. When there is a setting confirmation operation from the ON state to the OFF state, the setting value after changing (updating) is saved in the setting value area as the setting value is confirmed, and the display of the setting value on the information display 113 is terminated. At the same time, processing for ending the status confirmation display on the status confirmation display 68 and ending the setting change mode is performed.

It should be noted that the effect control board 130 that has received the setting change designation command performs a process for executing the setting change notification for notifying that the setting value is being changed. Specifically, a setting change screen indicating that the set value is being changed is displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71, and the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 76 are set to a predetermined value during the setting change. All the lights are emitted in the emission color (for example, white). The sound output device 9 may output a setting change notification sound indicating that the setting is being changed (“setting is being changed”).

In step S10, the main CPU 110a determines whether the checksum is normal. Specifically, it is determined whether the checksum saved in the game RWM area matches the checksum calculated in step S7. If the checksum is normal (there is no abnormality in the data in the game RWM area), the process proceeds to step S11. If the checksum is not normal (there is abnormality in the data in the game RWM area), Assuming that the control state before power-off cannot be normally restored, the process proceeds to step S12.

When the backup flag is not saved, that is, when the power is turned on for the first time, the checksum is determined to be abnormal.

In step S11, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the set value in the set value area is within the proper range (here, 1 to 4). If it is determined that the set value in the set value area is within the proper range, the process proceeds to step S13. If it is determined that the set value in the set value region is not within the proper range, the process proceeds to step S12. Transfer.

The main CPU 110a performs a non-recoverable error process in step S12. Specifically, after displaying the error information “E” indicating the non-recoverable error on the information display 113 and transmitting the non-recoverable error designation command indicating that the non-recoverable error has occurred to the effect control board 130, , Set the interrupt prohibition to prohibit the timer interrupt, and after outputting the output port, output the unrecoverable error signal (security signal) indicating the occurrence of unrecoverable error from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90. Then, the process of waiting until the power supply is completely cut off is performed. As a result, the effect control board 130 performs a process for executing the non-recoverable error notification.

The "non-recoverable error" is an error state in which the game control is not performed (it does not shift to the game control) and cannot be released unless the setting change process is executed. Therefore, when a non-recoverable error occurs, even if the power switch provided on the power supply board 160 is turned off and then the power switch is turned on without performing the setting change operation, the error is not released and the setting is not canceled. The power switch has to be turned on with the change operation. During a non-recoverable error, the presence or absence of signal input from various input devices (various switches, various sensors) is not monitored at all.

The "non-recoverable error" is not canceled unless the setting change process is executed, but may be canceled when the RWM clear without the setting change process is executed.

The "non-recoverable error notification" is a notification for recognizing that a non-recoverable error has occurred, and is a non-recoverable error screen ("non-recoverable error. Change setting" on the image display devices 70 and 71. Please perform ")", turn on all of the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 76 with a predetermined emission color (for example, red) until the power is turned off, or an unrecoverable error occurs from the audio output device 9. It outputs a non-recoverable error sound (“It is a non-recoverable error” + buzzer sound) that indicates that the power has been cut.
The audio output device 9, the frame lighting device 10, the image display devices 70 and 71, and the panel lighting device 76 may be collectively referred to as a “production device”.

In step S13, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the RWM clear operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If the RWM clear operation is performed, the process is moved to step S14 as the RWM clear operation is executed, and if the RWM clear operation is not performed, the process is moved to step S16.

The main CPU 110a performs the RWM clear process in step S14. Specifically, processing for initializing the control state of the game (initializing other than the set value area of the game RWM area) is performed.

In step S15, the main CPU 110a issues a power-on designation command indicating that the game control state has been initialized and the current game state (here, the low-probability non-time saving game state as the normal game state) and the payout control board 120 and It transmits to the production control board 130, and moves the process to step S21. As a result, the effect control board 130 performs a process for executing the power-on notification.

The “power-on notification” is a notification for recognizing that the control state of the game has been initialized, and the image display devices 70 and 71 have an initial screen at the time of power-on (background image and initial effect design “135”). ) Is displayed, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 76 are all turned on with a predetermined light emission color (for example, red) for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds), and the RWM area from the audio output device 9 is displayed. The power-on notification sound (“RWM has been cleared”+buzzer sound) indicating that the initialization has been performed is output for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).
In the power-on notification, instead of displaying the initial screen on the image display devices 70, 71, a display for notifying that the RWM has been cleared may be displayed on the image display devices 70, 71.

In step S16, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there is a setting confirmation operation. Specifically, it is determined whether the setting key switch 112a is in the ON state. If there is a setting confirmation operation, the process moves to step S17 as a transition to the setting confirmation mode, and if there is no setting confirmation operation, the control state of the game is returned to the state before the power was turned off. The processing moves to step S18.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting confirmation process in step S17. Specifically, a state confirmation display indicating that the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed is displayed on the state confirmation display 68, and a set value area of the game RWM area is displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 113. The current setting value saved in is displayed, and a setting confirmation designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

Further, when there is a confirmation end operation for changing the setting key switch 112a from the ON state to the OFF state, the display of the set value on the information display 113 is terminated and the state confirmation display on the state confirmation display 68 is terminated. Performs processing to end the setting confirmation mode.

In addition, the effect control board 130 that has received the setting confirmation designation command performs a process for performing setting confirmation notification for notifying that the setting confirmation is being performed. Specifically, a setting confirmation screen indicating that the setting is being confirmed is displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71, and a predetermined light emission is performed during the setting confirmation of the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 76. For example, all lights in a color (for example, white). The sound output device 9 may output a setting confirmation notification sound (“setting value is being confirmed”) indicating that the setting is being confirmed.

In step S18, the main CPU 110a clears (0 clears) the backup flag and the checksum saved in the gaming RWM area, and sets the gaming RWM area when the power is restored. As a result, the progress state (control state) of the game is restored (recovered) to the state before the power is cut off, so that the game can be restarted from the state before the power was cut off.

In step S19, the main CPU 110a transmits to the effect control board 130 a power supply restoration designation command indicating that the control state of the game has been restored and the game state before the occurrence of the power failure. As a result, the effect control board 130 performs processing for ending the setting confirmation notification and the like to be described later and executing the power supply recovery notification.

The "power restoration notification" is a notification for recognizing that the control state of the game has returned to the state before the power was cut off, and the image display devices 70 and 71 display the initial screen (background image and initial effect) at the time of power restoration. The pattern “135”) is displayed, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 are all turned on with a predetermined emission color (for example, blue) for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds), and the sound output device 9 is used. Is to output a power recovery notification sound (“power has been restored”+buzzer sound) indicating that the power has been recovered (from a power failure) for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).
In the power supply restoration notification, instead of displaying the initial screen on the image display devices 70 and 71, a display may be displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71 to notify that the power supply is restored.

Main CPU110a, in step S20, other commands (first special symbol reservation number (U1), and special symbol storage designation command indicating the second special symbol reservation number (U2), normal symbol reservation number (G) Ordinary symbol memory designation command, etc.) is transmitted to the production control board 130. As a result, the effect control board 130 can grasp the number of special figure reservations and the number of ordinary figure reservations, and the process for displaying the first hold icon or the second hold icon on the first image display device 70 can be performed. Will be done.

In step S21, the main CPU 110a transmits a setting value designation command to the effect control board 130. As a result, the effect control board 130 can grasp the current set value. It should be noted that this set value designation command may be transmitted to the effect control board 130 before the power-on designation command or the power restoration designation command is transmitted. Further, the set value designation command may be transmitted every time the variation display of the special symbol is started, or may be transmitted every time the jackpot game is started.

The main CPU 110a activates a CTC (counter timer circuit) for generating a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds) in step S22, and permits all interrupts in step S23.

In step S24, the main CPU 110a performs a process for updating the random number value for reach determination for determining the variation mode (variation time) of the special symbol, and the random number value for determining the special symbol, and for the jackpot determination in step S25. Initial value random number value, special symbol determination initial value random number value, hit determination initial value random number value, and normal symbol determination initial value random number value is updated.

Next, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not power failure (power failure) has occurred in step S26. Specifically, it is determined whether the power failure detection signal is input from the power failure detection circuit of the power supply board 160, and if the power failure detection signal is not input, the process proceeds to step S24, and the power failure detection signal is detected. When the signal is input, the process proceeds to step S27.

The main CPU 110a sets an interrupt prohibition that prohibits a timer interrupt in step S27, performs a process of clearing the output port in step S28, and in step S29, a game RWM area (setting value area is set in the main RAM 110c). (Excluding) checksum (abnormality determination data) is calculated and saved in the game RWM area, and in step S30, a backup flag is saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. In step S31, The process of prohibiting RAM access is performed, and the process waits until the supply of power supply voltage is completely cut off.

As described above, since a plurality of conditions (operations) are set for the setting change operation, it is not possible to easily change the setting, and thus fraudulent acts can be suppressed and the security of the gaming machine is improved. It becomes possible.

Further, since the number of conditions (operations) set for the setting change operation is larger than the conditions (operations) set for the RWM clear operation and the setting confirmation operation, it is the most illegal setting change. It is possible to increase the security of an event in which an action is easily performed, and it is possible to effectively prevent fraud.

In addition, if the checksum is abnormal, non-recoverable error processing is executed to stop the progress of the game, so that the game machine performs an unexpected operation and is annoying to the game store and the player. It is possible to improve the reliability of the game machine without playing the game.

If the value in the set value area is not within the proper range, that is, if the previous power failure may have occurred during the setting change, the unrecoverable error process is executed even if the checksum is normal. By stopping the progress of the game, the game will not proceed in the state where the setting value that the game store side does not intend is set, and the reliability of the gaming machine can be improved. Become.

In addition, during the setting change (during the setting change mode) or during the setting confirmation (during the setting confirmation mode), on the front surface (front surface) of the gaming machine 1, the state confirmation display 68, the image display devices 70 and 71, the frame lighting device. It is possible to recognize that the setting is being changed by checking 10 and the panel lighting device 76, and it is possible to recognize that the setting is being changed by checking the information display 113 on the back surface (back side). ing. That is, it is possible to know whether the setting is being changed from either the front surface (front surface) or the back surface (back surface) of the gaming machine 1.

The setting change operation, the RWM clear operation, and the setting confirmation operation may include the condition that the open detection switch 31a is in the ON state. By doing so, the number of conditions is increased, and thus fraudulent acts can be suppressed and the security of the gaming machine can be further improved.

Further, if it is determined that there is no backup flag (that is, the power is turned on for the first time), and it is determined that the setting change operation has not been performed, if the checksum is determined to be abnormal in step S10 thereafter, the unrecoverable error processing is performed. Is executed, but when it is determined that there is no backup flag, the game RWM area is initialized (cleared to 0) by the game program and the initial value "1" is saved in the setting value area. Then, the process may be moved to step S13.

If it is determined that the backup flag is present (power is restored) and the setting change operation is not performed, and if the checksum is determined to be abnormal in subsequent step S10, non-recoverable error processing is executed. However, when the checksum is determined to be abnormal, the game program initializes the game RWM area (clears to 0) and saves the initial value "1" in the setting value area. The process may be moved to step S13.

In addition, the power-on designation command and the power-restoration designation command are transmitted including the information indicating the current game state, but after the power-on designation command and the power restoration designation command are transmitted, the current game state You may make it transmit the game state designation|designated command which shows.

Also, when the power is turned off or when the power is turned on, the checksum of the game RWM area (excluding the set value area) of the main RAM 110c is calculated by the game program, but the checksum is calculated by the information program. May be calculated. In this case, the calculated checksum may be saved in the information RWM area.

Further, the checksum of the game RWM area (excluding the set value area) is calculated when the power is turned off or when the power is turned on, but the checksum of all the RWM areas may be calculated. Alternatively, the checksum of the game RWM area and the checksum of the information RWM area may be calculated separately, and if one of the checksums is abnormal, the process may be shifted to the non-recoverable error processing.

Also, the setting change designation command is sent at the start of the setting change process, and the power-on designation command is sent after the setting change process ends. However, instead of the setting change designation command, the setting change start designation command is sent. However, instead of the power-on designation command, a setting change end designation command may be transmitted. In this case, the setting change end designation command may be transmitted at the end of the setting change process, or may be transmitted after the setting change process is completed.

Further, when the setting is changed, the RWM clear processing is performed after the setting is changed, but the RWM clear processing may be performed before the setting is changed.

(Main control board timer interrupt processing)
The timer interrupt process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed in the main control board 110 at every predetermined cycle (4 milliseconds).

First, in step S100, the main CPU 110a saves the information stored in the register in the stack area, and in step S110, the special symbol time counter update process, the special game timer counter such as the opening time of the special electric auditors, etc. Update processing of the normal symbol time counter, update processing of the opening/closing time of the movable member 48, and the like, and time control processing of updating various timer counters. Specifically, a process of subtracting 1 from a counter such as a special symbol time counter, a special game timer counter, a normal symbol time counter, a starting opening opening timer counter, or a starting opening closing timer counter is performed.

In step S120, the main CPU 110a determines a big hit determination random number value, a special symbol determination random number value, a special symbol variation pattern determination random number value, a hit determination random number value, a normal symbol determination random number value, and a universal symbol variation pattern determination. A specific random number update process for updating the random number for use is performed. Specifically, each random number value and the random number counter are incremented by 1 and updated. When the added random number counter exceeds the maximum value of the random number range (when the random number counter makes one round), the random number counter is reset to 0, and when the random number counter returns to the initial value of the round, The initial random number value to be set is set as a new orbital initial value, and the random number value is newly updated.

In step S130, the main CPU 110a, similarly to step S30, a big hit determination initial value random number value, a special symbol determination initial value random number value, a hit determination initial value random number value, and a normal symbol determination initial value random number value. Initial value to be updated Random value update processing is performed.

In step S200, the main CPU 110a includes the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the special winning opening detection switch 50a, the first starting opening detecting switch 45a, the second starting opening detecting switch 47a, the gate detecting switch 44a, the out ball detecting switch 52a, and the like. It is determined whether or not there is an input to various switches, and when there is an input, an input control process of setting predetermined data is performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S300, the main CPU 110a performs special symbol storage determination (big hit determination, etc.), display control of special symbol, open/close control of special winning opening 50 (opening/closing member 51), special state special electric control for performing game state control, etc. Perform processing. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 7.

In step S400, the main CPU 110a performs a general/universal/general electric power control process for performing normal symbol storage determination (hit determination, etc.), normal symbol display control, and opening/closing control of the second starting port 47 (movable member 48). ..

In addition, the type of hit ordinary symbol and the type of lost ordinary symbol that are determined as the determination result of the universal symbol determination information performed in the universal symbol/general electric control processing are the same without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, the game play is not overly complicated, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In addition, the selection ratio of various normal patterns and the selection ratio of various lost normal patterns that are determined as the determination result of the universal pattern determination information that is performed in the universal pattern control system become constant without changing depending on the set value. ing. By doing so, the advantage degree of the player is not extremely changed by the set value, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

Next, in step S500, the main CPU 110a transmits a payout state confirmation designation command for confirming the payout state of the payout control board 120 to the payout control board 120, or a prize ball counter (three prize ball counters, which will be described later). With reference to the 10-prize sphere counter and the 15-prize sphere counter, a payout control process for transmitting a payout amount designation command corresponding to various winning openings to the payout control board 120 is performed. Thereby, the payout control board 120 executes control for paying out prize balls from the game ball payout device 100.

In step S600, the main CPU 110a determines the occurrence of a magnetic abnormality or a radio wave abnormality based on the input signals from the magnetic detection sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a, and specifies a magnetic abnormality error designation command or a radio wave abnormality error designation. Magnetic/radio wave abnormality determination processing for transmitting a command to the effect control board 130 is performed. When the production control board 130 receives a magnetic abnormality error designation command or a radio wave abnormality error designation command, it performs control for performing a magnetic abnormality error notification or a radio wave abnormality error notification.

In step S700, the main CPU 110a outputs external information data (game information) output from the game information output terminal board 90, start opening/closing data output to the second start opening/closing solenoid 48b, and large winning opening/closing solenoid 51b. Winning mouth opening and closing data, the first special symbol display device 60, and the special symbol display data to be output to the second special symbol display device 61, the normal symbol display data to be output to the normal symbol display device 62, the first special symbol hold display device 63, and the special symbol hold display data to be output to the second special symbol hold display 64, and the normal symbol hold display data to be output to the normal symbol hold display 65, etc. Data creation processing is performed to create data.

In step S750, the main CPU 110a outputs a signal such as the external information data created in step S700, the starting opening/closing data, and the special winning opening opening/closing data, a special symbol display data, a normal symbol display data. , Special symbol hold display data, display output processing for outputting signals such as normal symbol hold display data, and payout command transmission processing for sending the command set in the payout transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c to the payout control board 120 Alternatively, an output control process for executing a production command transmission process for transmitting a command set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c to the production control board 130 is performed.

In step S800, the main CPU 110a performs information program calling processing. Specifically, after prohibiting the interrupt, the flag register is saved in the game RWM area, and the processing for calling the target information program by the CALL instruction is performed.

In step S810, the main CPU 110a performs a game ball counting process (information program). Specifically, the number of normal medium payouts, which is the number of payouts of prize balls based on the winning of game balls to various winning openings (general winning opening, large winning opening starting opening) during the normal gaming state, and the out during the normal gaming state. Processing is performed to count the number of normal outs which is the number of game balls detected by the ball detection switch 52a, and the total number of outs which is the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 52a regardless of the game state.

Regarding the total number of outs, the number of regular outs, and the number of regular outs, these are game information that is not affected even if the set value is changed (unrelated to the set value). By counting, it becomes possible to calculate the performance information (normal base value described later) excluding the influence of the set value, which can be useful for grasping the performance of the gaming machine 1.

In step S830, the main CPU 110a performs a performance information calculation process (information program). Specifically, the base storage area set in the information RWM area is calculated while calculating the normal base value ((normal medium payout number/normal medium out number)×100) in the current game section divided by the total out number. The normal base value rounded off to the first decimal place is saved in the first area of.

It should be noted that the game section is updated every time the total number of outs reaches 60,000, and the base storage area is once with the first area in which the normal base value in the current game section is stored. A second area for storing the normal base value in the previous game section, a third area for storing the normal base value in the game section two times before, and a normal base value in the game section three times before A fourth area for playing is provided, and the base values for the four game sections including the present are saved in the respective areas.

In step S850, the main CPU 110a performs performance display data setting processing (information program). Specifically, the normal base value (performance information) for the four game sections calculated in the performance information calculation process and saved in the base storage area is displayed on the information display 113 while switching every 5 seconds. Perform processing to set performance display data.

In step S870, the main CPU 110a performs a test data creation process (information program). Specifically, a process of creating test data (test information) to be output to a test facility used when testing the gaming machine 1 is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs an output control process (information program) in step S880. Specifically, display output processing for outputting signals such as performance display data (performance information) set in step S850 to various displays, and processing for outputting signals such as test data created in step S870 are performed. ..

In step S890, the main CPU 110a performs a game program return process. Specifically, processing for returning the flag register from the game RWM area, permitting interrupts, and returning to the game program is performed.

In step S900, the main CPU 110a restores the information saved in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 110a, and ends the current timer interrupt process.

In this way, since the timer interruption is not executed in the setting change process, the RWM clear process, and the setting confirmation process, the number of payouts and the number of outs are calculated, the performance information of the gaming machine is calculated, and the gaming machine Since the performance information is not displayed, the control load on the main control board 110 can be reduced.

Although the performance information calculation process is performed in the timer interrupt process of the main control board 110, it may be performed in the main process of the main control board 110. Also, the game ball counting process may be performed in the main process of the main control board 110. Specifically, it may be performed between step S25 and step S26.

(Main control board input control processing)
The input control processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an input control process in the main control board 110.

In step S210, the main CPU 110a performs a general winning opening detection switch input process. In the general winning opening detection switch input processing, it is determined whether a detection signal is input from the general winning opening detection switch 43a, that is, whether the game ball has won the general winning opening 43 or not. If there is no detection signal input from the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the process proceeds to step S220.

When the detection signal is input from the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the data indicating the 10 winning balls is updated to the award ball counter for general winning openings (10 winning ball counter) used for the winning balls. Then, after adding (1) to the winning ball counter (D) indicating the number of game balls that have entered the winning port and updating (D←D+1), the general winning port detection switch input processing is ended.

In step S220, the main CPU 110a performs a special winning opening detection switch input process. In this special winning opening detection switch input processing, it is determined whether or not a detection signal has been input from the special winning opening detection switch 50a, that is, whether or not a game ball has entered the special winning opening 50. If there is no detection signal input from the special winning opening detection switch 50a, the process proceeds to step S230.

When the detection signal from the special winning opening detection switch 50a is input, the data indicating the 15 winning balls is added to the special winning ball counter (15 winning balls counter) for the winning holes used for winning balls. It is updated and updated by adding "1" to the winning ball counter (D) that indicates the number of gaming balls that entered the winning opening (D←D+1), and whether or not it is currently a jackpot game (special game). Determine whether. If the current big jackpot is playing, the round winning counter (C) for counting the game balls that have won in the big winning opening 50 is updated by adding "1" (C←C+1) to the big winning opening. The detection switch input process ends.

If the current gaming state is not in the special gaming state, an illegal winning ball that indicates the number of gaming balls that have won (winning) a specific winning opening (second starting opening 47, large winning opening 50) outside the winning period The counter (E) is incremented by "1" and updated (E←E+1), and it is determined whether or not the value of the illegal prize ball counter (E) is greater than a prescribed number (for example, 10) to determine the illegal prize. When the value of the ball counter (E) is equal to or less than the specified number, the special winning opening detection switch input process is ended.

If the value of the illegal prize ball counter (E) is greater than the specified number, it is determined that an illegal prize (illegal ball) occurs, in which a gaming ball wins (ball) outside the winning period. The command is set in the production transmission data storage area. As a result, an incorrect winning error designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 issues an incorrect prize error notification to notify that an incorrect prize has occurred.

Then, external information data (output data) for outputting the illegal winning signal from the game information output terminal board 90 is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and the illegal winning ball counter (E) is cleared to detect the big winning opening. The switch input processing ends. Thereby, the illegal prize signal is output from the game information output terminal board 90, and it becomes possible to grasp (identify) that the illegal prize has occurred in the external device.

In step S230, the main CPU 110a performs a first starting opening detection switch input process. In this first starting opening detection switch input processing, it is determined whether the detection signal from the first starting opening detection switch 45a is input, that is, whether the game ball has won the first starting opening 45 or not. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S240, the main CPU 110a performs a second starting opening detection switch input process. In this second starting opening detection switch input processing, substantially the same processing as the first starting opening detection switch input processing shown in FIG. 6 described later is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs a gate detection switch input process in step S250. In this gate detection switch input processing, it is determined whether the detection signal from the gate detection switch 44a is input, that is, whether the game ball has passed the universal figure gate 44. When the detection signal is not input from the gate detection switch 44a, the input control process ends.

When the detection signal is input from the gate detection switch 44a, it is determined whether or not the number of public figure reservations, which is the number of general figure reservation storages stored in the normal symbol reservation storage area, is less than four. If the number of reserved universal figures is not less than 4, the input control process is terminated.

If the number of reserved figures is less than 4, update by adding "1" to the number of reserved figures, and figure determination information (random number value for hit determination, random number value for normal symbol determination, figure variation pattern) Random value for determination) is acquired, the free storage section is searched in order from the first storage section in the normal symbol reservation storage area, and the acquired universal figure determination information is stored in the empty storage section and input. The control process ends.

(Processing for inputting the first starting opening detection switch of the main control board)
The first starting opening detection switch input processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing the first starting opening detection switch input processing in the main control board 110.

First, in step S230-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the detection signal from the first starting opening detection switch 45a is input. If the detection signal from the first starting opening detection switch 45a is input, the process proceeds to step S230-2. If the detection signal from the first starting opening detection switch 45a is not input, the current 1 The starting port detection switch input process is completed.

In step S230-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding and updating data indicating three prize balls to the three prize balls counter used for prize balls, and in step S230-3, special figure determination information ( Big hit determination random number value, special symbol determination random number value, reach determination random number value, special symbol fluctuation pattern determination random number value) are acquired.

In step S230-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the first special symbol reservation number (U1) stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area is less than 4. When the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is less than 4, the process is moved to step S230-5, and when the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is not less than 4, the first start of this time The mouth detection switch input processing ends.

In step S230-5, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding "1" to the first special symbol reservation number (U1) and updating (U1←U1+1), and in step S230-6, the updated first special symbol. The first special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the symbol holding number (U1) is set in the production transmission data storage area. Thereby, the first special symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 can grasp the first special symbol hold number.

In step S230-7, the main CPU 110a sequentially searches for a vacant storage unit from the first storage unit in the first special symbol reserved storage area, and acquires the acquired special symbol determination information in the vacant storage unit. Remember.

As described above, in the predetermined storage section of the first special symbol reserved storage area, special symbol determination information (random number value for jackpot determination, random number value for special symbol determination, random number value for reach determination, and special symbol fluctuation pattern determination A first reserved memory composed of random number values) will be stored.

The main CPU 110a performs a first preliminary determination process in step S230-8. In this first pre-determination process, referring to the pre-determination table (not shown), the special symbol determination information (first reserved memory) acquired this time is displayed before the variable display of the special symbol based on the determination information is performed. Judgment is made, and a planned fluctuation pattern that is a fluctuation pattern to be executed is judged.

In step S230-9, the main CPU 110a sets the first start mouth winning award designation command corresponding to the scheduled variation pattern determined in the first preliminary determination process of step S230-8 in the transmission data storage area for effect, and this time. The first starting opening detection switch input process is completed.

As a result, the scheduled variation pattern can be transmitted to the effect control board 130 as the first start mouth winning designation command, and the sub CPU 130a of the effect control board 130 that has received the first start mouth winning designation command causes the first start mouth winning designation command. The designated command is analyzed, and before the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the first start mouth winning award designation command is started, one or a plurality of variable displays executed before that are given predetermined notice effects. It is possible to execute a pre-reading notice effect. The pre-reading notice effect is one or more of the image display device, the sound output device 9, the frame lighting device 10, the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74, and the board lighting device 76. Is performed using.

In addition, about the 2nd starting mouth detection switch input processing, 1st starting mouth detection switch 45a, 1st special design reservation storage area, 1st reservation storage, 1st special design reservation number (U1), 1st special design memory specification Command, 1st pre-judgment processing, 1st starting mouth winning appointing command, 2nd starting mouth detection switch 47a, 2nd special design reservation storage area, 2nd reservation storage, 2nd special design reservation number (U2), It should be replaced with the 2 special symbol memory designation command, the second preliminary determination process, and the second starting opening winning award designation command.

(Special control of special control of main control board)
The special figure special power control processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 7. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing a special figure special power control process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S301, the main CPU 110a loads the special figure special power processing data, refers to the branch destination address from the special figure special power processing data loaded in step S302, and stores special symbols if the special figure special power processing data=0. The process is moved to the determination process (step S310), the special symbol special electric power process data=1, the process moves to the special symbol variation process (step S320), and the special symbol special electric power process data=2, the special symbol stop process (step) If the special figure special electric power processing data = 3, the processing is moved to the big hit game processing (step S340), and if the special figure special electric power processing data = 4, the big hit game end processing (step S350) is performed. Transfer.

This "special figure special electric power processing data" is set as needed in each subroutine of the special electric figure special electric power control processing, as will be described later, so that the subroutine necessary for the game is appropriately processed. ..

In step S310, the main CPU 110a performs a special symbol storage determination process of determining a big hit, a process of determining the type of a special symbol to be stopped and displayed, and a process of determining a variation time of the special symbol.

Specifically, first, the main CPU 110a determines whether the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is "1" or more, if the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is not "1" or more In, if the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is "1" or more, it is determined whether the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is not "1" or more ("0") Is a variable display of the special symbol, and a customer waiting state determination flag for determining whether or not it is the start of a customer waiting state in which the jackpot game is not executed (standby state in which the game is not progressing) is "0". It is determined whether or not

When the customer waiting state determination flag is "0", it is determined that the customer waiting state has started, the customer waiting state designation command is set in the production transmission data storage area, and the special figure special electric processing data=0 is maintained, When the special symbol storage determination process of this time is finished and the customer waiting state determination flag is not “0”, it is assumed that the customer waiting state has already started, and the special symbol special electricity processing data=0 is maintained, The special symbol storage determination process ends.

If the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is "1" or more, after subtracting "1" from the value stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area, in the second special symbol reservation storage area Various random number values (special figure determination information) stored in one of the first to fourth storage sections are shifted to the previous storage section, and the second special symbol reservation number (U2) after subtraction corresponding to the second 2 Set the special symbol memory designation command in the production transmission data storage area. Thereby, the second special symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, it is possible to grasp the second special symbol hold number in the effect control board 130.

Then, the main CPU 110a performs a jackpot determination (jackpot lottery) for determining whether to execute the jackpot game. Specifically, the random number for special symbol determination among the various random number values (special symbol determination information) shifted from the first storage unit to the 0th storage unit of the second special symbol reservation storage region, for the game RWM region Based on the set value (1 to 4 here) stored in the set value area, and the current probability game state (low-probability game state, high-probability game state), the jackpot game will be executed. It is determined whether it is "" or "miss".

On the other hand, if the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is not "1" or more, if the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is "1" or more, in the first special symbol reservation storage area After subtracting “1” from the stored value, the various random number values stored in the first to fourth storage units in the first special symbol reservation storage area are shifted to the storage unit one before, The first special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the first special symbol reservation number (U1) after subtraction is set in the production transmission data storage area. Thereby, the first special symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 can grasp the first special symbol hold number.

Then, the main CPU 110a performs a jackpot determination (jackpot lottery) for determining whether to execute the jackpot game. Specifically, among the various random number values (special figure determination information) shifted from the first storage section of the first special symbol reserved storage area to the 0th storage section, a random number for special symbol determination, a game RWM area Based on the set value (1 to 4 here) stored in the set value area, and the current probability game state (low-probability game state, high-probability game state), the jackpot game will be executed. It is determined whether it is "" or "miss".

Then, the main CPU 110a performs a special symbol determination process for determining the type of special symbol to be stopped and displayed. Specifically, when the jackpot determination is made based on the special symbol determination random number value stored in the 0th storage section of the second special symbol reservation storage area, it is stored in this 0th storage section. Based on the random number for the big hit symbol, the big hit special symbol or the lost special symbol is determined, and the effect symbol designating command corresponding to the determined special symbol is set in the effect transmission data storage area. Thereby, the effect symbol designating command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 can grasp the type of the special symbol to be stopped and displayed.

In addition, when the jackpot determination is performed based on the special symbol determination random number value stored in the 0th storage unit of the first special symbol reservation storage area, for the jackpot symbol stored in this 0th storage unit Special symbols (big hit special symbol, lost special symbol) are determined based on the random number value, and a production symbol designating command corresponding to the determined special symbol is set in the transmission data storage area for production. Thereby, the effect symbol designating command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 can grasp the type of the special symbol to be stopped and displayed.

Next, the main CPU 110a performs a special figure variation pattern determination process for determining a variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol. Specifically, when the jackpot determination is made based on the special symbol determination random number value stored in the 0th storage section of the second special symbol reservation storage area, it is stored in this 0th storage section. Based on the reach judgment random number value and the random number value for special figure fluctuation, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is determined, and the fluctuation time corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern is set in the special symbol time counter, and the fluctuation pattern is determined. The corresponding variation pattern designation command is set in the production transmission data storage area. Thereby, the variation pattern designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and the production control board 130 can grasp the variation pattern of the special symbol.

Further, when the jackpot determination is performed based on the special symbol determination random number value stored in the 0th storage section of the first special symbol reservation storage area, for the reach determination stored in this 0th storage section Random number value, and the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the random number value for special figure variation, the variation time corresponding to the determined variation pattern is set in the special symbol time counter, and the variation pattern corresponding to the determined variation pattern The specified command is set in the production transmission data storage area. Thereby, the variation pattern designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and the production control board 130 can grasp the variation pattern of the special symbol.

Then, the main CPU 110a sets variable display data for causing the first special symbol display device 60 or the second special symbol display device 61 to perform variable display (blinking of the LED) of the special symbol in a predetermined processing area. ..

As a result, when the variable display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the data for turning on or off the LED is appropriately created in step S600, and the created data is output in step S700. The variable display of the special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display device 60 or the second special symbol display device 61.

Then, the special figure special electric power processing data=0 is set to the special figure special electric power processing data=1, and preparations are made to move to the subroutine of the special symbol variation processing, and the special symbol storage determination processing of this time is ended.

In step S320, the main CPU 110a performs a special symbol variation process of determining whether or not the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the special symbol set in step S310 has passed (special symbol time counter=0). When the variation time has not elapsed, the special symbol variation process of this time is ended while maintaining the special symbol special electricity process data=1.

When the variation time has elapsed, the jackpot special symbol determined in step S310 or the lost special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 or the second special symbol display device 61, and is determined in advance. Set the stop time (0.5 seconds) of the special symbol given to the special symbol time counter. As a result, the player is notified of the result of the jackpot determination.

Then, the special symbol special electric power processing data=1 is set to the special symbol special electric power processing data=2, and preparations are made to move to the subroutine of the special symbol stop processing, and the special symbol fluctuation processing of this time is ended.

In step S330, the main CPU 110a performs a special symbol stop process of determining whether or not the stop time (0.5 seconds) of the special symbol has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the stop time of the special symbol set in step S320 has elapsed (special symbol time counter=0). If the stop time has not elapsed, the special symbol stop process of this time is ended while maintaining the special symbol special electric power process data=2.

When the stop time has elapsed, when the hour/hour count> 0, the hour/hour count counter is updated by subtracting 1, and when the hour/hour count=0, the hour/hour game flag is cleared. 1 is subtracted from the probability counter and updated, and when the high probability count=0, the high probability game flag is cleared.

Then, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special symbol stopped and displayed is a jackpot special symbol. If it is a special jackpot special symbol, the time saving game flag, the high probability game flag, the time saving counter, and the high probability number counter are cleared, and special drawing special electric power processing data=2 to special electric power special processing data=3 are set. Then, the preparation for moving to the subroutine of the big hit game process is performed, and the special symbol stop process of this time is ended.

On the other hand, in the case of a lost special symbol, the special symbol special electric power processing data=2 is set to the special symbol special electric power processing data=0, and preparations are made to move to the subroutine of the special symbol memory determination processing, and this special symbol stop processing To finish.

The main CPU 110a, in step S340, for executing the first jackpot game, the second jackpot game, or the third jackpot game, based on the type of jackpot special symbol (stop symbol data) set in step S310. The jackpot game processing is performed.

Specifically, the opening time of the opening/closing member 51 according to the type of jackpot game is set in the special game timer counter, and the driving data of the special winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b is output to open the opening/closing member 51. At this time, 1 is added to the round game number (R) storage area.

When a specified number of game balls wins (balls) during this opening, or when the opening time of the special winning opening elapses (round winning counter (C) = 10 or special game timer counter = 0), it is large. The output of the drive data of the winning opening/closing solenoid 51b is stopped to close the opening/closing member 51. This completes one round game. Also, the counter value of the round winning counter (C) is cleared.

When the round game of a predetermined number of times (four or 16 times in the present embodiment) is finished, the data stored in the round game number (R) storage area is cleared and the special figure special electric power processing data=3. From the special figure special electric power processing data = 4 is set, it prepares to move to the subroutine of the jackpot game end processing, and ends the jackpot game processing this time.

In step S350, the main CPU 110a determines a probability game state of either a high probability game state or a low probability game state, and also determines a game state of either a time saving game state or a non-time saving game state. The jackpot game end process is performed.

Specifically, based on the type of jackpot special symbol set in step S310 (stop symbol data), high probability game flag setting, high probability number of times setting, time saving game flag setting, setting of time saving number Performed, set from the special figure special electric power processing data = 4 to the special figure special electric power processing data = 0, prepare to move to the subroutine of the special symbol storage determination processing, and finish the jackpot game ending processing of this time.

(Explanation of commands related to production control board)
The types of commands transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9. FIG. 8 and FIG. 9 are diagrams showing the types of commands transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130.

The "first special symbol storage designation command" indicates the first special symbol holding number (U1), and when the first special symbol holding number (U1) increases/decreases, in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. It is set and transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The "second special symbol storage designation command" indicates the second special symbol reservation number (U2),
When the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is increased or decreased, it is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c and transmitted to the production control board 130.

In the present embodiment, the "first special symbol storage designation command" and the "second special symbol storage designation command" may be collectively referred to as "special symbol storage designation command".

The "production symbol designating command" indicates the type (type) of the special symbol that is stopped and displayed, and when various special symbols are determined and the variable display of the special symbol is started, the production transmission of the main RAM 110c. It is set in the data storage area and transmitted to the effect control board 130.

In addition, since the type of special symbol is to determine the type of jackpot game and the gaming state after the jackpot game is finished, the effect symbol designating command indicates the type of jackpot and the gaming state after the jackpot. It can also be said.

The "variation pattern designation command for the first special symbol" indicates the variation time (variation mode) of the special symbol on the first special symbol display device 60, and the variation display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display device 60. When is started, it is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c and transmitted to the production control board 130.

The "variation pattern designation command for the second special symbol" indicates the variation time (variation mode) of the special symbol on the second special symbol display 61, and the variation display of the special symbol on the second special symbol display 61. When is started, it is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c and transmitted to the production control board 130.

In the present embodiment, the “first special symbol variation pattern designation command” and the “second special symbol variation pattern designation command” may be collectively referred to as a “variation pattern designation command”.

The "special symbol confirmation command" indicates that the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the main RAM 110c when the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 or the second special symbol display device 61. It is set in the production transmission data storage area and is transmitted to the production control board 130.

The "normal symbol confirmation command" indicates that the normal symbol has been stopped and displayed, and when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display 62, it is set in the transmission data storage area for effect of the main RAM 110c, and the effect is produced. It is transmitted to the control board 130.

The "starting mouth prize designation command" is for notifying the effect control board 130 in advance of the result of the jackpot determination (lottery), and the game ball is won in the first starting mouth 45 or the second starting mouth 47. When it is done, it is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c and transmitted to the production control board 130.

The "big hit opening designating command" indicates that the big hit game (special game) is started, and is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c when various kinds of big hit games are started. Sent to 130.

The “round designation command” indicates the number of rounds of the big hit game, and is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c when the round game of the big hit game is started and transmitted to the effect control board 130. ..

The "big hit ending designation command" indicates that the big hit game is finished, and is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c when various kinds of big hit games are finished and transmitted to the effect control board 130. It

The "ordinary symbol storage designation command" indicates the normal symbol reservation number (G1), and when the value stored in the normal symbol reservation number (G1) storage area increases or decreases, the effect transmission data storage of the main RAM 110c is stored. It is set in the area and transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The “universal figure designation command” indicates the type of the ordinary symbol that is stopped and displayed on the ordinary symbol display device 62, and when various ordinary symbols are determined and the variable display of the ordinary symbol is started, the main RAM 110c is displayed. It is set in the production transmission data storage area and transmitted to the production control board 130.

The "universal figure variation designation command" indicates the variation time of the ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol display device 62, and is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c when the variation display of the ordinary symbol is started. , To the production control board 130.

The "hit opening designation command" indicates that the winning game (auxiliary game) is started, and is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c when the hit game is started, and the effect control board 130. Sent to.

The “winning ending designation command” indicates that various auxiliary games are finished, and when the winning game is finished, it is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c and transmitted to the production control board 130. It

The "gaming state designation command" indicates whether or not it is a time-saving gaming state, or whether it is a high-probability gaming state. At the start of fluctuation of the special symbol, at the end of fluctuation of the special symbol (start of big hit game) Hour) and at the end of the big hit, it is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c and transmitted to the production control board 130.

The "power-on designation command" and the "power-restoration designation command" indicate whether or not the power-on of the gaming machine 1 is accompanied by the initialization of the main RAM 110c. When turned on, whether or not the main RAM 110c is initialized, and a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command corresponding to the game state are transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The "customer waiting state designation command" indicates that the customer waiting state in which the variable display of the special symbol is not performed is set, and is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c when the customer waiting state is entered. And transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The “error designation command” indicates that an error has occurred in the gaming machine 1 and the type of error, and when it is determined that a magnetic abnormality or a radio wave abnormality has occurred in the magnetic/radio wave abnormality determination processing described above, When it is determined in the above-described special winning opening detection switch input process or the above-described second starting opening detection switch input process that an illegal prize has been generated, it is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and the production control board 130 is set. Sent to.

Further, when the game board mounting frame 3 and the glass frame 4 are opened, the lower tray 12 is full, and a payout abnormality is detected in the payout control board 120, the payout RAM 121c is also set in the production transmission data storage area, and the production control board. Sent to 130.

The "error cancellation designation command" indicates that the error that has occurred in the gaming machine 1 has been resolved, and is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c or the payout RAM 121c when the elimination of various abnormalities is detected. And transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The “setting value designation command” indicates a setting value set in the gaming machine 1. Specifically, after the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command is issued. After being transmitted, it is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

(Main process of production control unit)
Next, the main processing of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a main process of the effect control unit 130m.

When the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, a system reset occurs in the sub CPU 130a, and the sub CPU 130a performs the following main processing.

The sub CPU 130a sets an interrupt prohibition that prohibits a timer interrupt in step E10, and performs an initialization process in step E20. Specifically, when the power is turned on, the main processing program is read from the sub ROM 130b, the flags and the like stored in the sub RAM 130c are initialized, and processing such as initial setting is performed.

The sub CPU 130a sets an interrupt permission for permitting the timer interrupt in step E30, and performs a sub random number updating process in step E40. Specifically, a process of updating various random number values stored in the sub RAM 130c is performed. After that, the process of step E40 is repeated until a predetermined interrupt process is performed.

(Timer interrupt processing of production control unit)
The timer interrupt process of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed in the effect control unit 130m every predetermined cycle (4 milliseconds).

The sub CPU 130a saves the information stored in the register of the sub CPU 130a in the stack area in step E100, and performs the timer updating process in step E120. In this timer updating process, the sub CPU 130a performs a process of updating various timers.

The sub CPU 130a performs an input control process in step E130. Specifically, it is determined whether or not there is an input to various switches such as the effect button detection switch 17a and the cross key detection switch 19a, and if there is an input, a process of setting predetermined data is performed.

The sub CPU 130a performs command analysis processing in step E150. Specifically, a process of determining whether or not various commands are transmitted from the main control board 110 and storing the received command in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c when various commands are transmitted is performed. To do.

The sub CPU 130a performs a setting change/confirmation process in step E170. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting change designation command or the setting confirmation designation command is received by referring to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and if the setting change designation command is received, the above-mentioned setting is performed. When the setting confirmation notification command is received, the processing for executing the change notification is performed, and the processing for executing the above-described setting confirmation notification is performed.

The sub CPU 130a performs a power-on process in step E200. Specifically, it refers to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c to determine whether or not the power-on designation command is received, and when it is received, performs processing for executing the power-on notification. More specifically, a power-on notification command is transmitted to the display/audio control unit 140 to display a power-on screen on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) or the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), The power output sound is output from the voice output device 9.

The sub CPU 130a performs a power failure recovery process in step E250. Specifically, it refers to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c to determine whether or not the power restoration command is received, and when it is received, the processing for executing the power failure restoration notification is performed. More specifically, a power restoration notification command is transmitted to the display/audio control unit 140 to display a power restoration screen on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) or the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), The power output sound is output from the voice output device 9. In addition,

The sub CPU 130a performs a customer waiting effect process in step E300. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the customer waiting state designation command is received by referring to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and if it is received, a process for performing the customer waiting demonstration effect after a predetermined time has elapsed To do. More specifically, a customer waiting effect command is transmitted to the display/sound control unit 140 to display a customer waiting demo screen on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) or the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). The customer output demo sound is output from the audio output device 9. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step E350, the sub CPU 130a performs a game state update process. Specifically, a process of referring to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c to determine whether or not the game state designation command is received, and updating the game state information stored in the sub RAM 130c when the command is received is executed. To do.

The sub CPU 130a performs a pending information update process in step E400. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a special symbol storage designation command or a normal symbol storage designation command is received by referring to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and if received, stored in the sub RAM 130c 1 special symbol reservation number, the second special symbol reservation number, the normal symbol reservation number and the like is updated.

In step E500, the sub CPU 130a performs a look-ahead system effect process. Specifically, it is determined by referring to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c whether or not a start mouth winning award designation command or a variation pattern designation command is received, and if so, an icon change as a look-ahead system effect. Performs processing related to production, continuous notice production, and lamp change production. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

The “icon change effect” is a kind of pre-reading notice effect that makes the player expect the jackpot game to be executed by changing the display mode of the hold icon and the icon. In the present embodiment, the icon change effect for the hold icon may be referred to as "hold icon change effect", and the icon change effect for the icon may be referred to as "icon change effect".

The "continuous notice effect" is a type of pre-read notice effect that causes the player to expect the jackpot game to be executed by executing a predetermined effect over one or more variable effects.
The "lamp change effect" is a type of pre-reading announcement effect that expects the player to execute the jackpot game by changing the light emission mode of the winning opening lamp over one or more variable effects.

In step E600, the sub CPU 130a performs a special map/special electric effect process. Specifically, referring to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c, effect design designation command, special design variation pattern designation command, special design determination command, big hit opening designation command, round designation command, big hit ending designation command, etc. It is determined whether or not is received, and when it is received, a process for executing an effect corresponding to the received command is performed.

In step E800, the sub CPU 130a performs a universal figure/general electric vehicle effect process. Specifically, referring to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c, whether or not the universal figure designating command, the universal figure variation designating command, the ordinary symbol confirming command, the winning opening designating command, the winning ending designating command, etc. are received. It is determined whether or not, and when it is received, a process for executing the effect corresponding to the received command is performed.

The sub CPU 130a performs an error notification process in step E850. Specifically, by referring to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c, it is determined whether an error designation command or an error cancellation designation command is received, and if so, an error notification effect corresponding to the received error designation command. Is performed, or processing for ending the error notification effect corresponding to the received error cancellation designation command is performed.

The sub CPU 130a performs an output control process in step E900. Specifically, it performs a process of outputting a signal such as predetermined data or transmitting various commands stored in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c to the display/audio control unit 140 or the lamp/drive control unit 150. ..

In step E950, the sub CPU 130a restores the information saved in step E100 to the register of the sub CPU 130a, and ends the current timer interrupt process.

(Customer waiting production process of production control unit)
The customer waiting effect process of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the customer waiting effect process in the effect control unit 130m.

In step E300-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the customer waiting state designation command is received from the main control board 110. If the customer waiting state designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to step E300-4. If the customer waiting state designation command has been received, at step E300-2, until the customer waiting demonstration effect starts. The demo waiting time determination table (see FIG. 13) for determining the waiting time of is selected. The details of the demo waiting time determination table will be described later.

In step E300-3, the sub CPU 130a determines the demo waiting time and sets it in the demo waiting timer. Specifically, referring to the demo standby time determination table shown in FIG. 13, one demo standby time is determined from a plurality of demo standby times based on the current game state and current state.

In step E300-4, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the demo is in standby. Specifically, it is determined whether the demo standby timer is set. If it is not in the demo waiting state, the customer waiting demonstration process is terminated without performing the customer waiting demonstration effect. If it is in the demo waiting state, the demo waiting timer is updated by -1 in step E300-5. ..

In step E300-6, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the demo standby timer=0. If the demo waiting timer is not 0, the customer waiting demonstration process of this time is terminated assuming that the customer waiting demo production is not executed yet. If the demo standby timer is 0, the customer waiting demonstration production is performed in step E300-7. The command is set in the transmission buffer, and the customer waiting effect process this time is ended. As a result, the customer waiting demonstration effect command is transmitted to the display/voice control unit 140 and the lamp/drive control unit 150, and the customer waiting demonstration effect for inviting the player to execute the game is executed.

(Demo waiting time determination table)
FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a demo waiting time determination table that is referred to when determining the waiting time until the start of the customer waiting demonstration effect.

In the demo waiting time determination table in FIG. 13, the gaming state, the current state, and the selected demo waiting time are associated with each other. The demo waiting time in the normal gaming state has four types of demo waiting times of 30 seconds to 70 seconds, and the demo waiting time in the specific gaming state has four types of demo waiting times of 35 seconds to 75 seconds. Is set.

The first feature of the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. 13 is that the demonstration standby time after the effect design is statically displayed on the image display device immediately after the power is turned on and the effect design on the image display device immediately after the power is restored. The demo wait time after the static display, the demonstration display fluctuation display ends (variation time elapses) and the demo wait time after the performance pattern is statically displayed, and the customer design after the customer wait demonstration production finishes There is a difference from the demo waiting time after is displayed statically. By doing so, the customer waiting demonstration effect can be executed at an appropriate time according to the current state, and the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

As a second feature of the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. 13, the variable display of the effect symbol is finished (variation) from the demonstration standby time after the effect symbol is statically displayed on the image display device immediately after the power is turned on One of the points is that the demo waiting time after the production design is statically displayed after a lapse of time) is longer. By doing so, the customer waiting demonstration effect can be executed at an appropriate time according to the possibility that the player is playing the game, and the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

As the third feature of the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. 13, as the demonstration standby time after the variable display of the effect symbol is finished (the variable time has elapsed) and the effect symbol is statically displayed, the power is restored. Immediately after that, the demonstration standby time after the effect design is statically displayed on the image display device is longer. By doing so, the customer waiting demonstration effect can be executed at an appropriate time according to the possibility that the player is playing the game, and the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

The fourth feature of the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. 13 is that the image display device is rendered immediately after the power is restored, rather than the demo standby time after the production symbol is statically displayed on the image display device immediately after power is turned on. One of the points is that the demo waiting time after the symbol is displayed statically is longer. By doing so, the customer waiting demonstration effect can be executed at an appropriate time according to the possibility that the player is playing the game, and the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

The fifth feature of the demo waiting time determination table shown in FIG. 13 is that the demo waiting time is the shortest after the effect symbols are statically displayed after the end of the customer waiting demonstration effect. By doing so, the appeal of the player to the game can be effectively increased, and the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

The sixth feature of the demo wait time determination table shown in FIG. 13 is that each demo wait time in a specific game state (low accurate time short game state, high probability short time game state) is higher than each demo standby time in the normal game state. The longer point is. By doing so, the customer waiting demonstration effect can be executed at an appropriate time according to the possibility that the player is playing the game, and the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

(Pre-reading type production process of production control unit)
The prefetching system effect process of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing a look-ahead system effect process in the effect control unit 130m.

In step E510, the sub CPU 130a performs icon change effect determination processing for determining whether or not to execute the icon change effect, the effect mode of the icon change effect, and the like. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step E520, the sub CPU 130a executes an icon change effect determined to be executed in the icon change effect determination process (changes the already displayed hold icon or the display mode of the icon). Perform update processing. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step E530, the sub CPU 130a performs a continuous announcement effect determination process for determining whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect and the effect mode of the continuous announcement effect. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step E540, the sub CPU 130a performs a continuous announcement effect execution process for executing the continuous announcement effect determined to be executed in the continuous announcement effect determination process. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step E550, the sub CPU 130a performs a lamp change effect execution process for executing a lamp change effect (lights the winning opening lamp NR so that the light emission mode corresponds to the icon whose display mode has changed). The look-ahead production process is ended. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

(Icon change effect determination process of effect control unit)
The icon change effect determination process of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing an icon change effect determination process in the effect control unit 130m.

In step E510-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the start mouth winning award designation command is received from the main control board 110. If the starting mouth winning designation command is received, the process proceeds to step E510-2. If the starting mouth winning designation command is not received, the current icon change effect determination process is ended.

In step E510-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the received start opening winning award designation command and grasps whether or not it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot game, and the effect contents (scheduled variation pattern).

In step E510-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the present is the executable period of the icon change effect. If it is the executable period of the icon change effect, the process proceeds to step E510-4. If it is not the executable period of the icon change effect, the process proceeds to step E510-8.

The “executable period of the icon change effect” is that the jackpot game is not being executed, the icon change effect is not being executed, or the icon change effect is not scheduled to be executed. Note that any one of the above three conditions or only two conditions may be provided. Further, when the received starting mouth winning designation command is based on the winning of the first starting opening 45, it is in the normal game state, and the received starting mouth winning designation command is for winning the second starting opening 47. If it is based, it may be provided that it is a specific game state (a low-probability time short game state, a high-probability time short game state) or the like.

In step E510-4, the sub CPU 130a determines that all the preliminary determination results of the preceding hold (holding storage corresponding to the previously received start opening winning award designation command) are equal to or less than the normal reach, that is, all the preliminary determination results of the preceding hold are normal fluctuations, It is determined whether the shortened fluctuation or the normal reach. If all are below normal reach, the process moves to step E510-5, and if all are below normal reach, the process moves to step E510-8.

In step E510-5, the sub CPU 130a acquires an icon display mode determining random number value for determining the final display mode of the icon additionally displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and in step E510-6. , An icon final display mode determination table (see FIG. 16) for determining the final display mode of the icon is selected. The details of the icon final display mode determination table will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines the final icon display mode in step E510-7. Specifically, the sub CPU 130a refers to the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 16, and based on the expected variation pattern indicated by the starting mouth winning award designation command and the selection rate (%) of each icon final display mode. One icon final display mode is determined from a plurality of icon final display modes.

In step E510-8, the sub CPU 130a determines the normal icon (CD icon) that is the normal display mode as the icon final display mode.

In step E510-9, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the determined icon final display mode is the display mode (special icon) for executing the icon change effect. If it is the display mode for executing the icon change effect, the process proceeds to step E510-10. If it is not the display mode for executing the icon change effect, the process proceeds to step E510-13.

In step E510-10, the sub CPU 130a selects the change scenario determination table (see FIG. 17) for determining the change scenario of the icon change effect. The details of the change scenario determination table will be described later. This change scenario indicates the transition of the display mode from the appearance of the hold icon to the disappearance thereof.

In step E510-11, the sub CPU 130a determines the change scenario and sets it in the prefetch information storage area corresponding to the pending storage number counter of the sub RAM 130c. Specifically, referring to the change scenario determination table shown in FIG. 17, based on the icon final display mode, the number of reserved memories of special symbols corresponding to the starting mouth winning award designation command, and the selection rate (%) of each change scenario. Then, one change scenario is determined from a plurality of change scenarios.

In step E510-12, the sub CPU 130a specifies the winning icon, which is the icon display mode first displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), from the determined change scenario, and the icon of the winning icon is displayed. The display command is set in the transmission buffer, and the current icon change effect determination processing is ended. As a result, the icon display command is transmitted to the display/voice control unit 140 and the lamp/drive control unit 150, and the hold icon in the display mode corresponding to the icon display command of the winning icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). Or a predetermined sound effect (the first winning sound when displayed by the normal icon, the second winning sound when displayed by the special icon) is output.

In step E510-13, the sub CPU 130a determines a non-change scenario in which the icon change effect is not executed and sets it in the prefetch information storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number counter of the sub RAM 130c.

In step E510-14, the sub CPU 130a sets the icon display command for the normal icon in the transmission buffer, and ends the icon change effect determination process this time. As a result, the icon display command is transmitted to the display/voice control unit 140 and the lamp/drive control unit 150, and the hold icon in the display mode corresponding to the icon display command of the normal icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). It is displayed or a predetermined sound effect (first winning sound) is output.

In the icon change effect determination process of the present embodiment, the icon change effect (hold icon change effect, the icon change effect) is executed when the pre-holding preliminary determination results are all normal reach or less. The icon change effect may be executed when the pre-holding preliminary determination result indicates that the reach effect is not performed, and the icon change effect may not be executed when the reach effect is performed. By doing this, the display mode of the hold icon does not change during the variable effect corresponding to the preceding hold in which the reach effect is executed, and the hold icon is displayed during the variable effect corresponding to the preceding hold in which the reach effect is not executed. The display mode is changed, and the reach effect is not obstructed by the icon change effect, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, even if the preliminary determination result of the preceding hold includes the one performing the reach effect, the icon change effect may be executed, but the preliminary determination result of the preceding hold includes the one performing the reach effect. The icon change effect may be executed more easily (executed at a higher rate) than when the reach effect is included in the case where there is no reach effect.

(Icon final display mode determination table)
FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an icon final display mode determination table that is referred to when determining the icon final display mode.

In the icon final display mode determination table, the expected variation pattern indicated by the starting mouth winning designation command, the selection rate (%) of each icon final display mode, and the selected icon final display mode are associated.

In the final display mode of the icons, a CD icon as a normal icon, and a blue character icon, a red character icon, and a rainbow character as special icons suggesting that there is a possibility of being a jackpot (a jackpot game is executed) The icon is set.

The expectation of winning the jackpot related to the special icon increases in the order of (CD icon <) blue character icon <red character icon <rainbow character icon, and the rainbow character icon is an icon that is determined to be a jackpot. ..

Here, as a main feature of the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 16, the selection rate of the icon final display mode is changed according to the scheduled variation pattern. Specifically, in the present embodiment, when the planned fluctuation pattern is SP reach or SPSP reach, the special icon has a higher ratio than when the planned fluctuation pattern is normal fluctuation, shortened fluctuation or normal reach that does not reach. To be selected.

In the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 16, the normal icon (CD icon) is not selected as the icon final display mode in the case of a big hit, but it may be selected. ..

(Change scenario decision table)
FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a change scenario determination table that is referred to when determining a change scenario.

The change scenario determination table is associated with the icon final display mode, the number of reserved memories of special symbols corresponding to the starting mouth winning award designation command, the selection rate (%) of each change scenario, and the change scenario to be selected. For reference, the prior change in each change scenario and the update mode of the icon in the change are described.

The "pre-variation" is a variation display (variation effect) executed based on the special figure determination information stored before the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received start mouth winning award designation command. The "variation" is a variation display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received start mouth winning designation command.

In the change scenario, the display mode of the icon does not change during execution of the preliminary change (the hold icon change effect is not executed) and changes during execution of the change (the icon change effect is executed). The scenario (for example, scenario 01 etc.) or the display mode of the icon changes during execution of the preliminary change (the hold icon change effect is executed), but does not change during execution of the change (the icon change effect is Scenarios that are not executed (for example, scenario 02, etc.), or the display mode of the icon changes during execution of the pre-variation, and during execution of the variation (holding icon change effect and the icon change effect are executed). ) A scenario (for example, scenario 15) is set.

In the change scenario determination table according to the present embodiment, a scenario that changes the display mode of the icon is determined regardless of whether or not the reach effect (the reach other than the normal reach may be executed) is executed in the preliminary change. However, the display mode of the icon is changed by the change scenario determination table that has a determination factor as to whether or not the reach effect that suggests that the jackpot game may be executed in the preliminary change is executed. You may make it determine the scenario to be made. When such a change scenario determination table is used, the display mode of the icon does not change during execution of the pre-variation in which the reach effect is executed, and the icon of the icon is changed during execution of the pre-change in which the reach effect is not executed. It is advisable to set various scenarios so that the display mode changes. In addition, although a change in the display mode of the icon occurs during the execution of the pre-variation in which the reach effect is executed and the pre-variation in which the reach effect is not executed, the reach effect is generated more than during the execution of the pre-variation in which the reach effect is executed. Various scenarios may be set such that the change in the icon display mode occurs at a higher rate during the execution of the pre-change that is not executed.

(Icon display mode update process of effect control unit)
The icon display mode update process of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the icon display mode update processing in the effect control unit 130m.

In step E520-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a variation pattern designation command has been received from the main control board 110. If the variation pattern designation command is received, the process proceeds to step E520-2, and if the variation pattern designation command is not received, the current icon display mode update process is terminated.

In step E520-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the icon change scenario stored in the prefetch information storage area of the sub RAM 130c, and determines in step E520-3 whether or not the icon change scenario is stored. .. If the change scenario of the icon is not stored, it is determined that the power recovery in which the change scenario is cleared from the sub RAM 130c has occurred, and the process proceeds to step E520-10. Shifts the processing to step E520-4.

In step E520-4, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not there is a hold icon that changes (updates) the display mode in the current variation effect. If there is a hold icon for changing the display mode, the process proceeds to step E520-5, and if there is no hold icon for changing the display mode, the process proceeds to step E520-8.

In step E520-5, the sub CPU 130a selects the change pattern determination table for the hold icon (see FIG. 19) for determining the change pattern (change mode) of the display mode of the hold icon to be changed. The details of the change pattern determination table for the hold icon will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines the hold icon change pattern in step E520-6. Specifically, referring to the change pattern determination table for the hold icon shown in FIG. 19, among the plurality of hold icon change patterns based on the mode of the hold icon change and the selection rate (%) in this variation effect. From this, one hold icon change pattern is determined.

In step E520-7, the sub CPU 130a sets a change effect command according to the determined hold icon change pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the change effect command is transmitted to the display/voice control unit 140 and the lamp/drive control unit 150, and the first image display device 70 according to the change timing according to the hold icon change pattern and the change stage in the change timing. The display mode of the hold icon displayed on the (main liquid crystal) is changed, and a predetermined sound effect (change sound) is output.

In step E520-8, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not there is the icon that changes (updates) the display mode. If there is the icon that changes the display mode, the process proceeds to step E520-9. If there is no icon that changes the display mode, the current icon display mode update process ends.

In step E520-9, the sub CPU 130a selects a change pattern from a plurality of change pattern determination tables for the icon for determining the change pattern (change mode) of the display mode of the icon to be changed, and The change pattern determination table (see FIGS. 20 and 21) for the icon is selected according to the change stage in which the icon changes. The details of the change pattern determination table for the icon according to the change stage will be described later.

In step E520-10, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not to execute the icon change effect as compensation for the icon change effect that may not be executed due to the occurrence of power restoration. The icon change pattern determination table (FIG. 22) is selected. The details of the icon change pattern determination table for power interruption will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines the icon change pattern in step E520-11. Specifically, referring to the change pattern determination table for the selected icon, a plurality of the icon are selected based on the mode of the icon change in the current variation effect and the selection rate (%) of each icon change pattern. One icon change pattern is determined from the change patterns.

In step E520-12, the sub CPU 130a sets a change effect command according to the determined icon change pattern in the transmission buffer, and ends the icon display mode update process this time. As a result, the change effect command is transmitted to the display/voice control unit 140 and the lamp/drive control unit 150, and the first image display device 70 according to the change timing according to the icon change pattern and the change stage in the change timing. The display mode of the icon displayed on the (main liquid crystal) changes, and a predetermined sound effect (change sound) is output.

As described above, according to the icon display mode update processing shown in FIG. 18, when the power supply restoration occurs during the execution of the icon change presentation, and when the icon change presentation is executed again in the variation presentation started after the power supply restoration. There is. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the feeling of dissatisfaction that accompanies the end of the icon change effect due to the occurrence of power restoration, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

Further, according to the icon display mode update process shown in FIG. 18, even when the icon change effect is executed again in the change effect that is started after the power is restored, the effect of the icon change effect is generated based on the current change pattern. By newly determining the mode, the change scenario before power restoration (the stage suggested before the stop of power supply) is not executed from the continuation. By doing so, it is possible to execute the icon change effect in accordance with the content of the current change effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

When the power is restored during the execution of the icon change effect, in the variable effect that is started after the power is restored, the pending storage (special figure determination information) that precedes the pending storage (special figure determination information) that triggers the execution of the icon change effect. The icon change effect may not be executed in the variable effect corresponding to the special figure determination information), and the icon change effect may be executable in the variable effect corresponding to the pending storage that triggered the execution of the icon change effect.

(Change pattern determination table for hold icon)
FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a change pattern determination table for a hold icon that is referred to when determining a change pattern for a hold icon.

The change pattern determination table for the hold icon is associated with the mode of the change of the hold icon in this variation effect, the selection rate (%) of each hold icon change pattern, and the selected hold icon change pattern, For reference, the change effect generation timing of the hold icon in each hold icon change pattern and the change stage are described.

The hold icon change pattern is a normal change pattern 01 in which the display mode of the hold icon changes with the output of a sound effect when the hold icon is shift-displayed (at the start of fluctuation) in response to the disappearance of the icon. Or, a normal change pattern 02 in which the display mode of the hold icon changes while changing with the output of a sound effect, or an action effect that acts on the icon starting from the character with the appearance of the character and displaying the icon is displayed. A character action change pattern 01 in which the form changes, and a change notification pattern indicating that the display form of the icon changes as a result of the change effect are temporarily displayed, and an effect effect that acts on the hold icon with the change notification pattern as a starting point. Is performed and the symbol action change pattern 01 in which the display mode of the hold icon is changed is set.

The change effect generation timing of the hold icon is classified in relation to the progress state of the variable effect, when the variable effect is started (when the fluctuation starts), while the variable effect is being executed (during change), and the effect pattern. There is a case where 70a temporarily stops ((temporarily) stopping).

At the stage of changing the holding icon, the jackpot winning expectation is changed to a display mode one level higher (for example, a CD icon changes to a blue character icon, a blue character icon changes to a red character icon), and a jackpot 2UP (for example, a change from a CD icon to a red character icon) that changes the winning expectation level to a display mode in two steps is set.

Although the change effect generation timing of the hold icon is the above three timings, it is not limited to these timings, and other timings may be provided. For example, it may be provided that the variation effect is being executed (changing) until the reach is established, the normal reach is being executed, the SP (SPSP) reach is being executed, or the like.

(Change pattern determination table for the icon)
20 and 21 are diagrams showing a change pattern determination table for the icon that is referred to when determining the change pattern of the icon, and FIG. 20 changes the display mode of the icon by one step. FIG. 21 is a table referred to in this case, and FIG. 21 is a table referred to in the case of changing the display mode of the icon in two steps.

The change pattern determination table for the icon is associated with the mode of the icon change in the current variation effect, the selection rate (%) of each icon change pattern, and the selected icon change pattern, For reference, the change effect generation timing and change stage of the icon in each icon change pattern are described.

The icon change pattern includes a normal change pattern 01 in which the display mode of the hold icon changes at the start of the change with the output of the sound effect, and a normal change pattern 01 in which the display mode of the hold icon changes during the change with the output of the sound effect. A change pattern 02 and a character action change pattern 01 in which a character appears and an action effect that acts on the icon starting from the character is performed to change the display mode of the icon are set.

The change effect generation timing of the icon is classified in relation to the progress state of the variable effect, when the variable effect is started (when the fluctuation starts), while the variable effect is being executed (during change), and the effect symbol. There is a case where 70a temporarily stops ((temporarily) stopping).

At the change stage of the icon, the jackpot winning expectation is changed to a display mode one step higher (for example, a change from a CD icon to a blue character icon, a change from a blue character icon to a red character icon), and a big hit. 2UP (for example, a change from a CD icon to a red character icon, a change from a blue character icon to a rainbow character icon) is set to change the winning degree to a display mode in two steps.

In the change pattern determination table for the icon of the present embodiment, the symbol action change pattern 01 is not selected, but it may be selected. For example, in the fluctuating effect of performing the pseudo continuous effect, the change notification symbol may be tentatively stopped and displayed when the temporary stop display of the effect symbol 70a before the pseudo fluctuating is performed.

"Pseudo continuous production" is a variation display of production symbols as if it were multiple times for the jackpot determination based on winning (ball entry) to the starting opening (first starting opening 45, second starting opening 47) once. In order to make it appear as if the game was executed, all of the special starting points (first starting opening 45, second starting opening 47) within the special figure fluctuation time determined for winning (ball entry) It is the variable display of the effect symbol of a special mode in which the re-variation display for starting the variation again after the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped is executed once or a plurality of times.

Although the change effect generation timing of the icon is the above-mentioned two timings, it is not limited to these timings, and other timings may be provided. For example, it may be provided that the variation effect is being executed (changing) until the reach is established, the normal reach is being executed, the SP (SPSP) reach is being executed, or the like.

(The icon change pattern determination table for power interruption)
FIG. 22 is a diagram showing the icon change pattern determination table for power interruption, which is referenced when determining the change pattern of the icon.

In the icon change pattern determination table for power interruption, the change pattern indicated by the change pattern designation command, the final display mode of the icon, the selection rate (%) of the icon change pattern, and the selected icon The final display mode and the selected icon change pattern are associated with each other, and the change effect generation timing of the icon and the change stage of the icon in each icon change pattern are described for reference.

It should be noted that each of the icon change patterns, the change effect generation timing of the icon, and the change stage of the icon are the same as those described in the change pattern determination table for the icon described above, and thus the description thereof is omitted here. To do.

(Relationship between the change icon occurrence frequency of the hold icon display mode and the change effect occurrence timing)
FIG. 23A is a diagram showing the relationship of the occurrence frequency between the hold icon display mode and the change effect occurrence timing.

When the display mode of the hold icon changes to the blue character icon, the frame update timing in response to the reception of the predetermined command has a higher occurrence frequency of the change effect than the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command. ing.

Also, when the display mode of the hold icon changes to a blue character icon, the frequency of occurrence of change effect is higher at the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command than at the frame update timing according to the reception of the predetermined command. It's getting low.

That is, when the icon change effect is executed at the frame update timing according to the reception of the predetermined command, the hold icon is more than the icon change effect is executed at the predetermined frame update timing after the variation pattern designation command is received. It can be said that the display mode of is easily changed to the blue character icon.

On the other hand, when the display mode of the hold icon changes to a red character icon, the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command is more frequent than the frame update timing according to the reception of the predetermined command. It's getting higher.

When the display mode of the hold icon changes to a red character icon, the frame update timing in response to the reception of the predetermined command has a frequency of occurrence of the change effect more than the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command. It's getting low.

That is, the hold icon is executed when the icon change effect is executed at the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command, rather than when the icon change effect is executed at the frame update timing according to the reception of the predetermined command. It can be said that the display mode of is easily changed to the red character icon. It should be noted that the predetermined command is a start mouth winning designation command or a variation pattern designation command.

Specifically, the change effect that occurs at the frame update timing in response to the reception of the predetermined command is that the game ball wins the starting opening (first starting opening 45, second starting opening 47) and the hold icon is displayed. It is a change effect in which the hold icon is displayed as a special icon at the timing (the change effect at the time of winning) and a normal change pattern 01.
In addition, the change effect that occurs at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the change pattern designation command is a normal change pattern 02, a character action change pattern 01, and a symbol action change pattern 01.

Since the relationship of the change effect occurrence frequency between the hold icon display mode and the change effect occurrence timing is as described above, the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command is the predetermined command. Since the frequency of change effects that change to a red character icon that has a higher jackpot winning expectation than the frame update timing according to the reception of is high, it is possible to let the player pay attention to the change effect occurrence timing and improve the fun of the game. It becomes possible.

Also, since the frame update timing in response to the reception of the predetermined command occurs more frequently than the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command, the change effect that changes to the blue character icon occurs more frequently In addition, although it is difficult to change to a red character icon with a high expectation of jackpot winning, it is easy to change to a blue character icon, so it is possible to make the player pay attention to the subsequent fluctuation production and improve the interest of the game. It will be possible.

(Relation effect generation frequency relationship between change effect type and change effect occurrence timing 1)
FIG. 23B is a diagram showing a relationship 1 of change effect occurrence frequency between change effect type and change effect occurrence timing.

When the change effect occurs at the frame update timing in response to the reception of the predetermined command, the hold icon change effect has a higher change effect occurrence frequency than the icon change effect.

Further, when the change effect occurs at the frame update timing in response to the reception of the predetermined command, the change effect occurrence frequency of the icon change effect is lower than that of the hold icon change effect.

Since the relationship between the change effect generation frequency and the change effect occurrence frequency between the change effect type and the change effect occurrence timing is as described above, the hold icon is likely to change at an early stage of the change effect, so the game The player's expectation for the jackpot game can be pulled over a long period of time, and the interest of the game can be improved. It should be noted that the predetermined command is a start mouth winning designation command or a variation pattern designation command.

(Relationship 2 of change effect generation frequency between change effect type and change effect occurrence timing)
FIG. 23C is a diagram showing a relationship 2 of change effect occurrence frequency between change effect type and change effect occurrence timing.

When a change effect occurs at a predetermined frame update timing after the variation pattern designation command is received, the change effect occurrence frequency of the icon change effect is higher than that of the hold icon change effect.

Further, when the change effect occurs at a predetermined frame update timing after the variation pattern designation command is received, the hold icon change effect has a lower change effect occurrence frequency than the icon change effect.

Since the relationship of the change effect occurrence frequency between the change effect type and the change effect occurrence timing is as described above, the icon is likely to change at a time when the change effect is late, so the game It is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by pulling the player's expectation for the jackpot game until the time when the variation production is delayed.

(Relationship between icon display mode and notification sound when icon is generated (changed))
FIG. 23D is a diagram showing the relationship between the icon display mode and the notification sound when the icon is generated (changed).

When the CD icon is generated as the hold icon, the first occurrence notification sound is output as the notification sound when the icon is generated, and when the hold icon and the blue character icon is generated (when changed to), The second generation notification sound (change notification sound) is output as the notification sound when the icon is generated (changed), and when the hold icon and the red character icon is generated (changes to), the icon generation (changes to) is generated. The third generation notification sound (change notification sound) is output as the notification sound at the time of change), and when the icon changes to a rainbow character icon, the fourth generation notification sound (change notification sound) as the notification sound at the time of icon change Is set to be output.

In the present embodiment, different notification sounds are set for the plurality of icon display modes (four types), but the notification sound generated when the CD icon is generated and the blue character icon and the red character icon are generated. , And a change notification sound when the icon changes to a rainbow character, the notification sound may not be output when the CD icon occurs, and the notification sound may be output only when the icon changes to any mode. You may make it output. In addition, as for the rainbow character icon that is determined to be a jackpot, a dedicated change notification sound may be provided and three types may be provided.

(Continuous notice effect determination process of effect control unit)
The continuous announcement effect determination process in the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the continuous notice effect determination process in the effect control unit 130m.

In step E530-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the start mouth winning designation command is received from the main control board 110. When the starting mouth winning designation command is received, the process is moved to step E530-2, and when the starting mouth winning designation command is not received, the continuous notice effect determination process of this time is ended.

In step E530-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the received start opening winning award designation command and grasps whether or not it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot game, and the effect contents (scheduled variation pattern).

In step E530-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the present is the executable period of the continuous announcement effect. If it is the executable period of the continuous announcement effect, the process proceeds to step E530-4. If it is not the executable period of the continuous announcement effect, the process is moved to step E530-6 assuming that the continuous announcement effect is not executed. ..

The "executable period of continuous notice effect" is that the jackpot game is not being executed, the continuous notice effect is not being executed, or the continuous notice effect is not scheduled to be executed. Note that any one of the above three conditions or only two conditions may be provided. Further, when the received starting mouth winning designation command is based on the winning of the first starting opening 45, it is in the normal game state, and the received starting mouth winning designation command is for winning the second starting opening 47. If it is based, it may be provided that it is a specific game state (a low-probability time short game state, a high-probability time short game state) or the like.

In step E530-4, the sub CPU 130a selects a notice scenario determination table (see FIG. 25) for determining a notice scenario for continuous notice effects. The details of the advance notice scenario determination table will be described later. This advance notice scenario indicates a transition of advance notice effects over one or a plurality of variable effects.

In step E530-5, the sub CPU 130a determines the advance notice scenario and sets it in the prefetch information storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number counter of the sub RAM 130c, and finishes the continuous advance notice effect determination process of this time. Specifically, referring to the advance notice scenario determination table shown in FIG. 25, the number of reserved memories of special symbols corresponding to the starting mouth winning designation command, the type of starting mouth winning designation command, the selection rate (%) of each advance scenario Based on this, one notice scenario is determined from among a plurality of notice scenarios (including non-notice scenarios). The details of the advance notice scenario determination table will be described later.

In step E530-6, the sub CPU 130a determines the non-preliminary scenario in which the continuous announcement effect is not executed, sets it in the prefetch information storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number counter of the sub RAM 130c, and ends this continuous announcement effect determination process. To do.

(Preliminary scenario decision table)
FIG. 25 is a diagram showing a notice scenario determination table that is referred to when determining a notice scenario for continuous notice production.

In the advance notice scenario determination table, the number of reserved memories of special symbols corresponding to the starting mouth winning designation command, the planned fluctuation pattern indicated by the starting mouth winning designation command, the selection rate (%) of each advance notice scenario, and the selected advance notice scenario Are associated with each other, and the advance change in each advance scenario and the effect mode of advance effect in the advance are described for reference.

In the notice scenario, an effect image is displayed around the effect design 70a at the start of the variation effect, a notice effect is not executed (for example, scenario 00), and at the start of the advance change, an effect image is displayed around the effect pattern 70a. Is not displayed, but a scenario in which an effect image is displayed around the effect design 70a at the start of the variation (for example, scenario 01), at the start of pre-variation, and at the start of the effect an effect around the effect design 70a A scenario in which an image is displayed (for example, scenario 02) is set.

(Continuous notice effect execution process of effect control unit)
The continuous announcement effect execution process of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the continuous notice effect execution process in the effect control unit 130m.

In step E540-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a variation pattern designation command has been received from the main control board 110. If the variation pattern designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step E540-2, and if the variation pattern designation command has not been received, the continuous notice effect execution process of this time is terminated.

In step E540-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the notice scenario of the continuous notice effect stored in the prefetch information storage area of the sub RAM 130c, and determines in step E540-3 whether the notice scenario is stored. .. If the advance notice scenario is stored, the process proceeds to step E540-4, and if the advance notice scenario is not stored, it is determined that power recovery has occurred in which the advance scenario is cleared from the sub RAM 130c. Process E540-6.

In step E540-4, the sub CPU 130a determines a continuous notice pattern (effect form) according to the notice scenario, and in step E540-5, sets a continuous notice effect command according to the determined continuous notice pattern in the transmission buffer. .. As a result, the continuous notice effect command is transmitted to the display/voice control unit 140 and the lamp/drive control unit 150, and the continuous notice effect is executed according to the continuous notice pattern, and the effect symbol 70a is started at the start of the variable effect. An effect image is displayed around, or a predetermined sound effect is output.

In step E540-6, the sub CPU 130a determines, in step E540-6, whether or not to execute the alternative notification effect as compensation for the continuous notification effect that may not have been executed due to the occurrence of the power restoration. (See 27) to select the notice pattern. Specifically, referring to the selected alternative notice pattern determination table, based on the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command and the selection rate (%) of each alternative notice pattern, one alternative notice pattern is selected from a plurality of alternative notice patterns. Determine the notice pattern. The details of the alternative notice pattern determination table will be described later.

The "alternative notice effect" is an effect for compensating for a continuous notice effect that may not have been executed due to the occurrence of power restoration (power cut), and it can be used for multiple mini characters with different jackpot expectations in the image display device. It is a kind of notice effect that makes the player expect the jackpot game to be executed by displaying one of them.

In step E540-7, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the determined alternative notice pattern is to execute the alternative notice effect. If the alternative notice production is not to be executed, it is determined that the alternative notice production is not executed, and the continuous notice production execution process of this time is ended. The alternative notice effect command is set in the transmission buffer, and the current notice effect execution process is terminated. As a result, the alternative notice effect command is transmitted to the display/voice control unit 140 and the lamp/drive control unit 150, and the alternative notice effect is executed according to the alternative notice pattern. Is displayed or a predetermined sound effect is output.

As described above, according to the continuous notice effect execution process shown in FIG. 26, when the power is restored (power is cut off) during the execution of the continuous notice effect, the continuous notice effect is restarted in the variable effect that is started after the power is restored. Instead, the alternative notice effect different from the continuous notice effect may be executed in some cases. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the dissatisfaction that accompanies the end of the continuous notice presentation due to the occurrence of power restoration (power interruption), and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

(Alternative notice pattern determination table)
FIG. 27 is a diagram showing an alternative notice pattern determination table that is referred to when determining an alternative notice pattern.

The alternative notice pattern determination table is associated with the type of variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command, the selection rate (%) of each alternative notice pattern, and the alternative notice pattern to be selected. The presentation mode in the pattern is described.

In the alternative notice pattern, pattern 00 in which the alternative notice effect is not executed, pattern 01 in which the mini character A is displayed on the image display device, pattern 02 in which the mini character B is displayed in the image display device, and mini character C in the image display device are displayed. The pattern 03 and the pattern 04 in which the mini character D is displayed on the image display device are set.

The expectation of winning a jackpot related to a mini character increases in the order of mini character A<mini character B<mini character C<mini character D, and mini character D is a mini character that is determined to be a jackpot.

The first feature of the alternative notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 27 is that the change notice having a higher jackpot winning expectation degree is more effective than the change pattern having a smaller jackpot winning expectation degree. The point is that the pattern is easily determined. By doing so, the alternative notice effect will be executed as much as there is a high possibility that the continuous notice effect was being executed before the power restoration occurred, and the dissatisfaction with the end of the continuous notice effect will be increased. It is possible to reduce the amount of interest, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

As a second feature of the alternative notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 27, the case where the variable effect corresponding to the hold that has triggered the execution of the continuous announcement effect is executed becomes the execution opportunity of the continuous announcement effect. The alternative notice pattern in which the alternative notice effect is executed is easier to determine than the case where the variable effect corresponding to the hold that is not triggered to execute the continuous notice effect before the hold is executed. By doing so, after the power is restored, it becomes easier to understand which fluctuation effect corresponds to the suspension effect that triggered the execution of the continuous notice effect, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game. ..

In addition, in the fluctuating effect executed after the power is restored, whether or not to execute the jackpot notification effect (serif notification effect, step-up notification effect), which will be described later, is determined. Therefore, the jackpot notification effect is executed. The alternative notice effect may not be executed by increasing the probability higher than usual.

Even in this case, when the variable effect corresponding to the hold that triggered the execution of the continuous notice effect is executed, the execution timing of the continuous notice effect that is earlier than the hold that is the execution opportunity of the continuous notice effect is greater. It is preferable that the jackpot notice effect be executed more easily than the case where the variable effect corresponding to the pending state is executed. In this way, after the power is restored, it becomes easier to understand which variation effect corresponds to the suspension that triggered the execution of the continuous notice effect, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

(Lamp change effect execution process of effect control unit)
The lamp change effect execution processing of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a lamp change effect execution process in the effect control unit 130m.

In step E550-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether an icon change scenario is stored in the prefetch information storage area of the sub RAM 130c. If the icon change scenario is stored, the process proceeds to step E550-2 assuming that the icon change effect is executed. If the icon change scenario is not stored, the change scenario is stored in the sub RAM 130c. The process moves to step E550-6 on the assumption that the power source recovery that has been cleared has occurred.

In step E550-2, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not it is the icon change timing. If it is the icon change timing, the process proceeds to step E550-3. If it is not the icon change timing, the current lamp change effect execution process is ended.

In step E550-3, the sub CPU 130a sets a lamp effect command according to the color after the icon change in the transmission buffer. As a result, the lamp effect command is transmitted to the lamp/drive control unit 150, and the light emission mode (light emission color, lighting/blinking) of the winning hole lamp NR is changed corresponding to the color change of the icon, thereby executing the lamp change effect. Will be done.

In step E550-4, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the lamp changing flag indicating that the lamp changing effect is being executed is set in the sub RAM 130c. If the lamp changing flag is set, the current lamp changing effect execution process is terminated, and if the lamp changing flag is not set, the lamp changing flag is set and the current lamp changing effect is set. The execution process ends.

In step E550-6, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the lamp changing flag is set in the sub RAM 130c. If the lamp changing flag is set, the process proceeds to step E550-7. If the lamp changing flag is not set, the current lamp changing effect execution process is ended.

The sub CPU 130a clears the lamp change flag set in the sub RAM 130c in step E550-7, sets the lamp effect end command in the transmission buffer in step E550-8, and executes the current lamp change effect execution process. finish. As a result, the lamp effect command is transmitted to the lamp/drive control unit 150, and the lamp change effect that has been executed ends.

In this way, according to the lamp change effect execution process shown in FIG. 28, the lamp change is performed by changing the light emission mode (light emission color, lighting/blinking) of the winning hole lamp NR corresponding to the icon change in the icon change effect. It is designed to execute the performance. By doing so, the effect of the effect can be enhanced by the synergistic effect with the icon change effect, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, according to the lamp change effect execution process shown in FIG. 28, unlike the icon change effect and the continuous notice effect, even if the power is restored during the execution of the lamp change effect, the lamp change effect is executed again. And does not execute the alternative notice production. By doing so, it is possible to secure the rarity of the lamp change effect while reducing the control load, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

Note that when the power is restored as in the icon change effect, the lamp change effect may be executed again in the fluctuation effect started after the power is restored. In this case, the lamp change effect may be executed so as to correspond to the icon change effect that is started after the power is restored.

Further, instead of executing the lamp change effect corresponding to the icon change effect, the final light emission mode of the winning opening lamp NR, the light emission scenario from the previous change to the change, and the like are determined by lottery and the lamp change effect is executed. You may do it.

(The jackpot notice production determination process of the production control unit)
29, the jackpot advance notice effect determination process of the effect control unit 130m will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the jackpot notice effect determination process in the effect control unit 130m, and this process is the variable effect pattern determination process (determines the variable effect pattern based on the change pattern designation command) in the special figure special electric effect process described above. Process).

In step E650-1, the sub CPU 130a refers to the variation effect pattern executed in the variation effect this time, and in step E650-2, the notice pattern of the jackpot preview effect that causes the player to expect the jackpot game to be executed. The jackpot announcement determination table (see FIG. 30) for determining is selected and the announcement pattern is determined. Specifically, referring to the jackpot announcement determination table shown in FIG. 30, a plurality of announcement patterns (non-notification patterns) based on the jackpot lottery result, the type of variation effect pattern, and the selection rate (%) of each announcement pattern. (Including), one of the notice patterns is determined. The details of the jackpot notice determination table will be described later.

In step E650-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not it is the notice pattern for executing the dialogue notice effect. If it is the notice pattern for executing the speech notice effect, the process proceeds to step E650-4. If it is not the notice pattern for executing the notice effect, the process proceeds to step E650-6.

The "serif notice production" means that a dialogue image indicating a jackpot expectation degree is displayed on the image display device in response to the production button 17 being operated during the effective period that occurs during the variation production, and the voice output device is displayed. It is a kind of jackpot notice production in which a sound corresponding to the dialogue image is output from 9. Specifically, when the jackpot game is executed (the jackpot expectation is higher) than when the jackpot game is not executed, the dialogue with a relatively high expectation is displayed, When the dialogue having a relatively high degree of expectation is displayed, the effect button 17 vibrates for, for example, only one second.

In step E650-4, the sub CPU 130a selects a serif pattern determination table (not shown) for determining a serif pattern in the serif advance notice effect, and determines the serif pattern. Specifically, referring to the serif pattern determination table, one serif pattern is selected from a plurality of serif patterns based on the jackpot lottery result, the type of the variation effect pattern, and the selection rate (%) of each serif pattern. decide.

In step E650-5, the sub CPU 130a sets a speech advance notice effect command corresponding to the speech pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the speech advance notice effect command is transmitted to the display/voice control unit 140 and the lamp/drive control unit 150, and the speech advance notice effect according to the speech pattern is executed, and the dialogue image is displayed on the first image display device 70. Is displayed, or the voice output device 9 outputs a voice corresponding to the dialogue image.

In step E650-6, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not it is a notice pattern for executing the step-up notice effect. If it is the notice pattern for executing the step-up notice effect, the process proceeds to step E650-7. If it is not the notice pattern for executing the step-up notice effect, the jackpot notice effect determination process of this time is ended.

The "step-up notice effect" is a jackpot notice effect that executes step effects in a predetermined order until one of a plurality of steps (stages) from a first step (first stage) to a final step (final stage). It is a kind. Specifically, more step effects are more likely to be executed when the jackpot game is executed (the jackpot expectation is higher) than when the jackpot game is not executed.

In step E650-7, the sub CPU 130a selects a step-up pattern determination table (not shown) for determining the step-up pattern in the step-up notice effect, and determines the step-up pattern. Specifically, referring to the step-up pattern determination table, one of the plurality of step-up patterns is selected based on the jackpot lottery result, the variation effect pattern type, and the selection rate (%) of each step-up pattern. Determine the step-up pattern.

In step E650-8, the sub CPU 130a sets a step-up notice effect command corresponding to the step-up pattern in the transmission buffer, and ends the present jackpot notice effect determination process. As a result, the step-up notice production command is transmitted to the display/voice control unit 140 and the lamp/drive control unit 150, and the step-up notice production according to the step-up pattern is executed, and the first image display device 70 A step image is displayed on the screen, or a sound effect corresponding to the step image is output from the audio output device 9.

(Big hit notice pattern determination table)
FIG. 30 is a diagram showing a jackpot notification effect determination process that is referred to when determining a notification pattern of a jackpot notification effect.

The jackpot notice determination table is associated with the jackpot lottery result, the type of variation effect pattern, the selection rate (%) of each notice pattern, and the notice pattern to be selected.

In the notice pattern, there is a notice pattern without notice, a notice pattern in which the serif notice production is executed, and a notice pattern in which the step-up notice production is executed. The expectation for winning the jackpot is higher when the up notice production is executed.

(Main processing of integrated control unit)
Main processing of the overall control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the overall control unit 141.

When the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, a system reset occurs in the general CPU 142, and the general CPU 142 performs the following main processing.

First, the overall CPU 142 sets an interrupt prohibition that prohibits a timer interrupt in step T1, and performs an initialization process in step T2. Specifically, the main processing program is read from the general ROM 143, the flags and the like stored in the general RAM 144 are initialized, and processing such as initial setting is performed.

In step T3, the overall CPU 142 sets an interrupt permission that permits the timer interrupt, and in step T4, refers to the reception buffer of the overall RAM 144 to determine whether or not the production instruction command is received from the production control unit 130m. If it is determined and not received, the process moves to step T7. If it is received, in step T5, an animation pattern is determined and set from the animation group of the type corresponding to the received performance instruction command. Perform the animation pattern setting process.

The production instruction command includes a customer waiting production command, an icon display command, a change production command, a variation production pattern command, a pattern stop pattern command, an opening production pattern command, a round production pattern command, an ending production pattern command, and the like.

In addition, the animation group, the kind of object which forms the production image, the scene (timing) which displays the production image and the wait frame (display time), the target data (identification number of the sprite image, transfer source address, etc.), One or more animation patterns that are information that defines (designates) parameters (display position of sprite image, transfer destination address, etc.), drawing method, information that specifies the image display device that displays the effect image, etc. It is a group formed by being.

The type of animation group includes, for example, a production symbol group for displaying the animation of the demonstration symbol 70a, an icon group for displaying the hold icon or the animation of the icon, and a variable animation such as a background or a character. The variable effect group, the notice effect group for displaying the animation of the notice, the special game effect group for displaying the animation of the special game effect, and the like.

In step T6, the overall CPU 142 performs a sound setting process of determining and setting a sound pattern from the sound group of the type corresponding to the received production instruction command, and in step T7, updates the production image to be displayed on the image display device. It is determined whether or not there is a frame switch flag indicating that it is the frame update timing (for drawing a new effect image). If there is no frame switch flag, the process proceeds to step T4, and the frame switch flag is set. If there is, the frame switching flag is cleared in step T8.

In step T9, the overall CPU 142 performs a display list generation/output process of generating a display list including a drawing control command group and outputting the generated display list to the image control unit 145 (VDP).

Here, the display list is image shaping information for shaping the effect image to be displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), and is one unit, Alternatively, the display list is generated for each of a plurality of frames (frame update timing), and in the present embodiment, the display list is generated for each frame.

Specifically, since the animation scene information (address) is updated for each set animation pattern in the animation control processing described later, set the drawing control command according to the contents of the animation scene information for each set animation pattern. A display list for one frame corresponding to the current number of frames is generated. The drawing control commands are set sequentially from the animation pattern of the lowest priority animation group to the animation pattern of the highest priority animation group according to the priority order (drawing order) set for the animation group to which each animation pattern belongs. However, the reverse is also possible.

In step T10, the overall CPU 142 performs a drawing command process for instructing the drawing of the effect image based on the display list output to the image control unit 145 (VDP). By performing this drawing command processing, the image control unit 145 (VDP) draws the effect image based on the display list in the drawing frame buffer, and the effect image drawn in the display frame buffer is displayed on the first image display device. Processing for displaying on the 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) is performed.

In step T11, the overall CPU 142 performs a sound list generation/output process of generating a sound list including a sound control command group and outputting the generated sound list to the voice control unit 148.

Here, the sound list is audio output information for designating sounds (BGM, sound effects, etc.) such as audio data and music data to be output from the audio output device 9, and when outputting a new sound. It is generated based on the drawing frame.

In step T12, the overall CPU 142 performs sound output command processing for instructing the sound control unit 148 to output the sound based on the output sound list. By performing this sound output command processing, the sound control unit 148 causes the sound output device 9 to output sound based on the sound list.

Therefore, various sounds are started to be output from the audio output device 9 so as to be synchronized (tuned) with the frame update timing by the image control unit 145 (VDP), and are also synchronized (tuned) with the frame update timing. The output from the audio output device 9 is ended.

Although various sounds are output from the audio output device 9 so as to be synchronized (tuned) with the frame update timing, various sounds are output from the audio output device 9 so as not to be synchronized (tuned) with the frame update timing. May be stopped, and vice versa.

In step T13, the overall CPU 142 performs an animation control process for updating the animation scene information (address) for each set animation pattern as a preparation for creating the display list of the next frame, and then the process proceeds to step T4. After that, the processing from step T4 to step T13 is repeated so as to loop.

(Command reception interrupt process of integrated control unit)
The command reception interrupt process of the overall control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the command reception interrupt process of the overall control unit 141, and this process is executed by receiving the effect instruction command transmitted from the effect control unit 130m.

In step T20, the overall CPU 142 performs a command reception process of receiving the production instruction command transmitted from the production control unit 130m. Specifically, the effect instruction command transmitted from the effect control unit 130m is stored in the reception buffer of the overall RAM 144, and the current command reception interrupt process is ended.

(V blank interrupt process of integrated control unit)
The V blank interrupt process of the overall control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the V blank interrupt process of the overall control unit 141. In the V blank interrupt process, the display of the effect image for one frame is completed from the image control unit 145 (VDP) (1/30). It is executed every time the V blank signal transmitted every second (about 33 ms) is received (1/30 second = about 33 ms).

In step T30, the overall CPU 142 performs a counter update process of updating a predetermined number of various counters (scene switching counter, wait frame counter, frame counter, etc.) (for example, adding “1”), and in step T31, the image control unit 145 ( VDP) performs frame buffer switching command processing for instructing switching between the first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area of the VRAM 147.

As a result, the first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area become the “drawing frame buffer” and the “display frame buffer” each time the V blank interrupt process is executed every 1/30 seconds (about 33 ms). It will switch to and alternately.

In step T32, the overall CPU 142 sets a frame switching flag indicating that the drawing (display) frame has been switched, and ends the V blank interrupt process this time. Since this frame switching flag is referred to in step T7, the processing in steps T8 to T13 is executed every time the V blank interrupt processing is executed (frame update timing).

(Timing chart of change production at winning)
34 and 35 are timing charts showing various timings when the display mode of the first hold icon is (is changed to) a blue character icon when a game ball is won in the first starting opening 45.

The timing of T1 is the timing of the 280th frame after the variation effect is started, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period in which the effect symbol 70a is normally varied. At this timing, drawing of the image data b (background image, various variation effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) into the first frame buffer is started, and the image data a drawn in the second frame buffer The display on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen a is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T2 is a timing in the middle of the 280th frame after the variation effect is started. At this timing, based on the game ball winning the first starting port 45, the starting port winning designation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control unit 130m.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 281st frame from the start of the variation effect and the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, it is determined that the display mode of the first hold icon is displayed as a blue character icon at the time of winning, but the blue character icon is not displayed on the image display device, and the second output notification sound is output from the audio output device 9. The output of does not start either.

At the timing of T3, drawing of the image data c (background image, various variation effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) into the second frame buffer is started, and the image drawn in the first frame buffer is started. The display of the data b on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen b is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the 282nd frame from the start of the variation effect and the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data d (background image, various variation effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image data c drawn in the second frame buffer is drawn. The display on the image display device is started, the normal variation effect display screen c (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the sound output device 9 starts outputting the second occurrence notification sound. .. The timing of T4 corresponds to the frame update timing according to the reception of the predetermined command.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 283rd frame after the variation effect is started and the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data e (background image, various effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) into the second frame buffer is started, and the image data d drawn in the first frame buffer The display on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen d (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the second output notification sound is continuously output from the audio output device 9. It

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 284th frame from the start of the variation effect and the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data f (background image, various variation effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image data e drawn in the second frame buffer is drawn. The display on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen d (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the second output notification sound is continuously output from the audio output device 9. It

The timing of T7 is the timing of the 296th frame from the start of the variation effect and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data h (background image, variation effect image, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image of the image data g drawn in the second frame buffer is started. The display on the display device is started, the normal variation effect display screen g (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the second output notification sound of the audio output device 9 is continuously output.

The timing of T8 is the timing of the 297th frame after the variation effect is started, and is the timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, the output of the second generated notification sound that has been output for about 0.5 seconds (15 frames) is stopped. Further, the drawing of the image data i (background image, variation effect image, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) into the second frame buffer is started, and the image display device of the image data h drawn in the first frame buffer. Is started, and the normal variation effect display screen h (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T9 is the timing of the 298th frame from the start of the fluctuating effect, which is a timing in the middle of the normal fluctuating period. At this timing, the drawing of the image data j (background image, variation effect image, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started and the image display of the image data i drawn in the second frame buffer is started. The display on the device is started, and the image display device is in a state where the normal variation effect display screen i (blue character icon display) is displayed.

In this way, the output of the second generated notification sound from the audio output device 9 is started in synchronization with the frame update timing at which the blue character icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). As compared with the case where the frame update timing between the display of the blue character icon and the output of the second occurrence notification sound is shifted, it is possible to reduce the player's feeling of strangeness and improve the enjoyment of the game. It becomes possible.

Also, while the output of the second occurrence notification sound was started (in synchronization) with the frame update timing at which the blue character icon is displayed, the deletion of the blue character icon and the output of the second occurrence notification sound Since it is performed at a frame update timing different from the stop of the above, it is possible to stop the output of the second occurrence notification sound without being restricted by the timing of deleting the blue character icon, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game. Becomes

(Example of directing changes when winning)
FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an example of an effect when the display mode of the first hold icon is displayed (changed to) by a blue character icon when the game ball is won in the first starting opening 45.

As shown in FIG. 36(a), the effect design 70a is variably displayed in a state where the first hold icon and the second hold icon are not displayed, that is, in the state where no hold storage is stored. Normal fluctuation production is executed.

Here, based on the game ball winning the first starting opening 45, a starting opening winning award designation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control unit 130m, the icon change effect determining process is executed, and as a change scenario. It is assumed that “scenario 02” (the display mode of the first hold icon is displayed as a blue character icon at the time of winning) is determined.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 36B, in response to the game ball winning the first starting opening 45, the first display icon 70B1 of the first display icon 70B1 displays the first display icon (blue character). The icon) H11 is displayed, and the second output notification sound is output from the voice output device 9 for 0.5 seconds.

Then, as shown in FIG. 36C, stop display is performed in a combination (here, "234") indicating that the effect design 70a that has been variably displayed is a loss, and is displayed in the icon display area 70C. The icon (CD icon) TH that has been displayed is erased.

Next, as shown in FIG. 36D, the variable display of the effect design 70a is started, and the first hold icon (blue character icon) H11 of the first display portion 70B1 is shift-displayed in the icon display area 70C. To be done.

After that, as shown in FIG. 36(e), while the production symbol 70a of "2" is stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) in the left and right variable display regions of the effect symbol 70a that has been variably displayed, the central variable display region. The reach effect for variably displaying the effect pattern 70a is executed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 36(f), the effect symbol 70a of "3" is stopped and displayed in the central variable display area, whereby the reach effect ends and the variable display ends. Here, since the variable display is finished, the icon (blue character icon) TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

Although illustration is omitted, BGM, sound effects, and the like are output from the audio output device 9 during the variation effect. The same applies to the subsequent FIGS. 39, 42, 43, 46, and 47.

(Timing chart of normal change pattern 01)
37 and 38 are timings showing various timings when the normal change pattern 01 is determined as the hold icon change pattern in the icon display mode update process and the display mode of the first hold icon is changed to the blue character icon. It is a chart.

The timing of T1 is the timing of the 600th frame after the variation effect is started, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol stop period during which the stop display of the effect symbol 70a is performed. At this timing, drawing of the image data b (background image, various stop effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image data a drawn in the second frame buffer The display on the image display device is started, and the stop effect display screen a is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T2 is a timing in the middle of the 600th frame after the variation effect is started. At this timing, a variation pattern designation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control unit 130m.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 601st frame after the variation effect is started and the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol stop period. At this timing, it is decided to execute the normal change pattern 01 for changing the first hold icon to the blue character icon, but the blue character icon is not displayed on the image display device, and the second output from the voice output device 9 is generated. The output of the notification sound is not started.

At the timing of T3, drawing of the image data c (background image, various variation effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) into the second frame buffer is started, and the image drawn in the first frame buffer is started. The display of the data b on the image display device is started, and the stop effect display screen b is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T4 is the timing (the timing when the fluctuating effect is started) which is the first frame after the next fluctuating effect is started. At this timing, drawing of the image data d (background image, various variation effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image data c drawn in the second frame buffer is drawn. The display on the image display device is started, the normal variation effect display screen c (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the sound output device 9 starts outputting the second occurrence notification sound. .. The timing of T4 corresponds to the frame update timing according to the reception of the predetermined command.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the second frame after the variation effect is started, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data e (background image, various effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) into the second frame buffer is started, and the image data d drawn in the first frame buffer The display on the image display device is started, the normal variation effect display screen d (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the second output notification sound of the audio output device 9 is continuously output. ..

The timing of T6 is the timing of the third frame after the variation effect is started and the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data f (background image, various effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) into the first frame buffer is started, and the image data e drawn in the second frame buffer is drawn. The display on the image display device is started, the normal variation effect display screen d (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the second output notification sound of the audio output device 9 is continuously output. ..

The timing of T7 is the timing of the 15th frame from the start of the variation effect and the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data h (background image, variation effect image, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image of the image data g drawn in the second frame buffer is started. The display on the display device is started, the normal variation effect display screen g (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the second output notification sound of the audio output device 9 is continuously output.

The timing of T8 is the timing of the 16th frame after the variation effect is started, and is the timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, the output of the second generated notification sound that has been output for about 0.5 seconds (15 frames) is stopped, and the image data i (background image, variation effect image, various symbols) to the second frame buffer is stopped. Images, various icon images, etc.) are started, and the image data h drawn in the first frame buffer is started to be displayed on the image display device. The icon display) is displayed.

The timing of T9 is the timing of the 17th frame after the variation effect is started, and is the timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, the drawing of the image data j (background image, variation effect image, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started and the image display of the image data i drawn in the second frame buffer is started. The display on the device is started, and the image display device is in a state where the normal variation effect display screen i (blue character icon display) is displayed.

In this way, the output of the second generated notification sound from the audio output device 9 is started in synchronization with the frame update timing at which the blue character icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). As compared with the case where the frame update timing between the display of the blue character icon and the output of the second occurrence notification sound is shifted, it is possible to reduce the player's feeling of strangeness and improve the enjoyment of the game. It becomes possible.

Also, while the output of the second occurrence notification sound was started (in synchronization) with the frame update timing at which the blue character icon is displayed, the deletion of the blue character icon and the output of the second occurrence notification sound Since it is performed at a frame update timing different from the stop of the above, it is possible to stop the output of the second occurrence notification sound without being restricted by the timing of deleting the blue character icon, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game. Becomes

(Example of normal change pattern 01)
FIG. 39 is a diagram showing an example of an effect when the display mode of the first hold icon is changed to a blue character icon (normal change pattern 01) at the start of change (during shift).

As shown in FIG. 39A, when the first hold icon (CD icon) H11, H12 is displayed on the first display section 70B1 and the second display section 70B2 of the first hold icon display area 70B. , It is assumed that the stop display of the effect design indicating the loss is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 39(b), the variable display of the effect design 70a is started, and at the same time, the first hold icon (CD icon) displayed on the first display unit 70B1 and the second display unit 70B2. H11 and H12 are shift-displayed in the icon display area 70C and the first display portion 70B1, respectively.

Here, when the first hold icon (CD icon) H12 displayed on the second display unit 70B2 is shift-displayed on the first display unit 70B1, the display mode is changed to a blue character icon. Further, the CD icon is changed to a blue character icon and the second output notification sound is output from the audio output device 9 for 0.5 seconds.

Then, as shown in FIG. 39(c), stop display is performed in a combination (here, "164") indicating that the effect design 70a that has been variably displayed is a loss, and is displayed in the icon display area 70C. The icon (CD icon) TH that has been displayed is erased.

Next, as shown in FIG. 39D, the variable display of the effect design 70a is started, and the first hold icon (blue character icon) H11 of the first display portion 70B1 is shift-displayed in the icon display area 70C. To be done.

After that, as shown in FIG. 39(e), while the production symbol 70a of "2" is stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) in the left and right variable display regions of the effect symbol 70a that has been variably displayed, the central variable display region. The reach effect for variably displaying the effect pattern 70a is executed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 39(f), the effect symbol 70a of "3" is stopped and displayed in the central variable display area, whereby the reach effect ends and the variable display ends. Here, since the variable display is finished, the icon (blue character icon) TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

(Timing chart of character action change pattern 01)
40 and 41 are timings showing various timings when the character action change pattern 01 is determined as the icon change pattern in the icon display mode update process and the display mode of the icon TH is changed to the red character icon. It is a chart.

The timing of T1 is the timing (the timing when the fluctuating effect is started) that is the first frame after the fluctuating effect is started, and is the frame update timing of the start of the normal fluctuating period in which the normal fluctuation of the effect design 70a is performed. .. At this timing, drawing of the image data b (background image, various variation effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) into the first frame buffer is started, and the image data a drawn in the second frame buffer The display on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen a is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T2 is the 61st frame from the start of the variation effect and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, the effect control unit 130m has decided to execute the character action change pattern 01 for changing the display mode of the icon TH to the red character icon, but the character or the like is not displayed on the image display device, and the voice is not displayed. The output device 9 also does not start outputting the third generated notification sound.

At timing T2, drawing of the image data d (background image, various effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, character images, etc.) into the second frame buffer is started and drawn in the first frame buffer. The display of the existing image data c on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen c is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 62nd frame after the variation effect is started, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data e (background image, various variation effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, character images, etc.) into the first frame buffer is started, and the image drawn in the second frame buffer The display of the data d on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen d (character display) is displayed on the image display device. However, the sound output device 9 does not output the third generation notification sound. Not started.

The timing of T4 is the 63rd frame from the start of the variation effect and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data f (background image, various variation effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, character images, etc.) into the second frame buffer is started, and the image drawn in the first frame buffer The display of the data e on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen e (character display) is displayed on the image display device, but the third output notification sound of the audio output device 9 is not output. Will continue.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 64th frame after the variation effect is started, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, the drawing of the image data g (background image, various effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, character images, etc.) into the first frame buffer is started, and the image drawn in the second frame buffer is started. The display of the data f on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen f (character display) is displayed on the image display device, but the third output notification sound of the audio output device 9 is not output. Will continue.

The timing of T6 is the 91st frame from the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, the drawing of the image data h (background image, various variation effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) into the first frame buffer is started, and the image data g of the image data g drawn in the second frame buffer is started. The display on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen g (character display) is displayed on the image display device, but the non-output of the third generated notification sound of the audio output device 9 is continued. It

The timing of T7 is the timing of the 92nd frame after the variation effect is started, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data i (background image, various variation effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) in the second frame buffer is started, and the image data h drawn in the first frame buffer The display on the image display device is started, the normal variation effect display screen h (red character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the output of the third generation notification sound is started from the voice output device 9. .. The timing of T7 corresponds to the predetermined frame update timing after the variation pattern designation command is received.

The timing of T8 is the timing of the 106th frame from the start of the variation effect and the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, the third output notification sound of the audio output device 9 continues to be output, and the image data j (background image, variation effect image, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) is drawn in the first frame buffer. Is started, the display of the image data i drawn in the second frame buffer on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen i (red character icon display) is displayed on the image display device. Become.

The timing of T9 is the timing of the 107th frame from the start of the variation effect, which is the timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, the output of the third generated notification sound that has been output for about 0.5 seconds (15 frames) is stopped, and the image data k (background image, variation effect image, various symbols) to the second frame buffer is stopped. Image, various icon images, etc.) is started, the image data j drawn in the first frame buffer is started to be displayed on the image display device, and the normal variation effect display screen j (red character) is displayed on the image display device. The icon display) is displayed.

The timing of T10 is the timing of the 108th frame from the start of the fluctuating effect, which is the timing in the middle of the normal fluctuating period. At this timing, the drawing of the image data 1 (background image, variation effect image, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) is started in the first frame buffer, and the image display of the image data k drawn in the second frame buffer is started. The display on the device is started, and the image display device is in a state where the normal variation effect display screen k (display of red character icon) is displayed.

In this way, the output of the third generated notification sound from the audio output device 9 starts in synchronization with the frame update timing at which the red character icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). Compared with the case where the frame update timing of the display of the red character icon and the output of the third generated notification sound is shifted, it is possible to reduce the player's feeling of strangeness and improve the enjoyment of the game. It becomes possible.

Also, while the output of the third generation notification sound was started in synchronization with the frame update timing at which the red character icon is displayed, the deletion of the red character icon and the generation of the third generation notification sound have been started. Since the frame update timing is different from the stop of the output, the output of the third occurrence notification sound can be stopped without being restricted by the timing of deleting the red character icon, and the interest of the game can be improved. It will be possible.

(Example of character action change pattern 01)
42 and 43 are diagrams showing an example of an effect when the display mode of the icon TH is changed to a red character icon (character action change pattern 01) during the variable effect.

As shown in FIG. 42(a), in the state in which the first hold icon and the second hold icon are not displayed, that is, in the state in which no hold storage is stored, the effect symbol 70a is variably displayed. A normal variation effect is performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 42(b), after the character C1 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 42(c), the character C1 performs a throwing and kissing action to set the heart H to the icon (CD icon) TH. A performance to fly towards is performed.

Then, when the heart H hits the icon TH, as shown in FIG. 42(d), the display mode of the icon TH changes from the CD icon to the red character icon, and at the same time, the sound output device 9 outputs the third generation notification sound. Is output for 0.5 seconds.

After that, as shown in FIG. 43(a), while the production symbol 70a of "2" is stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) in the left and right variable display regions of the effect symbol 70a which has been variably displayed, the central variable display region. The reach effect for variably displaying the effect pattern 70a is executed.

Then, when the SP reach is developed, as shown in FIG. 43(b), an effect in which the ally character C2 and the enemy character C3 confront each other is started. When the SP reach is developed, the effect design 70a is reduced and displayed on the upper left of the screen, and the first hold icon display area 70B and the second hold icon display area 70D are deleted.

After that, as shown in FIG. 43(c), the teammate C2 wins over the enemy character C3, suggesting that it is a big hit, and the variation design 70a showing that the effect design 70a is a big hit ( Here, the display is stopped at "222").

Then, as shown in FIG. 43(d), the effect design 70a returns from the reduced display to the original size and is stopped and displayed at the center of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). Here, since the variable display is finished, the icon (red character icon) TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

(Timing chart of symbol action change pattern 01)
44 and 45 show various timings when the symbol action change pattern 01 is determined as the hold icon change pattern in the icon display form update process and the display form of the first hold icon is changed to the red character icon. It is a timing chart.

The timing of T1 is the timing (the timing when the fluctuating effect is started) that is the first frame after the fluctuating effect is started, and is the frame update timing of the start of the normal fluctuating period in which the normal fluctuation of the effect design 70a is performed. .. At this timing, drawing of the image data b (background image, various variation effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) into the first frame buffer is started, and the image data a drawn in the second frame buffer The display on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen a is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T2 is the timing of the 299th frame from the start of the variation effect and the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, it has been decided to execute the character action change pattern 01 for changing the display mode of the first hold icon to the red character icon, but the change pattern or the like is not displayed on the image display device, and the voice output device 9 Therefore, the output of the third generation notification sound is not started.

At timing T2, drawing of the image data d (background image, various stop effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, changed pattern images, etc.) into the second frame buffer is started and drawn in the first frame buffer. The display of the displayed image data c on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen c is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 300th frame from the start of the variable effect, and is the frame update timing of the symbol temporary stop period in which the temporary stop display of the effect symbol 70a is performed. At this timing, drawing of the image data e (background image, various stop effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, changing pattern images, etc.) into the first frame buffer is started, and is drawn in the second frame buffer. The display of the image data d on the image display device is started, and the temporary stop effect display screen d (change symbol display) is displayed on the image display device, but the third output notification sound is output from the voice output device 9. Output does not start.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the 301st frame after the variation effect is started, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, the drawing of the image data f (background image, various stop effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, changing pattern images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started and is drawn in the first frame buffer. The display of the image data e on the image display device is started, and the temporary stop effect display screen e (change symbol display) is displayed on the image display device, but the third generation notification sound of the audio output device 9 is generated. Non-output continues.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 302nd frame from the start of the variation effect and the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, the drawing of the image data g (background image, various stop effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, changed pattern images, etc.) into the first frame buffer is started, and is drawn in the second frame buffer. The display of the image data f on the image display device is started, and the temporary stop effect display screen f (change symbol display) is displayed on the image display device. Non-output continues.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 330th frame after the variation effect is started, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, the drawing of the image data h (background image, various stop effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, change pattern images, etc.) into the first frame buffer is started, and is drawn in the second frame buffer. The display of the image data g on the image display device is started, and the temporary stop effect display screen g (change pattern display) is displayed on the image display device, but the third generation notification sound of the audio output device 9 is generated. Non-output continues.

The timing of T7 is a timing of the 331st frame after the variation effect is started, and is a frame update timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, drawing of the image data i (background image, various stop effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, change pattern images, etc.) into the second frame buffer is started, and is drawn in the first frame buffer. The display of the image data h on the image display device is started, and a temporary stop effect display screen h (change pattern & red character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the sound output device 9 notifies the third occurrence. Sound output is started. The timing of T7 corresponds to the predetermined frame update timing after the variation pattern designation command is received.

The timing of T8 is the timing of the 345th frame after the variation effect is started, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, drawing of the image data j (background image, stop effect image, various pattern images, various icon images, change pattern image, etc.) into the first frame buffer is started, and the image drawn in the second frame buffer The display of the data i on the image display device is started, and the temporary stop effect display screen i (change pattern & red character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the third generation notification sound of the audio output device 9 is generated. Output continues.

The timing of T9 is the timing of the 346th frame after the variation effect is started, and is the timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, the output of the third generated notification sound that has been output for about 0.5 seconds (15 frames) is stopped, and the image data k (background image, stop effect image, various symbols) to the second frame buffer is stopped. Images, various icon images, change pattern images, etc.) are started, the image data j drawn in the first frame buffer is started to be displayed on the image display device, and a temporary stop effect display screen is displayed on the image display device. j (change pattern & red character icon display) is displayed.

The timing of T10 is the timing of the 347th frame after the variation effect is started, and is the timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, the drawing of the image data 1 (background image, variation effect image, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) is started in the first frame buffer, and the image display of the image data k drawn in the second frame buffer is started. The display on the device is started, and the image display device is in a state in which the temporary stop effect display screen k (change pattern & red character icon display) is displayed.

In this way, the output of the third generated notification sound from the audio output device 9 starts in synchronization with the frame update timing at which the red character icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). Compared with the case where the frame update timing of the display of the red character icon and the output of the third generated notification sound is shifted, it is possible to reduce the player's feeling of strangeness and improve the enjoyment of the game. It becomes possible.

Also, while the output of the third generation notification sound was started in synchronization with the frame update timing at which the red character icon is displayed, the deletion of the red character icon and the generation of the third generation notification sound have been started. Since the frame update timing is different from the stop of the output, the output of the third occurrence notification sound can be stopped without being restricted by the timing of deleting the red character icon, and the interest of the game can be improved. It will be possible.

(Example of effect of pattern action change pattern 01)
46 and 47 are diagrams showing an example of production in the case where the display mode of the hold icon is changed to a red character icon while the production symbol 70a is stopped (temporarily stopped) (symbol action change pattern 01).

As shown in FIG. 46(a), in the state in which the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed in the first display portion 70B1 of the first hold icon display area 70B, the effect symbol 70a is variably displayed. The production is being executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 46(b), the stop effect display 70a of "2" in the left variable display area, "3" in the right variable display area, and "change" in the central variable display area (temporary) While displaying (stop display), an effect such as lightning appears from the change pattern that is stop displayed (temporary stop display) in the central variable display area toward the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 of the first display unit 70B1, When hit, the display mode of the first hold icon H11 changes from the CD icon to the red character icon, and the third output notification sound is output from the voice output device 9 for 0.5 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 46(c), the variable display of the effect design 70a is started, and the first hold icon (red character icon) H11 of the first display portion 70B1 is shift-displayed in the icon display area 70C. To be done.

Then, as shown in FIG. 47(a), while the production symbol 70a of "2" is stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) in the left and right variable display regions of the effect symbol 70a that has been variably displayed, the central variable display region. The reach effect for variably displaying the effect pattern 70a is executed.

Then, when the SP reach is developed, as shown in FIG. 47B, an effect in which the ally character C2 and the enemy character C3 confront each other is started. When the SP reach is developed, the effect design 70a is reduced and displayed in the upper left, and the first hold icon display area 70B and the second hold icon display area 70D are deleted.

After that, as shown in FIG. 47(c), the teammate character C2 wins over the enemy character C3, suggesting that it is a big hit, and the variation design 70a showing that the effect design 70a is a big hit ( Here, the display is stopped at "222").

Then, as shown in FIG. 47(d), the effect design 70a returns from the reduced display to the original size and is stopped and displayed at the center of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). Here, since the variable display is finished, the icon (red character icon) TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the case where the effect control unit 130m executes the change effect at the frame update timing according to the reception of the predetermined command (starting mouth winning award designation command or variation pattern designation command), Since the effect control unit 130m may execute the change effect at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by increasing the variation of the change effect. Become.

In the present embodiment, when the effect control unit 130m receives the start mouth winning designation command in the icon change effect, the final display mode and the scenario are determined, but the determination method is not limited to this. .. For example, each time the display mode of the icon (the icon, the hold icon) can be changed, it may be determined whether or not the display mode is changed. Further, when the effect control unit 130m receives the start mouth winning award designation command, only the final display mode is determined, and how it changes is a timing at which the display mode of the icon (the icon, the hold icon) can be changed. If so, it may be decided each time.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as the display mode of the icons (the relevant icon, the hold icon), there are four types of icons: a CD icon as a normal icon, and a blue character icon, a red character icon, and a rainbow character icon as special icons. However, the number is not limited to four, and may be large or small.

For example, a special icon (flashing CD icon) that has a lower jackpot winning expectation than the blue character icon and suggests that it may change to a special icon may be provided. When such a special icon is provided, since the jackpot winning expectation is lower than that of the blue character icon, the normal change pattern 02, the character action change pattern 01, and the symbol action change pattern 01 (after the variation pattern designation command is received In a change effect that occurs at a predetermined frame update timing), it is desirable not to change to a special icon. By doing so, the normal change pattern 02, the character action change pattern 01, and the symbol action change pattern 01 (predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command, which are likely to change to a display mode in which the jackpot winning expectation is high In the change effect that occurs in (1), it will not be changed to a special icon, so it is possible to increase the variation of the display mode of the icon while preventing the player from being discouraged and improve the entertainment of the game. It will be possible.

In addition to the four types of the present embodiment, the special icon and the green character icon may be provided. In this case, the jackpot winning expectation degree of the icon (the icon, the hold icon) is in the order of (CD icon <) blinking CD icon <blue character icon <green character icon <red character icon <rainbow character icon It should be high.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the character C1 or the change pattern is displayed in the character action change pattern 01 or the symbol action change pattern 01, the display mode of the icon (the icon, the hold icon) is always changed. However, there may be provided a case where the character C1 or the changing pattern is not changed even when displayed (so-called gaze effect). When such a gaze effect is provided, the gaze effect for the normal change pattern 02, the character effect change pattern 01, and the symbol effect change pattern 01 (change effect that occurs at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the change pattern designation command) The rate of execution is higher than that of the gaze effect for the change effect when winning and the normal change pattern 01 (change effect that occurs at the frame update timing in response to the reception of a predetermined command), or the normal change pattern 02, the character action change It is desirable to be able to execute only the gaze effect for the pattern 01 and the symbol action change pattern 01 (a change effect that occurs at a predetermined frame update timing after the variation pattern designation command is received).

Further, in the present embodiment, the icon change effect is not executed a plurality of times during one variation effect, but it may be executed a plurality of times. In this case, the change effect at the time of winning and the normal change pattern 01 (the change effect that occurs at the frame update timing in response to the reception of a predetermined command) have only one timing during the change effect, so the normal change The pattern 02, the character action change pattern 01, and the symbol action change pattern 01 (change effect that occurs at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the change pattern designation command) may be executed a plurality of times. By doing so, the display form of the icon (the icon, the hold icon) may change a plurality of times in one variation effect, so that it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the execution timing of the change effect (change effect at winning and normal change pattern 01) that occurs at the frame update timing in response to the reception of the predetermined command is determined by the predetermined command (starting mouth winning designation. The frame update timing is two frames later than the number of frames that received a command or fluctuation pattern designation command). It may be after the frame.

Further, in the present embodiment, the symbol action change pattern 01 is not provided as the icon change pattern, but it may be provided.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the "normal change pattern 01" is executed, the change effect is executed at the frame update timing in response to the reception of the change pattern designating command, but the present invention is not limited to this timing and, for example, The change effect may be executed at the frame update timing according to the reception of the symbol memory designating command or the effect symbol designating command.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the “normal change pattern 02”, the “character effect change pattern 01”, and the “symbol effect change pattern 01” are executed, at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the change pattern designation command. Although the change effect is executed, the change effect is not limited to this timing, and the change effect may be executed at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving another predetermined command.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the icon (the relevant icon, the hold icon) is changed, an icon generation (change) notification sound is output as an effect of notifying that the icon (the relevant icon, the hold icon) has changed. However, it is not limited to such an effect, and in addition to the output of the icon generation (change) notification sound, the changed icon (the icon, the hold) is used by using the panel lighting device 76 and/or the frame lighting device 10. The lamp may be made to emit light in the same color as the display mode of the icon. In this case, like the output of the icon generation (change) notification sound, at the frame update timing at which the changed icon (the relevant icon, the hold icon) is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). At the same time (synchronously), the light emission of the lamp of the panel lighting device 76 and/or the frame lighting device 10 may be started, and the timing of ending the light emission of the lamp is set to end after a predetermined time has elapsed. Alternatively, the icon (the icon, the hold icon) may be ended (synchronously) at the frame update timing for deleting the icon.

Further, in the present embodiment, the icon and the hold icon are displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), but they are displayed on the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). Good.

Further, in the present embodiment, the execution of the icon change effect is not restricted by the game state, but the execution of the icon change effect may be restricted by the game state. For example, in the first specific game state and the second specific game state, the winning change effect and the normal change pattern 01 (change effect that occurs at the frame update timing according to the reception of a predetermined command) can be executed. However, the normal change pattern 02, the character action change pattern 01, and the symbol action change pattern 01 (change effect that occurs at a predetermined frame update timing after the variation pattern designation command is received) may not be executable. By doing so, the first specific game state and the second specific game state are set to have a short variation time, so the normal change pattern 02, the character action change pattern 01, and , By restricting the execution of the symbol action change pattern 01 (change effect that occurs at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the change pattern designation command), the first specific game state, and the game characteristic of the second specific game state It is possible to improve the interest of the game without damaging it.

Further, in the present embodiment, the icon change effect changes the display mode (shape and color) of the hold icon or the icon itself, but the present invention is not limited to such a change and the display of the hold icon or the icon itself. The mode may not be changed (the CD icon remains), and an effect of a color indicating the jackpot winning expectation may be displayed around the hold icon or the icon, or around the hold icon or the icon (vicinity). A character showing the jackpot winning expectation degree may be displayed, or a character image suggesting an effect to be executed around (on the periphery of) the hold icon or the icon (for example, "SP" or "pseudo-reel"). May be displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the change scenario is determined, the determination is made regardless of whether or not the jackpot is won, but the change scenario may be determined with reference to the jackpot or winning. Specifically, one change scenario may be determined from a plurality of change scenarios based on the final icon display mode, the current number of holdings, the big hit, and the selection rate (%). ..

In this way, when determining a change scenario with reference to the jackpot, if the jackpot is won and the character changes to a red character icon, it is more likely that the current pending number is "1" or "2". In the case of "3" or "4", the selection rate (%) that allows the change scenario that changes to the red character icon at the time of winning to be easily selected may be set.
In other words, if you win the jackpot and change to a red character icon, when the current number of holdings is "3" or "4", when the winning character is a red character when you win the prize. It can be said that the selection rate (%) makes it difficult for a change scenario that changes to an icon to be selected.
Also, if you have not won the jackpot, that is, if you are lost and change to a red character icon, a change scenario that changes to a red character icon at the time of winning rather than if you win the jackpot and change to a red character icon Can be set to a selection rate (%) that is difficult to select.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the hold icon change pattern is determined, it is determined regardless of the current number of holdings or the jackpot win, but the determination may be made by referring to the current number of holdings or the jackpot win. May be. Specifically, one hold icon is selected from among a plurality of hold icon change patterns based on the mode of change of the hold icon in the current variation effect, the current number of holds, the jackpot win/loss, and the selection rate (%). The change pattern may be determined.

In this way, when the pending icon change pattern is determined by referring to the current pending number and the jackpot winnings, when the jackpot is won and the red character icon is changed, the current pending number is "1" or " The selection rate (%) at which “normal change pattern 01” is more easily selected as the hold icon change pattern may be set when “3” or “4” than when “2”.
In other words, if you win the jackpot and change to a red character icon, the hold icon change pattern when the current hold number is "1" or "2" is higher than when the hold number is "3" or "4". It can be said that “normal change pattern 01” is difficult to be selected as a selection rate (%).
When the jackpot is not won, that is, when the jackpot is lost and changes to the red character icon, the "normal change pattern 01 “” can be set to a selection rate (%) that is hard to be selected.

As described above, when changing to the red character icon in the winning change effect and the normal change pattern 01 (change effect that occurs at the frame update timing in response to the reception of the predetermined command), the current hold number is “1”. It is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game because the jackpot winning expectation is higher in the case of “3” or “4” than in the case of “” or “2”.

(Modification of the first embodiment)
Hereinafter, a modified example of the first embodiment will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

In the modified example of the first embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 49(a), in the lower right corner of the display unit of the first image display device 70, a special variable display corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is displayed. It differs from the first embodiment in that a special symbol display area for displaying the symbol TZ is provided.

Further, on the left end portion of the display unit of the first image display device 70, a first reservation number display area 70E for displaying a first reservation number indicating the current first special symbol reservation number (U1), and the current first It is also different from the first embodiment in that the second reserved number display area 70F for displaying the second reserved number indicating the two special symbol reserved number (U2) is provided.

It should be noted that the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E and the second hold number displayed in the second hold number display area 70F correspond to the first hold information, and the first hold icon display area The first hold icon displayed in 70B and the second hold icon displayed in the second hold icon display area 70D correspond to second hold information, and the icon displayed in the icon display area 70C is execution information. Equivalent to.

(Specific example when variation production is started from the customer waiting state)
A specific example when the variation effect is started from the customer waiting state will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 is a timing chart in which the variation effect is started from the customer waiting state, and FIGS. 49(a) to (f) and FIGS. 50(g) to (k) are shown in FIGS. 48(a) to (k). It is the figure which shows the production example which corresponds to.

First, the timing of T0 is the 0th frame after the customer waiting state is started. At this timing, subtraction of the waiting time (30 seconds) for starting the customer waiting demonstration effect is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 49A, in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed. Further, “0” is displayed in the first hold number display area 70E and the second hold number display area 70F, and the hold icon and the icon TH are not displayed.

The timing of T1 is the timing when the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is increased from "0" to "1" (fourth frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the non-animated increase display of the first hold number and the non-animated increase display of the first hold icon (completed in one frame) are performed, and the first generated notification sound that is the notification sound when the icon is generated. The output of is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 49( b ), in the first image display device 70, the first reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E changes from “0” to “1”. At the same time, the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed in the normal size on the first display portion 70B1. In addition, the voice output device 9 outputs a first notification sound (pico).

The timing of T2, the first special symbol hold number (U1) is reduced from "1" to "0" and the variation effect (variation display of the special symbol) by the normal variation pattern is started (start of customer waiting state) From the 5th frame). At this timing, the variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, the non-animated decrease display of the first hold number, and the animation change display (decrease display) of the first hold icon to the icon are started. It

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 49(c), in the first image display device 70, the first withdrawal number displayed in the first withdrawal number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0". At the same time, the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 displayed on the first display unit 70B1 starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the reduced display in the state where the effect symbol 70a is not scrolled (updated to another effect symbol) is started, and the special symbol TZ is also started to be scrolled.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 10th frame from the start of the output of the first generation notification sound (the 14th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the output of the first generation notification sound ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 49D, in the first image display device 70, the movement (shift) of the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 to the icon display area 70C continues, and the effect is produced. The reduced display of the symbol 70a continues.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the 20th frame from the start of the change display (reduction display) of the first hold icon (the 25th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the change display of the first hold icon ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 49(e), in the first image display device 70, the first hold icon H11 moved from the first display portion 70B1 is located at the center of the icon display area 70C, and With the icon TH, the reduction display of the effect design 70a is stopped.

The timing of T5 is the timing (the 45th frame from the start of the customer waiting state) which is the 40th frame after the variation effect is started. At this timing, the variable display of the effect design 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 49(f), in the first image display device 70, following the scrolling (movement in the downward direction) of the effect design 70a in the left variable display area, the central variable display is displayed. Scrolling (movement in the downward direction) of the effect design 70a in the area is started.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 50th frame after the variation effect is started (the 55th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the effect design 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 50(g), in the first image display device 70, following the scrolling (movement in the downward direction) of the effect design 70a in the central variable display area, the variable display on the right is displayed. Scrolling (movement in the downward direction) of the effect design 70a in the area is started, and the effect design 70a is in a state of being scrolled in all the variable display areas.

The timing of T7 is a timing (the 230th frame from the start of the customer waiting state) which becomes the 225th frame after the variation effect is started. At this timing, the variable display of the effect design 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 50(h), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "3" is provisionally stopped (becomes swaying) in the left variable display area, The scrolling of the effect design 70a continues in the central and right side variable display areas.

The timing of T8 is the timing of the 255th frame from the start of the variation effect (260th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the effect design 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 50(i), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "5" is temporarily stopped (becomes a swaying state) in the variable display area on the right side, The scrolling of the effect design 70a continues in the central variable display area.

The timing of T9 is the timing (the 290th frame from the start of the customer waiting state) after reaching the 285th frame after the variation effect is started. At this timing, the variable display of the effect design 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 50(j), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "6" is temporarily stopped (becomes in a swaying state) in the central variable display area, and is lost. A combination of effect symbols 70a indicating that there is is displayed.

The timing of T10 is the timing of the 300th frame from the start of the variation effect (the 305th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the variable display of the special symbol TZ are finished.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 50(k), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a that has been temporarily stopped in the left-middle-right variable display area is stopped and displayed, and the special symbol TZ is effected. The stop combination is displayed with the same combination "365" as the design 70a. Further, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted.

In this way, when the special symbol holding number increases (changes from "0" to "1") during the customer waiting state, the holding number and the non-animated increase display of the holding icon are the shortest one frame. Since it ends in a minute period (time), it is possible to immediately shift to variable production (decrease display of hold number and change display of hold icon) so as not to delay, and it is possible to improve the fun of the game Becomes

Further, the generated notification sound output in synchronization with the start of the increase display of the hold number and the hold icon is (frame update) after the hold number and the timing of the increase display of the hold icon (frame update). Since it continues until the (update) timing, it is possible to make the player surely recognize that the special symbol holding number has increased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the number of reserved special symbols decreases (changes from "1" to "0"), a decrease display of non-animation of the hold number and a change display of the hold icon by animation to the icon are executed. Therefore, it is possible to surely let the player recognize that the number of reserved special symbols has decreased, and to improve the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, the special symbol is held because the timing of the reduced display of the held numbers is completed (frame update) is earlier than the timing of the change display of the hold icon being changed (frame update). While making the number change, it becomes easier for the player to understand that the special symbol holding number has decreased due to the holding number, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, until the change display of the hold icon to the icon is completed, the effect design does not scroll (not updated to the next effect design), and the change display of the hold icon is completed (frame update) Since the scroll (update to the next effect design) is started, it becomes easier to grasp the progress of the game that the variable effect is started after the hold storage is reduced, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

In addition, when the special symbol hold number increases (changes from "0" to "1") while waiting for customers, the hold icon is not displayed non-animated, but rather than the hold number is displayed. The animation may be executed over a plurality of frames (for example, 5 frames) so as to continue for a long time. By doing so, it becomes easier for the player to understand the increase in the number of special symbols reserved, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, instead of starting the reduction display of the pending numbers and the change display (decrease display) of the hold icon to the icon at the same (frame update) timing, the reduction display of the pending numbers is completed (frame update) timing. If it is faster, you can start either one first. By doing so, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom of display control and to grasp that the number of reserved special symbols has decreased at an early stage, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, instead of starting the scrolling of the effect symbol (update to the next effect symbol) at the timing when the change display of the hold icon is completed (frame update) (start is delayed more than usual), the change display of the hold icon is changed. A little before completion (frame update) timing, scrolling of the effect symbol (update to the next effect symbol) may be started.

(Specific example when the number of holdings increases during variable performance)
A specific example in which the number of holdings increases during the variation effect will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 51 is a timing chart in which the number of holdings increases during the variable effect, and FIGS. 52(a) to 52(c) are diagrams showing effect examples corresponding to FIGS. 51(a) to 51(c).

First, the timing of T1 is the timing of the 50th frame after the variation effect based on the normal variation pattern is started. At this timing, the variable display of the effect design 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 52(a), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are scrolled (moved downward). Further, "0" is displayed in the first hold number display area 70E and the second hold number display area 70F, and the icon (CD icon) TH is displayed.

The timing of T2 is the timing when the first special symbol hold number (U1) is increased from "0" to "1" (60th frame from the start of variation effect). At this timing, the non-animated increase display of the first hold number and the animation increase display of the first hold icon are started, and the output of the first generated notification sound that is the notification sound when the icon is generated is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 52( b ), in the first image display device 70, the first reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70</b>E changes from “0” to “1”. At the same time, the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed in a very small size on the first display portion 70B1 to start the enlarged display. In addition, the voice output device 9 outputs a first notification sound (pico).

The timing of T3 is the timing (the 70th frame from the start of the fluctuating effect) which is the 10th frame after the increase display of the first hold icon is started. At this timing, the increase display of the first hold icon ends and the output of the first occurrence notification sound ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 52C, in the first image display device 70, the enlarged display of the first hold icon (CD icon) displayed on the first display portion 70B1 ends and the normal size is displayed. Is displayed.

In this way, when the number of special symbols is increased, non-animated increase display of the hold numbers and increase display of animation of the hold icon are executed, so that the special symbol hold number is increased Can be surely recognized, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, the number of special symbols is changed because the timing of the increase display of the held numbers (frame update) is earlier than the timing of the increase display of the hold icons (frame update). While producing that, it becomes easier for the player to understand that the number of special symbols held has been increased by the number held, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the special symbol reservation number increases during execution of the variable effect, the increase display of the reservation icon is executed for a longer period than when the special symbol reservation number increases during the customer waiting state. Therefore, it is possible to surely let the player recognize that the number of reserved special symbols has increased, and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the hold number and the generated notification sound that is output in synchronization with the start of the increase display of the hold icon end in synchronization with the timing when the increase display of the hold icon ends (frame update), so the special symbol hold The fact that the number has increased can be effectively produced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, since the period related to the increase display of the hold icon (10 frames) is shorter than the period related to the change display of the hold icon (20 frames), the variation effect is started. It can be emphasized, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Note that, instead of starting the increase display of the hold numbers and the increase display of the hold icons at the same (frame update) timing, if the increase display of the hold numbers (frame update) timing is earlier May be started first. By doing so, while increasing the degree of freedom of display control, it is possible to grasp at an early stage that the number of special symbol reservations has increased, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

Further, the period related to the increase display of the hold icon may be set to be longer than the period related to the increase display of the hold icon, rather than the period related to the change display of the hold icon. By doing so, it is possible to emphasize that the number of reserved special symbols has increased, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

Further, rather than shortening the period relating to the increase display of the hold icon, the period may be set to be the same as the period relating to the change display of the hold icon.

(Specific example when the number of holdings increases immediately after decreasing)
A specific example in which the number of holdings increases immediately after the decrease will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 53 is a timing chart in which the number of holdings increases immediately after the reduction, and FIGS. 54(a) to 54(f) are diagrams showing examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (f) of FIG.

First, the timing of T0 is the timing of the fifth frame after the effect design 70a is stopped and displayed. At this timing, the stop display of the effect design 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54(a), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbols 70a of "4", "6", and "8" indicating the loss and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed. Has become. Further, "2" is displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E and "0" is displayed in the second reservation number display area 70F. Furthermore, the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed on the first display unit 70B1, the first hold icon (CD icon) H12 is displayed on the second display unit 70B2, and the icon TH is not displayed. It is in a state.

The timing of T1 is the timing (20th frame after the effect design 70a is stopped and displayed) when the variation effect (variable display of the special symbol) by the normal variation pattern is started. At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, the non-animated decrease display of the first hold number, the animation change display of the first hold icon to the icon, and the animation of the first hold icon The reduction display by is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54( b ), in the first image display device 70, the first reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70 E changes from “2” to “1”. .. Further, the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 displayed on the first display unit 70B1 starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display region 70C, and at the same time, is displayed on the second display unit 70B2. The 1 hold icon (CD icon) H12 starts moving (shifting) toward the first display portion 70B1. Further, the reduced display in the state where the effect symbol 70a is not scrolled (updated to another effect symbol) is started, and the special symbol TZ is also started to be scrolled.

The timing of T2 is the timing when the first special symbol hold number (U1) is increased from "1" to "2" (the 30th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the non-animated increase display of the first hold number starts, but since the change display and the decrease display of the first hold icon are being executed, the increase display of the first hold icon or the occurrence of the icon occurs. The output of the generated notification sound, which is the notification sound of, will be waited.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54( c ), in the first image display device 70, the first hold digit displayed in the first hold number display area 70 E changes from “1” to “2”. At the same time, the reduced display of the effect design 70a continues.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 20th frame from the start of the change display and the reduced display of the first hold icon (the 40th frame after the effect design 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the change display and the decrease display of the first hold icon are completed. In addition, the increased display of the waiting first hold icon by animation is started, and the output of the first generated notification sound, which is the notification sound when the icon is generated, is also started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54(d), in the first image display device 70, the first hold icon H11 moved from the first display portion 70B1 is located at the center of the icon display area 70C. While becoming the icon TH, the first hold icon H12 moved from the second display unit 70B2 is located at the center of the first display unit 70B1, and the reduced display of the effect design 70a is stopped. Further, the first hold icon (CD icon) H13 is displayed in a very small size on the second display section 70B2 to start the enlarged display, and at the same time, the first output notification sound (pico) is output from the voice output device 9. It

The timing of T4 is the timing of the fifth frame after the increase display of the first hold icon is started (the 45th frame after the effect design 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the increase display of the first hold icon and the output of the first occurrence notification sound are continuing.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54(e), in the first image display device 70, the first hold icon (CD icon) H13 is displayed in a small size on the second display portion 70B2 and the enlarged display is continued. At the same time, the output of the first generation notification sound (pico) from the audio output device 9 continues. Further, scrolling of the effect symbol 70a (movement in the downward direction) in the left variable display area is started.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 10th frame after the increase display of the first hold icon is started (the 50th frame after the effect design 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the increase display of the first hold icon ends and the output of the first occurrence notification sound ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54(f), in the first image display device 70, the enlarged display of the first hold icon (CD icon) displayed on the first display portion 70B1 ends and the normal size is displayed. Is displayed. Further, scrolling (moving downward) of the effect symbol 70a in the central variable display area is started.

In this way, when the number of special symbols is increased during the execution of the change display of the hold icon to the icon, and the decrease display of the hold icon, the change display and the decrease display are completed. Even before the (frame update) timing, since the increase display of the hold number is started, the change display of the hold icon, and the fact that the special symbol hold number has increased even during the execution of the decrease display It is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, when the number of special symbols is increased during execution of the change display of the hold icon to the icon, and the decrease display of the hold icon, the increase display of the hold icon and the output of the occurrence notification sound are waited ( Restriction), change display of the hold icon, and at the timing when the reduced display is completed (frame update), the increase display of the hold icon and the output of the generated notification sound are started, so the transition of the special symbol hold number It is possible to prevent the difficulty of grasping the game and improve the enjoyment of the game.

It should be noted that, instead of outputting the generated notification sound in synchronization with the increase display of the hold icon executed after the increase display of the hold numbers, the generation notification sound is output in synchronization with the increase display of the hold numbers. Good.

Also, instead of starting the increase display of the hold icon and the output of the occurrence notification sound (start is delayed more than usual) at the timing when the change display of the hold icon and the decrease display are completed (frame update), The increase display of the hold icon and the output of the generation notification sound may be started at a timing (frame update) just before the change display and the decrease display of the hold icon are completed. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the difficulty of grasping the transition of the number of special symbols held, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, even when the number of special symbols is increased during the increase display of the hold icon, similarly to the change display or the decrease display of the hold icon, the increase display of the hold icon and the output of the occurrence notification sound are waited for. On the other hand, while increasing (restricting), the increase display of the hold number is started, and at the timing when the increase display of the hold icon is completed (frame update), the increase display of the hold icon and the output of the generation notification sound may be started.

(Specific example when the number of holdings increases during specific reach production)
A specific example when the number of holdings increases during the specific reach effect will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 55 is a timing chart in which the number of holdings increases during the specific reach effect, and FIGS. 56(a) to 56(f) are diagrams showing effect examples corresponding to FIGS. 55(a) to (f). ..

First, the timing of T1 is the timing of the 400th frame after the variation effect by the SP reach variation pattern is started. At this timing, the normal reach effect executed before the SP reach effect and the variable display of the special symbol TZ continue.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 56(a), in the first image display device 70, the production symbol 70a of "7" is provisionally stopped in the left and right variable display areas, and the effect symbol in the central variable display area. The variable display of 70a continues. Further, "1" is displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second reservation number display area 70F. Further, the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 and the icon (CD icon) TH are displayed on the first display section 70B1.

The timing of T2 is the timing of the 90th frame from the start of the normal reach effect (the 430th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the development production for developing the SP reach production is started.

Specifically, in the first image display device 70, the production pattern 70a of "7" temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas and the effect symbol 70a scrolled in the central variable display area are displayed on the screen. Move to the upper left and start reduced display.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 15th frame after the development effect is started (the 445th frame after the variation effect is started). At this timing, the development effect for developing the SP reach effect is continuing.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 56( b ), in the first image display device 70, in the production pattern 70 a of “7” which is temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas, and in the central variable display area. The scrolling effect design 70a is displayed at a position near the upper left of the screen, and is displayed in a size smaller than the normal size.

The timing of T4 is the 30th frame after the development effect is started (the 460th frame after the variation effect is started). At this timing, the SP reach effect is started while the development effect is finished.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 56( c ), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70 a in the left, middle, right variable display area is displayed in a reduced size in the upper left of the screen, and in the center of the screen. The confrontation effect in which the ally character C2 and the enemy character C3 confront each other is started. In addition, with the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C being left, the hold icon (here, the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area (first hold icon display area 70B, second hold icon display area 70D)). The first hold icon only) is hidden together with the hold icon display area. Further, the special symbol TZ is in the reach state with the same "7" symbol as the effect symbol 70a.

The timing of T5 is the timing when the first special symbol holding number (U1) is increased from "1" to "2" (the 820th frame after the variation effect is started). At this timing, the non-animated increase display of the first hold number is started, but since the SP reach effect (confrontation effect) is being executed, the increase display of the first hold icon and the occurrence of the icon at this timing are performed. The generated notification sound, which is a notification sound, is not output.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 56( d ), in the first image display device 70, the first hold digit displayed in the first hold number display area 70</b>E changes from “1” to “2”. At the same time, the final effect (decision effect for notifying whether or not it is a big hit) of the confrontation effect is executed.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 420th frame after the SP reach effect (confrontation effect) is started (the 880th frame after the variation effect is started). At this timing, the result of the final effect (decision effect) of the confrontation effect is derived.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 56(e), in the first image display device 70, the effect that the ally character C2 wins over the enemy character C3 is performed, and at the same time, the effect pattern 70a reduced and displayed in the upper left of the screen. Will be temporarily stopped (it will be in a swaying state) with a combination (“777”) indicating that it is a big hit.

The timing of T7 is the timing of the 450th frame after the start of the SP reach effect (confrontation effect) (the 910th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the SP reach effect (confrontation effect) ends, and the non-animated return display and the increase display of the first hold icon are performed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 56(f), in the first image display device 70, the effect design 70a that has been reduced and displayed in the upper left of the screen is enlarged and displayed in the center of the screen and temporarily stopped (the swaying state). become). Further, the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed again on the first display unit 70B1, and the first hold icon (CD icon) H12 is displayed on the second display unit 70B2 in the normal size.

Then, finally, the effect symbol 70a that has been temporarily stopped in the left, right, and right variable display areas is stopped and displayed, and the special symbol TZ is also stopped and displayed in the same combination "777" as the effect symbol 70a. Further, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted.

In this way, when the special symbol hold number increases during execution of the specific effect (SP reach effect), even if it is before the timing (frame update) when this specific effect ends (frame update), Since the increased display is started, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, when the special symbol hold number increases during execution of the specific effect (SP reach effect), the execution of the increase display of the hold icon is waited (restricted), and the specific effect ends (reduced display). At the timing when the lost effect design or the jackpot effect design is enlarged (frame update), the increase display of the hold icon is started, so it is possible to prevent it from becoming difficult to grasp the transition of the special design hold number and improve the fun of the game. It becomes possible.

In addition, when the increase display of the hold icon is started at the timing when the specific effect (SP reach effect) ends, the increase display of the hold icon by the non-animation that is completed in one frame is performed, so the timing when the special symbol hold number increases Even if there is an extreme discrepancy between the timing of executing the increased display of the hold icon and the hold icon, it is possible to reduce the player's discomfort and improve the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, when the increase display of the hold icon is started at the timing when the specific effect (SP reach effect) ends, the generated notification sound is not output, so the number of special symbol reservations increases at the timing when the specific effect ends due to the generated notification sound. It becomes difficult to misunderstand that, and it becomes possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

Even if the number of special symbols is increased during execution of the specific effect (SP reach effect), while the increase display of the hold number is executed, the execution of the increase display of the hold icon is on standby (limit). In addition, it is preferable that the increase display of the hold icons corresponding to the increase at the timing when the specific effect is finished (frame update) is collectively executed in one frame.

In addition, when the special symbol reservation number increases during execution of the specific effect (SP reach effect), the generation notification sound is not output, but the generation notification sound is output in synchronization with the increase display of the hold number. Good.

Further, although the SP reach effect is illustrated as the specific effect, the SPSP reach effect may be included in the specific effect, or the full rotation reach effect may be included.

(Specific example when the number of holdings increases and decreases before and after the end of the specific game state)
A specific example in which the number of holdings increases and decreases before and after the end of the specific game state will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 is a timing chart in which the number of holdings increases and decreases before and after the end of the specific game state, and FIGS. 58(a) to (f) and FIGS. 59(g) to (i) show FIG. 57(a). It is a figure showing an example of production corresponding to (i).

First, the timing of T1 is the timing of the 400th frame after the last (100th) variation effect in the specific game state is started. At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58A, "1" is displayed in the first holding number display area 70E and "4" is displayed in the second holding number display area 70F. Further, the first hold icon display area 70B is deleted, and the second hold icons (CD icons) H21 to H24 are displayed on the first display portion 70D1 to the fourth display portion 70D4 of the second hold icon display area 70D, respectively. Then, the icon TH is displayed. Further, the number of variable effects that can be executed in the specific game state (here, "remaining 0 times") is displayed in the upper part of the screen, and the game ball is directed toward the right side region of the game region 5a in the upper right part of the screen. A right-handed image MU that prompts to fire is displayed.

The timing of T2 is the timing (the 415th frame after the variation effect is started) in which the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is increased from "1" to "2". At this timing, the non-animated increase display of the first hold number is started, but since the first hold icon display area 70B has been erased, the first hold icon increases display and a notification sound when the icon occurs. The generation notification sound is not output.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58( b ), in the first image display device 70, the first hold digit displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes from “1” to “2”. At the same time, scrolling of the effect design 70a continues.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 430th frame after the variation effect is started. At this timing, the effect symbols 70a that have been variably displayed in the left, middle, and right variability display area are temporarily stopped at the same time.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58(c), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "285" is temporarily stopped (becomes swaying) in the left, right, and middle variable display areas. A combination of effect symbols 70a indicating that the game is lost is displayed.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the 15th frame after the effect design 70a is temporarily stopped (the 445th frame after the variation effect is started). At this timing, the result display showing the result of the game in the predetermined advantageous period (while the jackpot game and the specific game state continue) is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58( d ), in the first image display device 70, the background image HG goes dark and “special time end” indicating the end of the specific game state and a predetermined advantageous period. The number of jackpot games executed in the inside is displayed as "bonanza x 1". Further, the temporarily stopped effect design 70a is reduced and displayed on the upper left of the screen.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 15th frame after the result display is started (the 460th frame after the variation effect is started). At this timing, the result display continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58(e), in the first image display device 70, the characters "TOTAL 1200pt" indicating the number of game balls acquired (disbursed) during the predetermined advantageous period are displayed. It is additionally displayed.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 30th frame from the start of the result display (the 475th frame from the start of the variation effect). At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the variable display of the special symbol TZ are finished.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58(f), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a temporarily stopped at the upper left of the screen moves to the center of the screen and is stopped and displayed, and the special symbol TZ is also displayed. The stop combination is displayed with the same combination "285" as the effect design 70a. Further, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted.

The timing of T7 is the timing (the 490th frame from the start of the variation effect) when the last (100th) variation effect in the specific game state ends and the first variation effect in the normal game state starts. At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, the non-animated reduction display of the second hold number, the animation change display of the second hold icon to the icon, the second hold icon animation decrease The display, the non-animated return display of the first hold icon, and the non-animated increase display of the first hold icon are started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 59(g), in the first image display device 70, the second reservation number displayed in the second reservation number display area 70F changes from "4" to "3". At the same time, the second hold icon (CD icon) H21 displayed on the first display unit 70D1 starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display region 70C, and at the same time, the second display unit 70D2 to the fourth display unit 70D4. The second hold icons (CD icons) H22 to H24 displayed in (4) start moving (shifting) toward the next adjacent display unit.

Further, the first hold icon display area is restored, the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 is restored and displayed on the first display portion 70B1, and the first hold icon (CD icon) H12 is displayed on the second display portion 70B2. Displayed in normal size. Further, the reduced display in the state where the effect symbol 70a is not scrolled (updated to another effect symbol) is started, and the special symbol TZ is also started to be scrolled. Further, on the upper left of the screen, a left hitting image HU is displayed which prompts the player to shoot a game ball toward the left area of the game area 5a.

The timing of T8 is the timing of the 20th frame from the start of the change display and the decrease display of the second hold icon (the 510th frame from the start of the previous variation effect). At this timing, the change display and the decrease display of the second hold icon are completed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 59(h), in the first image display device 70, the second hold icon H21 moved from the first display portion 70D1 is located at the center of the icon display area 70C and is displayed. While becoming the icon TH, the second hold icons H22 to H24 moved from the second display unit 70D2 to the fourth display unit 70D4 are located at the center of the adjacent display unit, and the reduced display of the effect design 70a is stopped.

The timing of T9 is the timing (the 520th frame from the start of the previous fluctuating effect) which is the 10th frame after the change display and the decrease display of the second hold icon are completed. At this timing, scrolling of the effect symbol 70a (movement in the downward direction) continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 59(i), in the first image display device 70, after the effect symbol 70a in the left variable display area is scrolled, the effect symbol 70a in the central variable display area is changed. Scrolling (moving downward) is started.

In this way, when the first special symbol hold number (U1) increases during the specific game state, while waiting (limit) the increase display of the first hold icon, the increase display of the first hold number is started. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the number of special symbols reserved has increased even during the execution of the specific effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Moreover, when the first special symbol hold number (U1) increases during the specific game state, the first hold icon is displayed at the timing when the specific game state (last variation effect in) ends (frame update). In order to start, even if you miss the increase display of the first hold number executed before that, it can be recognized that the first special symbol hold number has increased, improve the entertainment of the game It becomes possible.

In addition, when the increase display of the first hold icon is started at the timing when the specific game state (the last variation effect in it) is finished, since the increase display of the hold icon by the non-animation that is completed in one frame is performed, the special symbol hold Even if there is an extreme discrepancy between the timing when the number is increased and the timing when the hold icon is increased and displayed, it is possible to reduce the player's discomfort and improve the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, when the increase display of the hold icon is started at the timing when the specific game state (the last fluctuation effect in the) ends, the generated notification sound is not output, so the special symbol is generated at the timing when the specific game state is ended by the generated notification sound. It becomes difficult to misunderstand that the number of reservations has increased, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, until the change display of the hold icon to the icon is completed, the effect design does not scroll (not updated to the next effect design), and the change display of the hold icon is completed (frame update) Since the scroll (update to the next effect design) is started, it becomes easy to grasp the progress of the effect during the variable effect, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

Even when the first special symbol hold number increases by a plurality during the specific game state, while the increase display of the hold number is executed, the execution of the increase display of the hold icon is on standby (limit), It is only necessary to collectively display, in one frame, the increase display of the hold icons that have increased at the timing (frame update) when the specific game state (the last variation effect in) has ended.

In addition, when the first special symbol reservation number increases during the specific game state, instead of not outputting the generated notification sound, the generated notification sound may be output in synchronization with the increase display of the reserved numbers.

In the present embodiment, the first hold icon display area 70B and the second hold icon display area 70D are set (displayed) in the normal game state, but the second hold icon display area 70D is set ( It is also possible to set (display) only the first hold icon display area 70B without displaying (displaying).

Further, in the present embodiment, the icon display area 70C is set (displayed) regardless of whether or not the specific effect (SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, full rotation reach effect) is being executed during the variable effect. However, the icon may be hidden without setting (displaying) the icon display area 70C during execution of the specific effect, or the icon display area 70C may not be set (display) during execution of the specific effect. The icon may be hidden.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first hold number display area 70E and the second hold number display area 70F are set (displayed) on the first image display device 70, but are set on the second image display device 71 ( It may be displayed (displayed) or may be set (displayed) on a dedicated display device (for example, 7-segment LED, dot matrix, dedicated LED, etc.) different from the image display device. Then, when the dedicated LED is set, the number of special symbols to be reserved may be displayed according to the lighting color or lighting/blinking mode of the LED.

(Initial processing of lamp/driving controller)
The accessory initial process of the lamp/drive controller 150 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing accessory initial processing of the lamp/drive control section 150. This processing is performed in the timer interrupt processing executed in the lamp/drive control section 150 at every predetermined cycle (4 milliseconds). To be executed.

In step R101, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) is received from the main control board 110. When the power-on command is received, the process proceeds to step R102, and when the power-on command is not received, the process proceeds to step R103.

In step R102, the lamp CPU 150a performs the origin return process of the accessory (the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74, the effect button 17) to the initial process number updated in each process of the accessory initial process. Set "1" of.

In step R103, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the initial process number is “1”. If the initial process number is not "1", it is determined that the origin return process of the accessory is not performed, and the process is moved to step R105. If the initial process number is "1", the origin return process is performed in step R104. Then, the accessory initial processing of this time is ended. Specifically, based on the input signal from the position detection sensor, the return operation of the accessory (the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74, the effect button 17) to the origin position is executed, or the initial process number is set. Processing such as setting to “2” is performed. The details of the origin return process will be described later.

In step R105, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the initial process number is “2”. If the initial process number is not "2", it is determined that the initial action process of the accessory is not performed, and the present accessory process is ended. If the initial process number is "2", the initial action process is performed. , The accessory initial processing of this time is ended. Specifically, processing such as performing an initial operation and initial light emission for confirming whether or not the accessory operates normally, and setting an initial processing number to “0” is performed. The details of the initial operation processing will be described later.

As described above, according to the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. 60, the origin returning processing for performing the returning operation of the various accessories to the origin position and the initial operation for performing the initial operation and the initial light emission of the various accessories. The operation processing and the operation processing are not executed at the same time. By doing so, the returning operation of the various characters to the origin position and the initial operation and the initial light emission of the various characters do not coexist, and the returning operation and the initial operation and the initial light emission are separately confirmed. It becomes possible.

Further, according to the accessory initializing process shown in FIG. 60, the origin returning process is executed before the initial operation process. By doing so, the various types of accessories initially move from the origin position, and it becomes possible to easily grasp whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the various types of accessories.

(Return to origin of lamp/drive controller)
The origin return process of the lamp/drive control unit 150 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the origin return process in the lamp/drive control unit 150.

In step R105-1, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board accessory processing number indicating the transition of the home return status of the board accessory (the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74) is “0”. To do. When the board accessory processing number is not "0", the processing is moved to step R105-3, and when the board accessory processing number is "0", in step R105-2, the driving target to be returned to the origin is determined. 1 The movable member 73 is set, and the process proceeds to step R105-5.

In step R105-3, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the board accessory processing number is "1". If the board accessory processing number is not "1", the processing is moved to step R105-12, and if the board accessory processing number is "1", in step R105-4, the driving target to be returned to the origin is selected. The second movable member 74 is set, and the process proceeds to step R105-5.

In step R105-5, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the movable member to be driven is at the origin position (standby position). Specifically, the input signal from the position detection sensor that detects that each movable member is at the origin position is determined. If the movable member to be driven is not at the origin position, the process proceeds to step R105-6, and if the movable member to be driven is at the origin position, the process proceeds to step R105-11.

In step R105-6, the lamp CPU 150a drives the drive motor for moving the movable member that is the driving target so that the movable member that is the driving target returns to the origin position, and in step R105-7, the movable member is moved for a predetermined time. The board accessory abnormality determination timer for determining the occurrence of a return abnormality that does not return to the origin position is updated by +1.

In step R105-8, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the updated board accessory abnormality determination timer has an upper limit value (for example, 5 seconds). If the board accessory abnormality determination timer is at the upper limit value, the process moves to step R105-9 on the assumption that the restoration abnormality has occurred in the movable member to be driven, and if the panel accessory abnormality determination timer is not at the upper limit value. , The process moves to step R105-12.

In step R105-9, the lamp CPU 150a sets, in the lamp RAM 150c, return abnormality information (first movable member return abnormality information, second movable member return abnormality information) indicating that a return abnormality has occurred in the movable member to be driven. In Step R105-10, the board accessory abnormality determination timer is cleared.

The lamp CPU 150a updates the board accessory processing number by +1 in step R105-11. Specifically, if the board accessory processing number is "0", the board accessory processing number is updated to "1" so that the second movable member 74 is to be driven. If it is "1", the board accessory processing number is updated to "2" in order to finish the processing for returning the board accessory (first movable member, second movable member) to the origin.

In step R105-12, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the frame accessory processing number indicating the transition of the origin return status of the frame accessory (effect button 17) is “0”. If the frame accessory processing number is "0", the process proceeds to step R105-13. If the board accessory processing number is not "0", the process proceeds to step R105-20.

In step R105-13, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the effect button 17 is at the origin position (standby position). Specifically, the input signal from the position detection sensor that detects that the effect button 17 is at the origin position is determined. If the effect button 17 is not at the origin position, the process proceeds to step R105-14, and if the effect button 17 is at the origin position, the process proceeds to step R105-19.

In step R105-14, the lamp CPU 150a drives the effect button drive motor for moving the effect button 17 so that the effect button 17 returns to the original position, and in step R105-15, the effect button 17 is within the predetermined time. Then, the frame accessory abnormality determination timer for determining the occurrence of a return abnormality that does not return to the origin position is updated by +1.

In step R105-16, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the updated frame accessory abnormality determination timer has an upper limit value (for example, 5 seconds). If the frame accessory abnormality determination timer is at the upper limit value, it is determined that a return abnormality has occurred in the effect button 17, and the process proceeds to step R105-17. If the frame accessory abnormality determination timer is not at the upper limit value, this time, The origin return process of is ended.

The lamp CPU 150a sets, in step R105-17, return abnormality information indicating that a return abnormality has occurred in the effect button 17 in the lamp RAM 150c, and in step R105-18, clears the frame accessory abnormality determination timer.

The lamp CPU 150a updates the frame accessory processing number by +1 in step R105-19. Specifically, if the frame accessory processing number is "0", the board accessory processing number is updated to "1" so as to end the processing for returning the frame accessory (effect button 17) to the origin.

In step R105-20, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number satisfy the end condition. Specifically, it is determined whether the board accessory processing number is "2" and the frame accessory processing number is "1". When the end condition is satisfied, the process is moved to step R105-21, and when the end condition is not satisfied, the origin return process of this time is ended.

The lamp CPU 150a clears the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number in step R105-21, and executes the initial operation processing of the accessory to the above-described initial processing number in step R105-22. "2" is set, and the origin return process of this time is completed.

As described above, according to the origin return process shown in FIG. 61, the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are not returned to the origin position at the same time (at the same time) but in a predetermined order (first movable member). The member 73 is returned to the origin position in the order of the second movable member 74. By doing so, it becomes possible to easily confirm whether or not various board accessories have returned to the origin position. Further, when the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are in contact with each other with difficulty in separation, it is possible to prevent both movable members from exerting a load on each other, and both movable members are damaged at the same time. It is possible to suppress such inconvenience.

Further, according to the origin return process shown in FIG. 61, the returning operation of the board accessory (the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74) to the origin position and the origin position of the frame accessory (effect button 17) are performed. It is possible to perform the return operation to the same time (at the same time). By doing so, it is possible to shorten the time required for the returning operation of various types of accessory, and it is possible to smoothly shift to the initial operation of various types of accessory to be executed next.

Further, according to the origin return processing shown in FIG. 61, an upper limit is set for the time required for the return operation of each character to the origin position. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the returning operation of various accessory does not end forever. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which various types of accessories are performing a returning operation even during the variable effect and the effect operation is not performed, and it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from decreasing.

Further, according to the origin return process shown in FIG. 61, the returning operation of the board accessory (the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74) to the origin position and the origin position of the frame accessory (effect button 17) are performed. When both of the returning operations to the above are completed, processing for shifting to the initial operation processing is performed. By doing so, the returning operation of the various characters to the origin position and the initial operation of the various characters are not performed at the same time, and the returning operation and the initial operation of the various characters are separately checked. It becomes possible.

The first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are designed to return to the origin position in a predetermined order (first movable member 73→second movable member 74), but at the same time, the origin position is restored. The operation of returning to may be started. By doing so, it is possible to shorten the time required for the returning operation of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, and to smoothly shift to the initial operation of various accessory to be executed next. Becomes

(Initial operation processing of the lamp/drive control unit)
The initial operation process of the lamp/drive control unit 150 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the initial operation process of the lamp/drive control unit 150.

In step R107-1, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the board accessory processing number indicating the transition of the initial operation status of the board accessory is "0". If the board accessory processing number is "0", the process proceeds to step R107-2. If the board accessory processing number is not "0", the process proceeds to step R107-7.

In step R107-2, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the return abnormality information of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 is set in the lamp RAM 150c. If the return abnormality information is not set, it is determined that the initial operation and the initial light emission of the board accessory are performed, and the process is moved to step R107-4. If the return abnormality information is set, the step R107-3 is performed. In, the board accessory processing number is set to "2" because the initial operation of the board accessory is not performed, and the process proceeds to step R107-7.

In step R107-4, the lamp CPU 150a selects the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table (see FIG. 63) for determining the initial operation pattern of the board accessory. The details of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table will be described later.

In step R107-5, the lamp CPU 150a determines the initial operation pattern of the board accessory (the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74) and sets it in the lamp RAM 150c. Specifically, referring to the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 63, one initial operation pattern is selected from a plurality of initial operation patterns based on the type of power-on command and the presence or absence of return abnormality information. Determine the motion pattern.

The lamp CPU 150a updates the board accessory processing number by +1 in step R107-6. Specifically, if the board accessory processing number is "0", the board accessory processing number is updated to "1" to execute the initial operation of the board accessory.

In step R107-7, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board accessory processing number is "1". If the board accessory processing number is not "1", the processing is moved to step R107-11. If the board accessory processing number is "1", it is set in the lamp RAM 150c in step R107-8. The initial operation of the board accessory is executed according to the initial operation pattern of the existing board accessory.

In step R107-9, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the initial operation of the board accessory has been completed. If the initial operation of the board accessory has not been completed for all steps, the process proceeds to step R107-11. If the initial operation of the board accessory has been completed for all steps, at step R107-10, the board accessory is The processing number is updated by +1. Specifically, if the board accessory processing number is "1", the board accessory processing number is updated to "2" in order to end the processing for initializing the board accessory.

In step R107-11, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the frame accessory processing number indicating the transition of the initial operation status of the frame accessory (effect button 17) is “0”. If the frame accessory processing number is "0", the process proceeds to step R107-12. If the frame accessory processing number is not "0", the process proceeds to step R107-17.

In step R107-12, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the return abnormality information of the effect button 17 is set in the lamp RAM 150c. If the return abnormality information is not set, the process is moved to step R107-14 as performing the initial operation of the frame accessory, and if the return abnormality information is set, the frame is returned in step R107-13. As the initial operation of the accessory is not performed, the frame accessory processing number is set to "2", and the process proceeds to step R107-17.

In step R107-14, the lamp CPU 150a selects the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table (see FIG. 64) for determining the initial operation pattern of the frame accessory. The details of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table will be described later.

In step R107-15, the lamp CPU 150a determines the initial operation pattern of the frame accessory (effect button 17) and sets it in the lamp RAM 150c. Specifically, referring to the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64, one initial operation pattern is determined from among a plurality of initial operation patterns based on the type of power-on command.

The lamp CPU 150a updates the frame accessory processing number by +1 in step R107-16. Specifically, if the frame accessory processing number is "0", the frame accessory processing number is updated to "1" to execute the initial operation of the frame accessory.

The lamp CPU 150a determines in step R107-17 whether or not the frame accessory processing number is "1". If the frame accessory processing number is not "1", the process is moved to step R107-21. If the frame accessory processing number is "1", it is set in the lamp RAM 150c in step R107-18. The initial operation of the frame accessory is executed according to the initial operation pattern of the existing frame accessory.

The lamp CPU 150a determines in step R107-19 whether or not the initial operation of the frame accessory has been completed. If the initial operation of the frame accessory has not been completed for all the processes, the process proceeds to step R107-21. If the initial operation of the frame accessory has been completed for all the processes, the frame accessory is operated at step R107-20. The processing number is updated by +1. Specifically, if the frame accessory processing number is "1", the frame accessory processing number is updated to "2" in order to end the process for initializing the frame accessory.

In step R107-21, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number satisfy the ending condition. Specifically, it is determined whether the board accessory processing number is "2" and the frame accessory processing number is "2". When the end condition is satisfied, the process is moved to step R107-22, and when the end condition is not satisfied, the initial operation process of this time is ended.

The lamp CPU 150a clears the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number in step R107-22, clears the above-described initial processing number in step R107-23, and ends the initial operation processing of this time. ..

Thus, according to the initial operation processing shown in FIG. 62, the initial operation of the board accessory (the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74) and the initial operation of the frame accessory (effect button 17) are performed. It can be executed simultaneously (at the same time). By doing so, it is possible to reduce the time required for the initial operation of various types of accessory, and it is possible to prevent the production operation of various types of accessory from being hindered during the game.

Further, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 62, when there is a return abnormality in the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 which form the board accessory, the first movable member 73, and The initial operation of the second movable member 74 is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the movable member from completely failing or being damaged by forcibly performing the initial operation of the movable member in which the restoration abnormality has occurred.

Further, according to the initial operation processing shown in FIG. 62, when the effect button 17 forming the frame accessory has a return abnormality, the initial operation of the effect button 17 is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the effect button 17 is completely broken or damaged by forcibly performing the initial operation of the effect button 17 in which the restoration abnormality has occurred.

Further, according to the initial operation processing shown in FIG. 62, even if the initial operation of the board role object in which the return abnormality has occurred is not executed, the initial operation of the frame role object in which the return error has not occurred is executed, and the return abnormality occurs. Even if the initial operation of the frame accessory that has occurred is not executed, the initial operation of the board accessory in which the return abnormality has not occurred is executed. By doing so, it becomes possible to confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the accessory that does not have the restoration abnormality.

Further, according to the initial operation processing shown in FIG. 62, both the initial operation of the board accessory (the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74) and the initial operation of the frame accessory (effect button 17) are completed. If so, the initial operation processing ends. By doing so, it is unknown whether one of the board accessory and the frame accessory is performing the initial operation, but the other is performing the directing operation. Will not occur.

(Panel accessory initial operation pattern determination table)
FIG. 63 is a diagram showing a board accessory initial operation pattern determination table that is referred to when determining an initial operation pattern of a board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74).

The board accessory initial operation pattern determination table is associated with the type of power-on command, the presence or absence of return abnormality information, and the selected initial operation pattern. For reference, the operation mode at the initial operation and the initial operation The number of steps is described.

In the initial operation pattern, patterns 01 to 03 that are determined when the power-on designation command is received and the first power-supply restoration designation command that indicates that the customer is in the waiting state are determined. Patterns 04 to 06 and patterns determined when a second power restoration designating command indicating that special symbols are being displayed in variation or a third power restoration designating command indicating that a jackpot game is being played are received. 07 to 09 are set.

The "initial operation pattern 01" is determined when there is no return abnormality in the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, and the first movable member 73 is in the order of small descending → origin returning → large descending → origin returning. After that, the second movable member 74 moves in the order of movement→return to origin, and during that period, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED light up (emits light) in blue and white.
The “initial operation pattern 02” is determined when there is a return abnormality in the first movable member 73, the first movable member 73 does not operate, the second movable member 74 operates in the order of movement→return to origin, During the period, the second movable member LED lights up (emits light) in blue and white.
The “initial operation pattern 03” is determined when the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, and the first movable member 73 operates in the order of small descending→returning to origin→large descending→returning to origin, and then the second movable member. 74 does not operate and the first movable member LED lights up (emits light) in blue and white during that period.

The "initial operation pattern 04" is determined when there is no return abnormality in the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, and is the initial operation except that the second movable member LED lights up only in blue (light emission). Same as pattern 01.
The “initial operation pattern 05” is the same as the initial operation pattern 02 except that it is determined when the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality and the second movable member LED lights up (emits light) only in blue.
The "initial operation pattern 06" is determined when the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, and the second movable member LED does not light up in blue, so that it is the same as the initial operation pattern 03.

The "initial operation pattern 07" is determined when the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 have no return abnormality, and except that the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are turned off. It is the same as the initial operation pattern 01 or the initial operation pattern 04.
The "initial operation pattern 08" is the same as the initial operation pattern 02 or the initial operation pattern 05 except that the first movable member 73 is determined to have a return abnormality and the second movable member 74 is turned off.
The “initial operation pattern 09” is the same as the initial operation pattern 03 or the initial operation pattern 06 except that the second movable member 74 is determined to have a return abnormality and the first movable member 73 is turned off.

Although the lighting color of the first movable member LED is not described in the initial operation pattern 02, the initial operation pattern 05, and the initial operation pattern 08, this point is due to the abnormal return of the first movable member 73 to cause the first movable member 73 to move. This is because the member LED blinks red to notify the abnormality.

Further, in the initial operation pattern 03, the initial operation pattern 06, and the initial operation pattern 09, the lighting color of the second movable member LED is not described, but this point is the second movable member 74 due to the abnormal return of the second movable member 74. This is because the member LED blinks red to notify the abnormality.

The first feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 63 is that the board accessory is operated at power-on with initialization of the main RAM 110 and when power is restored without initialization of the main RAM 110c. The point that the operation mode (the number of steps, the operation of each step) of the initial operation of the (first movable member, the second movable member) is the same is mentioned. By doing so, it becomes possible to appropriately confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the board accessory regardless of whether the power is turned on or the power is restored.

It should be noted that the same operation mode of the initial operation means that at least the movement pattern of the board member in each process is the same, the operation time in each process may be the same, or the operation time in each process may be the same. May be different.

Further, the operation mode (the number of steps, the operation of each step) of one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 may be different when the power is turned on and when the power is restored. The operation mode (the number of steps, the operation of each step) of the initial operation of both the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 may be different. By doing this, it is possible to easily understand whether it is the initial operation when the power is turned on (the game control state has been initialized) or the initial operation when the power is restored (the game control state has been restored). Becomes

In addition, when the operation mode (the number of steps, the operation of each step) of the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and/or the second movable member 74 is different when the power is turned on and when the power is restored, the power is turned on. The operation that is not included in the initial operation when the power is restored may be executed in the initial operation when the power is restored, or the operation that is not included in the initial operation when the power is restored may be performed in the initial operation when the power is turned on. By doing this, it is easier to understand whether it is the initial operation when the power is turned on (the control state of the game has been initialized) or the initial operation when the power is restored (the control state of the game has been restored). It will be possible.

The second feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 63 is that the board accessory (the first movable member 73, the second movable member 73, the second movable member 73, There is a difference in the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of the movable member 74). By doing this, it is possible to grasp whether it is the initial operation when the power is turned on (the control state of the game has been initialized) or the initial operation when the power is restored (the control state of the game has been restored). Becomes

The third feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 63 is that the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the first movable member LED is at the time of power-on and at the time of power recovery to restore the customer waiting state. While being the same, the point that the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the second movable member LED is different is mentioned. By doing this, it is possible to grasp whether it is the initial operation when the power is turned on (the control state of the game has been initialized) or the initial operation when the power is restored (the control state of the game has been restored). Becomes

It should be noted that the light emission state of the initial light emission of the first movable member LED is the same when the power is turned on and when the power supply is restored to the customer waiting state, while the light emission state of the initial light emission of the second movable member LED is different. However, conversely, the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the first movable member LED is made different at the time of power-on and at the time of power recovery at the time of returning to the customer waiting state, while the second movable member LED The initial light emission mode may be the same.

Further, both the initial light emission mode of the first movable member LED and the initial light emission mode of the second movable member LED are different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to restore the customer waiting state. Good. By doing this, it is possible to easily understand whether it is the initial operation when the power is turned on (the game control state has been initialized) or the initial operation when the power is restored (the game control state has been restored). Becomes

As the fourth feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 63, when the power is turned on and during the fluctuation display of the special symbol, or when the power is restored during the jackpot game, the board accessory is The difference is in the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of the (first movable member, the second movable member). By doing this, it is possible to grasp whether it is the initial operation when the power is turned on (the control state of the game has been initialized) or the initial operation when the power is restored (the control state of the game has been restored). Becomes

As the fifth feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 63, when the power is restored to the customer waiting state, and when the special symbols are displayed in a variation display, or when the power is restored to the jackpot game, the power is restored. The difference is that the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of the board accessory (first movable member, second movable member) is different. By doing this, it is possible to understand whether it is the initial operation due to the power restoration to restore the customer waiting state, the fluctuation of the special symbol is displayed, or the initial operation due to the power restoration to be restored during the jackpot game. It will be possible.

In addition, during the variable display of the special symbol, or when the power is restored during the jackpot game, both the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are turned off. The member LED and the second movable member LED may be turned on in the same light emission mode as when the power supply is restored to the customer waiting state.

The sixth feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 63 is that the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality regardless of whether the power is turned on or the power is restored. If the movable member 74 does not have a return abnormality, the second movable member 73 does not perform the initial operation and the second movable member 74 does not perform an initial operation, and the second movable member 73 does not have a return abnormality. When there is a return abnormality in 74, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is performed and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is not performed. By doing so, it is possible to perform a suitable initial operation depending on the presence or absence of the recovery abnormality.

(Frame action product initial operation pattern determination table)
FIG. 64 is a diagram showing a frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table that is referred to when determining an initial operation pattern of the frame accessory (effect button 17).

In the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table, the types of commands at power-on and the selected initial operation patterns are associated with each other, and the operation mode at the initial operation and the number of steps of the initial operation are described for reference. ing.

The “initial operation pattern 01” is determined when the power-on designation command is received, and the effect button 17 operates in the order of large rise & continuous vibration→return to origin→intermittent vibration, and the effect button LED turns on during that period. Lights (emits) in the order of red → green → blue.
The "initial operation pattern 02" is determined when the first power supply restoration designation command indicating that the customer is in the waiting state is received, and the effect button operates in the order of large rise & continuous vibration → origin return, During that period, the effect button lights up in blue (emits light).
The "initial operation pattern 03" is determined when the second power supply restoration designation command indicating that the special symbol is being displayed in variation or the third power restoration designation command indicating that the jackpot is being played is received, The effect button operates in the order of large rise & continuous vibration->return to origin, and the effect button LED is turned off during that period.

The continuous vibration time (2 seconds) of the effect button 17 and the intermittent vibration time (2 seconds) are executed by operating the effect button 17 during the effective period that occurs during execution of the variable effect. The time during which the effect button 17 vibrates during the operation effect (1 second vibration for the effective period for the big hit announcement that expects to be a big hit, and 5 for the determined effect effective period for notifying whether or not it is a big hit) (Vibration per second) is a different time.

The first feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64 is that the frame accessory is operated when the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110 and when the power is restored without initializing the main RAM 110c. There is a difference in the operation mode (the number of steps, the operation of each step) of the initial operation of the (production button 17). By doing this, it is easy to understand whether it is the initial operation when the power is turned on (the control state of the game has been initialized) or the initial operation when the power is restored (the control state of the game has been restored). Is possible.

The second feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64 is that the initial operation of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on is an operation that is not included in the initial operation of the effect button 17 when the power is restored. The point is that it is designed to let you do. By doing this, it is easier to understand whether it is the initial operation when the power is turned on (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation when the power is restored (the control state of the game is restored). It becomes possible.

Note that the operation mode (the number of steps, the operation of each step) of the initial operation of the effect button 17 may be the same when the power is turned on and when the power is restored. This makes it possible to appropriately confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the frame accessory regardless of whether the power is turned on or the power is restored.

The third feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64 is that during the initial operation of the frame accessory (production button 17) at the time of power-on and at the time of power recovery to restore the customer waiting state. The point that the light emission mode of the initial light emission in is different. By doing this, it is possible to grasp whether it is the initial operation when the power is turned on (the control state of the game has been initialized) or the initial operation when the power is restored (the control state of the game has been restored). Becomes

As the fourth feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64, when the power is turned on and during the fluctuation display of the special symbol, or when the power is restored during the jackpot game, the board accessory is displayed. The difference is in the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of the (first movable member, the second movable member). By doing this, it is possible to grasp whether it is the initial operation when the power is turned on (the control state of the game has been initialized) or the initial operation when the power is restored (the control state of the game has been restored). Becomes

In addition, during the variable display of the special symbol, or when the power is restored during the big hit game, the effect button LED is turned off, but the same as when the power is restored to restore the effect button LED to the customer waiting state. You may make it light in a light emission mode.

The fifth feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64 is the number of luminescent colors in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on, and the luminescent color in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is restored. The point is that the numbers are different. By doing this, it is easier to understand whether it is the initial operation when the power is turned on (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation when the power is restored (the control state of the game is restored). It becomes possible.

Although the number of emitted colors in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on is larger than the number of emitted light in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is restored, it may be reversed.

The sixth feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64 is that the emission color of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on is the same as the emission color of the effect button 17 when the power is restored. The point is that it contains a luminescent color that is not included in the above. By doing this, it is easier to understand whether it is the initial operation when the power is turned on (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation when the power is restored (the control state of the game is restored). It becomes possible.

It should be noted that the emission color of the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is restored may include an emission color that is not included in the initial emission color of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on.

The seventh feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64 is that the time during which the effect button 17 vibrates when the power is turned on or when the power is restored is an effect during the effective period that occurs during execution of the variable effect. There is a difference from the time when the effect button 17 vibrates during the operation effect that is executed by operating the button 17. By doing so, it is possible to recognize that the vibration is in the initial operation of the effect button 17.

The eighth feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64 is whether or not the initial vibration of the button vibration motor for which detection as to whether or not it is at the origin position is not performed is at the origin position. The point is that it is executed by being overlaid on the initial operation of the effect button 17 in which is detected. By doing so, the operation confirmation of the effect button 17 and the operation confirmation of the button vibration motor can be performed at the same time, and the time required for the operation confirmation can be shortened.

(Specific example when there is no recovery abnormality in various accessories after turning on the power)
FIG. 65 is a diagram showing a specific example in which there is no return abnormality in the various types of accessories (the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74, the effect button 17) after the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c.

The power-on with initialization of the main RAM 110c includes a power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized after the setting change processing is performed, and a power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without the setting change processing. However, here, a case will be described in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process and the power is turned on.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, an initial screen in which the characters "Reading" are displayed is displayed as the initial operation of the image display device.

When the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 at the timing of T2, the origin return process is started to return the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 to the origin position. The operation is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off, and the image display device has an effect symbol 70a of "135" which is an initial symbol when the power is turned on, and The first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still display) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound composed of an alarm and a voice "RAM clear".

In addition, when the special symbol storage designation command (first hold number and second hold number=0) as a power-on command is received, the first hold number display area 70E of the image display device and the second hold number. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub universal figure variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (miss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, and the sub-universal figure hold indicator 86 are in a display mode showing "0".

At the timing of T3, when the returning operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the returning operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the 1st movable member LED, the 2nd movable member LED, and the production button LED maintain the state where it went out.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 ends, the origin return process ends, the initial operation process starts, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 starts. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are alternately lighted in blue and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LEDs are lighted in the order of red→green→blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends, the initial light emission of the effect button LED ends and the customer wait lights (white light), and at the timing of T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 ends, the initial operation process ends, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED complete the initial light emission and light up while waiting for a customer (white lighting). ), and when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses at the timing of T8, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and the silent state is set.

At the timing of T9, when the first special symbol memory designation command (first holding number=1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 45 is received, the holding displayed in the first holding number display area 70E The number becomes “1”, the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, the sub first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing “1”, and the winning sound is output from the voice output device 9. "Pon♪" is output.

At the timing of T10, when the variation start command (effect symbol designating command, variation pattern designating command) is received from the main control board 110, the reserved figure displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes to "0" and changes. Production (production design 70a, and variable display of special design TZ, movement of hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, variation display is started on the sub first variation indicator 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during variation, and the sub first hold indicator 83 is displayed. , "0" is displayed.

(Specific example when the second movable member has a return abnormality after the power is turned on)
FIG. 66 is a diagram showing a specific example in which the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality after the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c. Here, the case where the main RAM 110c is initialized and the power is turned on without performing the setting change process will be described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, an initial screen in which the characters "Reading" are displayed is displayed as the initial operation of the image display device.

When the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 at the timing of T2, the origin return process is started to return the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 to the origin position. The operation is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off, and the image display device has an effect symbol 70a of "135" which is an initial symbol when the power is turned on, and The first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still display) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound composed of an alarm and a voice "RAM clear".

In addition, when the special symbol storage designation command (first hold number and second hold number=0) as a power-on command is received, the first hold number display area 70E of the image display device and the second hold number. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub universal figure variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (miss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub first hold indicator 83 and the sub second hold indicator 84 are in a display mode showing "0".

At the timing of T3, when the returning operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the returning operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the 1st movable member LED, the 2nd movable member LED, and the production button LED maintain the state where it went out.

At the timing of T4, when the return-to-origin process ends in the state where the return abnormality has occurred in the second movable member 74, the second movable member LED flashes red (an abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality, and the initial stage The operation process is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED is alternately lighted in blue and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LEDs are lighted in the order of red, green, and blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends, the initial light emission of the effect button LED ends and the customer wait lights (white light), and at the timing of T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends. Then, the initial operation process is completed without executing the initial operation of the second movable member 74, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED is completed, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is performed.

At the timing of T7, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent, and at the timing of T8, the game ball to the first starting opening 45 When the first special symbol memory designation command (first hold number=1) based on winning is received, the hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E becomes "1", and the first hold icon display area 70B is displayed. While the first hold icon is displayed, the sub first hold indicator 83 is in the display mode showing "1", and the winning sound "pon♪" is output from the voice output device 9.

At the timing of T9, when the variation start command (effect symbol designating command, variation pattern designating command) is received from the main control board 110, the reserved figure displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes to "0" and fluctuates. Production (production design 70a, and variable display of special design TZ, movement of hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the second movable member LED ends, the variation display is started on the sub first variation indicator 81, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED The light turns on during the change, and the sub first hold indicator 83 is in a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example when the first movable member has a return abnormality after the power is turned on)
FIG. 67 is a diagram showing a specific example of the case where the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality after the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c. Here, the case where the main RAM 110c is initialized and the power is turned on without performing the setting change process will be described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, an initial screen in which the characters "Reading" are displayed is displayed as the initial operation of the image display device.

When the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 at the timing of T2, the origin return process is started to return the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 to the origin position. The operation is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off, and the image display device has an effect symbol 70a of "135" which is an initial symbol when the power is turned on, and The first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still display) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound composed of an alarm and a voice "RAM clear".

In addition, when the special symbol storage designation command (first hold number and second hold number=0) as a power-on command is received, the first hold number display area 70E of the image display device and the second hold number. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub universal figure variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (miss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub first hold indicator 83 and the sub second hold indicator 84 are in a display mode showing "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed in the state where the return abnormality occurs in the first movable member 73, the first movable member LED notifies the occurrence of the return abnormality. Flashes red (abnormality notification mode), and the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the second movable member LED and the effect button LED remain in the off state.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 ends and the origin return processing ends, the initial operation processing starts and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 and the effect button 17 starts. At this time, the second movable member LED is alternately lighted in blue and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LEDs are lighted in the order of red, green, and blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends, the initial light emission of the effect button LED ends and the customer wait lights (white light), and at the timing of T6, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 ends. Then, the initial operation process is completed without executing the initial operation of the first movable member 73, the initial light emission of the second movable member LED is completed, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is performed.

At the timing of T7, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent, and at the timing of T8, the game ball to the first starting opening 45 When the first special symbol memory designation command (first hold number=1) based on winning is received, the hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E becomes "1", and the first hold icon display area 70B is displayed. While the first hold icon is displayed, the sub first hold indicator 83 is in the display mode showing "1", and the winning sound "pon♪" is output from the voice output device 9.

At the timing of T9, when the variation start command (effect symbol designating command, variation pattern designating command) is received from the main control board 110, the reserved figure displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes to "0" and fluctuates. Production (production design 70a, and variable display of special design TZ, movement of hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED ends, the variation display is started on the sub first variation indicator 81, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED The light turns on during the change, and the sub first hold indicator 83 is in a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example when there is a return abnormality in the production button after turning on the power)
FIG. 68 is a diagram showing a specific example in the case where the effect button 17 has a return abnormality after the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, an initial screen in which the characters "Reading" are displayed is displayed as the initial operation of the image display device.

When the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 at the timing of T2, the origin return process is started to return the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 to the origin position. The operation is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off, and the image display device has an effect symbol 70a of "135" which is an initial symbol when the power is turned on, and The first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still display) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound composed of an alarm and a voice "RAM clear".

In addition, when the special symbol storage designation command (first hold number and second hold number=0) as a power-on command is received, the first hold number display area 70E of the image display device and the second hold number. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub universal figure variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (miss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub first hold indicator 83 and the sub second hold indicator 84 are in a display mode showing "0".

At the timing of T3, when the returning operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed in the state where the effect button 17 has an anomaly, the effect button LED blinks red to notify the occurrence of an anomaly ( The abnormality notification mode) is started, and the returning operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED maintain the extinguished state.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 ends and the origin return processing ends, the initial operation processing starts and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 starts. The operation is not started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are alternately turned on in blue and white as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 starts, and at the timing of T6, the initial operation processing ends when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 ends. Then, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED ends and the waiting light for the customer is lit (white lighting), and at the timing of T7, the output period (for example, 60 seconds) of the initialization notification sound is After a lapse of time, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and the silent state is set.

At the timing of T8, when the first special symbol memory designation command (first holding number=1) based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 45 is received, the holding displayed in the first holding number display area 70E The number becomes “1”, the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, the sub first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing “1”, and the winning sound is output from the voice output device 9. "Pon♪" is output.

At the timing of T9, when the variation start command (effect symbol designating command, variation pattern designating command) is received from the main control board 110, the reserved figure displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes to "0" and fluctuates. Production (production design 70a, and variable display of special design TZ, movement of hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the effect button LED ends, the variable display is started on the sub first variable indicator 81, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are changing. It is lit, and the sub first hold indicator 83 is in a display mode showing "0".

In the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 68, the case where the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting changing process has been described, but the main RAM 110c is initialized after the setting is changed. When the power is turned on, the production control board 130 receives the setting change designation command after the initial screen is displayed to display the setting change screen, and then the production control board 130 receives the power-on designation command. By doing so, the first standby screen is displayed and the returning operation and the initial operation of the various types of accessories (the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74, the effect button 17) are started. The first standby screen may be displayed by receiving the setting value designation command.

(Specific example when there is no recovery abnormality in various accessories after power restoration)
FIG. 69 is a diagram showing a specific example in which there is no return abnormality in the various types of accessory (the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74, the effect button 17) after the power is restored without the initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, an initial screen in which the characters "Reading" are displayed is displayed as the initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the production control board 130 receives the power supply restoration designation command for waiting for a customer, which is transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are started. The return operation to the home position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off, and the image display device has an effect symbol 70a of "753" which is an initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and The second standby screen in the state where the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still display) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 maintains silence.

In addition, when the special symbol storage designation command (first hold number and second hold number=0) as a power-on command is received, the first hold number display area 70E of the image display device and the second hold number. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub universal figure variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (miss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub first hold indicator 83 and the sub second hold indicator 84 are in a display mode showing "0".

At the timing of T3, when the returning operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the returning operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the 1st movable member LED, the 2nd movable member LED, and the production button LED maintain the state where it went out.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 ends, the origin return process ends, the initial operation process starts, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 starts. At this time, the first movable member LED alternately lights blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights blue as initial light emission, and the effect button LED lights blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends, the initial light emission of the effect button LED ends and the customer wait lights (white light), and at the timing of T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 ends, the initial operation process ends, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED complete the initial light emission and light up while waiting for a customer (white lighting). ).

At the timing of T8, when the first special symbol memory designation command (first holding number=1) based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 45 is received, the holding displayed in the first holding number display area 70E The number becomes “1”, the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, the sub first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing “1”, and the winning sound is output from the voice output device 9. "Pon♪" is output.

At the timing of T9, when the variation start command (effect symbol designating command, variation pattern designating command) is received from the main control board 110, the reserved figure displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes to "0" and fluctuates. Production (production design 70a, and variable display of special design TZ, movement of hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, variation display is started on the sub first variation indicator 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during variation, and the sub first hold indicator 83 is displayed. , "0" is displayed.

(Specific example when the second movable member has a return abnormality after the power is restored)
FIG. 70 is a diagram showing a specific example in the case where the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality after the power supply is restored without initializing the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, an initial screen in which the characters "Reading" are displayed is displayed as the initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the production control board 130 receives the power supply restoration designation command for waiting for a customer, which is transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are started. The return operation to the home position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off, and the image display device has an effect symbol 70a of "753" which is an initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and The second standby screen in the state where the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still display) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 maintains silence.

In addition, when the special symbol storage designation command (first hold number and second hold number=0) as a power-on command is received, the first hold number display area 70E of the image display device and the second hold number. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub universal figure variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (miss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub first hold indicator 83 and the sub second hold indicator 84 are in a display mode showing "0".

At the timing of T3, when the returning operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the returning operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the 1st movable member LED, the 2nd movable member LED, and the production button LED maintain the state where it went out.

At the timing of T4, when the return-to-origin process ends in the state where the return abnormality has occurred in the second movable member 74, the second movable member LED flashes red (an abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality, and the initial stage The operation process is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED alternately lights blue and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LED lights blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends, the initial light emission of the effect button LED ends and the customer wait lights (white light), and at the timing of T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends. Then, the initial operation process is completed without executing the initial operation of the second movable member 74, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED is completed, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is performed.

At the timing of T7, when the first special symbol memory designation command (first holding number=1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 45 is received, the holding displayed in the first holding number display area 70E The number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, the sub first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "1", and the winning output sound from the voice output device 9 is displayed. Pon♪” is output.

At the timing of T8, when the fluctuation start command (effect symbol designating command, fluctuation pattern designating command) is received from the main control board 110, the reserved figure displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes to "0" and fluctuates. Production (production design 70a, and variable display of special design TZ, movement of hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the second movable member LED ends, the variation display is started on the sub first variation indicator 81, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED The light turns on during the change, and the sub first hold indicator 83 is in a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example when the first movable member has a return abnormality after the power is restored)
FIG. 71 is a diagram showing a specific example in the case where the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality after the power supply is restored without initializing the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, an initial screen in which the characters "Reading" are displayed is displayed as the initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the production control board 130 receives the power supply restoration designation command for waiting for a customer, which is transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are started. The return operation to the home position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off, and the image display device has an effect symbol 70a of "753" which is an initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and The second standby screen in the state where the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still display) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 maintains silence.

In addition, when the special symbol storage designation command (first hold number and second hold number=0) as a power-on command is received, the first hold number display area 70E of the image display device and the second hold number. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub universal figure variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (miss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub first hold indicator 83 and the sub second hold indicator 84 are in a display mode showing "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed in the state where the return abnormality occurs in the first movable member 73, the first movable member LED notifies the occurrence of the return abnormality. Flashes red (abnormality notification mode), and the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the second movable member LED and the effect button LED remain in the off state.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 ends and the origin return processing ends, the initial operation processing starts and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 and the effect button 17 starts. At this time, the second movable member LED and the effect button LED are lit in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends, the initial light emission of the effect button LED ends and the customer wait lights (white light), and at the timing of T6, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 ends. Then, the initial operation process is completed without executing the initial operation of the first movable member 73, the initial light emission of the second movable member LED is completed, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is performed.

At the timing of T7, when the first special symbol memory designation command (first holding number=1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 45 is received, the holding displayed in the first holding number display area 70E The number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, the sub first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "1", and the winning output sound from the voice output device 9 is displayed. Pon♪” is output.

At the timing of T8, when the fluctuation start command (effect symbol designating command, fluctuation pattern designating command) is received from the main control board 110, the reserved figure displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes to "0" and fluctuates. Production (production design 70a, and variable display of special design TZ, movement of hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED ends, the variation display is started on the sub first variation indicator 81, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED The light turns on during the change, and the sub first hold indicator 83 is in a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example when the production button has a recovery abnormality after the power is restored)
FIG. 72 is a diagram showing a specific example in the case where the effect button 17 has a return abnormality after the power is turned on without initializing the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, an initial screen in which the characters "Reading" are displayed is displayed as the initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the production control board 130 receives the power supply restoration designation command for waiting for a customer, which is transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are started. The return operation to the home position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off, and the image display device has an effect symbol 70a of "753" which is an initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and The second standby screen in the state where the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still display) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 maintains silence.

In addition, when the special symbol storage designation command (first hold number and second hold number=0) as a power-on command is received, the first hold number display area 70E of the image display device and the second hold number. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub universal figure variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (miss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub first hold indicator 83 and the sub second hold indicator 84 are in a display mode showing "0".

At the timing of T3, when the returning operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed in the state where the effect button 17 has an anomaly, the effect button LED blinks red to notify the occurrence of an anomaly ( The abnormality notification mode) is started, and the returning operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED maintain the extinguished state.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 ends and the origin return processing ends, the initial operation processing starts and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 starts. The operation is not started. At this time, the first movable member LED turns on blue and white alternately as initial light emission, and the second movable member LED turns on blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 starts, and at the timing of T6, the initial operation processing ends when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 ends. Then, the initial light emission ends in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the waiting light (white light) is emitted.

At the timing of T7, when the first special symbol memory designation command (first holding number=1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 45 is received, the holding displayed in the first holding number display area 70E The number becomes “1”, the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, the sub first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing “1”, and the winning sound is output from the voice output device 9. "Pon♪" is output.

At the timing of T8, when the fluctuation start command (effect symbol designating command, fluctuation pattern designating command) is received from the main control board 110, the reserved figure displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes to "0" and fluctuates. Production (production design 70a, and variable display of special design TZ, movement of hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the effect button LED ends, the variable display is started on the sub first variable indicator 81, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are changing. It is lit, and the sub first hold indicator 83 is in a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example when the state after power restoration is displaying the fluctuation of the special symbol and there is pending storage)
FIG. 73 is a diagram showing a specific example in the case where the state after power restoration without initialization of the main RAM 110c is during variable display of special symbols (loose variation display) and with pending storage.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, an initial screen in which the characters "Reading" are displayed is displayed as the initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the power supply restoration designation command for changing the special figure transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started to start the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17. The return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off, and the image display device displays a returning screen including the characters "Please restart the game". The audio output device 9 maintains silence.

Further, when the special symbol storage designation command (first hold number=3, second hold number=0) as a power-on command is received, the first holding number is displayed because the returning screen is displayed on the image display device. The state where no reserved numbers are displayed in the display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F is maintained.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub universal figure variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (miss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub first hold indicator 83 has a display mode showing "3", and the sub second hold display 84 has a display mode showing "0".

At the timing of T3, when the returning operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the returning operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the 1st movable member LED, the 2nd movable member LED, and the production button LED maintain the state where it went out.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 ends, the origin return process ends, the initial operation process starts, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 starts. At this time, the 1st movable member LED, the 2nd movable member LED, and the production button LED maintain the state where it went out.

At the timing of T5, the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends, at the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 starts, and at the timing of T7, When the initial operation of the second movable member 74 ends, the initial operation process ends, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED maintain the off state.

At the timing of T8, when the special symbol confirmation command is received from the main control board 110, the effect display 70a of "753" which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (still). The stop screen in the displayed state (the same as the second standby screen) is displayed, and the stop sound “Don♪” is output from the voice output device 9.

At this time, the three first hold icons are displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, but the icon display area 70C is secured in a state where the display area can display an effect image such as a background image ( The pedestal image is displayed), but the icon is not displayed.

At the timing of T9, when the fluctuation start command (effect symbol designating command, fluctuation pattern designating command) is received from the main control board 110, the reserved figure displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes to "2" and fluctuates. Production (production design 70a, and variable display of special design TZ, movement of hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, variation display is started on the sub first variation indicator 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during variation, and the sub first hold indicator 83 is displayed. , "2" is displayed.

In addition, in the case where the state after the power supply is restored is the variable display of the special symbol (displacement variation display) and there is no hold memory, "0" is displayed on the sub first hold indicator 83 at the timing of T2, and the timing of T9. The basic operation flow from the timing T1 to the timing T8 described above is the same except that the customer waiting state designation command is received and the variation effect is not started.

(Specific example when the power on command was not received normally when the power was turned on)
FIG. 74 is a diagram showing a specific example in the case where the power-on designation command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on. Here, the case where the main RAM 110c is initialized and the power is turned on without performing the setting change process will be described.

When the power-on designation command cannot be normally received, power is supplied to the effect control board 130, but the main control board 110 has a broken power line or the power line connector is not connected ( Power supply (main power supply and backup power supply) is not supplied due to (including half-inserted state), second case in which command communication line from main control board 110 to effect control board 130 is broken, command The third case and the like in which the connector of the communication line is in the non-connection state (including the half-insertion state) can be cited, but the first case will be explained here.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, power is not supplied to the main control board 110, and power supply to the effect control board 130 is started. At this time, as an initial operation of the image display device, an initial screen in which the word “Reading” is displayed is displayed, and after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed, the effect control board 130 responds to the command. It becomes a control state in which the effect can be executed.

At the timing of T2, when the power supply line to the main control board 110 is connected, a process for initializing the control state of the game is performed, and a power-on designation command is transmitted. Then, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 is started, even though the effect control board 130 is in a control state capable of executing an effect corresponding to the command. , And the return operation of the effect button 17 to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off, and the image display device has an effect symbol 70a of "135" which is an initial symbol when the power is turned on, and The first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still display) is displayed. Further, the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound composed of a warning and a voice of "RAM clear".

In addition, when the special symbol storage designation command (first hold number and second hold number=0) as a power-on command is received, the first hold number display area 70E of the image display device and the second hold number. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub universal figure variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (miss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, and the sub-universal figure hold indicator 86 are in a display mode showing "0".

At the timing of T3, when the returning operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the returning operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the 1st movable member LED, the 2nd movable member LED, and the production button LED maintain the state where it went out.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 ends, the origin return process ends, the initial operation process starts, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 starts. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are alternately lighted in blue and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LEDs are lighted in the order of red→green→blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends, the initial light emission of the effect button LED ends and the customer wait lights (white light), and at the timing of T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 ends, the initial operation process ends, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED complete the initial light emission and light up while waiting for a customer (white lighting). ). After that, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped to be in a silent state.

Although the production control board 130 displayed the first standby screen when it received the power-on designation command, instead of displaying the first standby screen immediately, a dark color display screen as a kind of initial screen is displayed. The first standby screen may be displayed after the display for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds). In this case, the initialization notification sound may be output from the start of displaying the dark color display screen, or may be output from the start of displaying the first standby screen.

(Specific example when the power restoration specification command cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 75 is a diagram showing a specific example in the case where the power restoration specification command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on.

When the power restoration specification command cannot be normally received, power is supplied to the performance control board 130, but the main control board 110 has a broken power line or the power line connector is not connected ( Power supply (only main power supply) is not supplied due to (including half-inserted state), second case where command communication line from main control board 110 to effect control board 130 is broken, command communication line The third case and the like in which the connector is in the non-connection state (including the half-insertion state) can be mentioned. Here, the first case will be described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, power is not supplied to the main control board 110, and power supply to the effect control board 130 is started. At this time, as the initial operation of the image display device, an initial screen on which the word “Reading” is displayed is displayed, and after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed, the effect control board 130 responds to the command. It becomes a control state in which it is possible to execute the effect.

At the timing of T2, when the power supply line to the main control board 110 is connected, a process for restoring the game control state is performed, and a power supply restoration designation command for waiting for a customer is transmitted. Then, when the effect control board 130 receives the power supply restoration designation command, the origin return processing is started and the operation of returning the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off, and the image display device has an effect symbol 70a of "753" which is an initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and The second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still display) is displayed. Further, the voice output device 9 is in a silent state.

In addition, when the special symbol storage designation command (first hold number and second hold number=0) as a power-on command is received, the first hold number display area 70E of the image display device and the second hold number. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub universal figure variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (miss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, and the sub-universal figure hold indicator 86 are in a display mode showing "0".

At the timing of T3, when the returning operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the returning operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the 1st movable member LED, the 2nd movable member LED, and the production button LED maintain the state where it went out.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 ends, the origin return process ends, the initial operation process starts, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 starts. At this time, the first movable member LED alternately lights blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights blue as initial light emission, and the effect button LED lights blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends, the initial light emission of the effect button LED ends and the customer wait lights (white light), and at the timing of T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 ends, the initial operation process ends, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED complete the initial light emission and light up while waiting for a customer (white lighting). ).

In addition, the production control board 130 was displaying the second standby screen when it received the power restoration command, but instead of displaying the second standby screen immediately, a dark color display screen as a kind of initial screen is displayed. The second standby screen may be displayed after the display for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds). In this case, the initialization notification sound may be output from the start of the display of the dark color display screen, or may be output from the start of the display of the second standby screen.

Further, although the voice output device 9 is set to be in the silent state when the power restoration command is received, an alarm sound (alarm etc.) indicating that the power is turned on (which can be grasped) is output. You may do it. In this case, the warning may be the same as when the power-on designation command is received, or a different warning.

(Specific example when the command cannot be received normally when the power is turned on when the power is turned on)
FIG. 76 is a diagram showing a specific example when the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be received normally when the power is turned on.

When the power-on command is not normally received, the effect control board 130 is supplied with power, but the main control board 110 is not supplied with power. The second case in which the command communication line to the board 130 is disconnected, the third case in which the connector of the command communication line is in the unconnected state (including the half-inserted state), and the like can be given. Case 3 will be described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, power supply to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130 is started. At this time, as an initial operation of the image display device, an initial screen is displayed in which the characters "Reading" are displayed.

At the timing of T2, the special symbol memory designation command (first reserved number, and, without receiving the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) transmitted from the main control board 110, the production control board 130 , 2nd hold number=0), the image display device maintains the state in which the initial screen is displayed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain off.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub universal figure variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (miss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub first hold indicator 83 and the sub second hold indicator 84 are in a display mode showing "0".

At the timing of T3, when the first special symbol memory designation command (first holding number=1) based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 45 is received, the state in which the initial screen is displayed on the image display device is displayed. Although kept, the sub first hold indicator 83 is in a display mode showing "1", and the winning sound "Pong♪" is output from the voice output device 9.

At the timing of T4, when the variation start command (effect design designation command, variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the image display device produces an effect design 70a of "753" which is the initial design at the time of power restoration, and , The special design TZ is stopped and displayed (still display), the second standby screen is momentarily displayed, and then the variable effect (effect design 70a, and the variable display of the special design TZ, the movement of the hold icon, or to the icon) Change, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, variation display is started on the sub first variation indicator 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during variation, and the sub first hold indicator 83 is displayed. , "0" is displayed.

(Specific example 1 in the case where only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 77 shows only the power supply to the main control board 110 in the customer waiting state (while the power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the performance control board 130) after the origin return processing and the initial operation processing have already been completed. It is a figure which shows the specific example 1 in the case of restarting after stopping.

A case where only the power supply to the main control board is restarted after being stopped is a case where the power supply lines from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 (main power supply line, backup power supply line) are disconnected and then contacted by an external factor. In some cases, after the connector of the power supply line (main power supply line, backup power supply line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 is in the non-connection state (including the half insertion state), the connector is in the connection state. Can be mentioned.

Here, while the production control board 130 is in one of the control states in which the production according to the command can be executed, that is, in the customer waiting state (including the execution of the customer waiting demonstration production), the main control board 110 is operated. A case where the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) is restarted after the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) is stopped will be described.

At the timing of T1, it is in the customer waiting state after the return operation of the various types of accessories, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound have already been completed, and the image display device displays the initial pattern when the power is restored. A certain "753" effect symbol 70a, and the second standby screen in a state where the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed), or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member are displayed. The member LED and the effect button LED are lit while waiting for the customer.

In addition, when the timing of T1 is the customer waiting state after the end of the return operation of the various types of accessories, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound, the variation effect executed is displayed on the image display device. Means that the lost effect design 70a and the special design TZ are displayed in a standby screen (stopped display) or a customer waiting demonstration effect screen.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub universal figure variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (miss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, and the sub-universal figure hold indicator 86 are in a display mode showing "0".

At the timing of T2, if only the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, the image display device maintains the state where the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed. , Sub information display device 80 (sub first variation indicator 81, sub second variation indicator 82, sub first reserve indicator 83, sub second reserve indicator 84, sub universal map variation indicator 85, sub universal map The hold display 86) also maintains the display content.

Even if only the power supply to the main control board 110 (main power supply, backup power supply) is stopped, the customer waiting state designation command is issued while the standby screen is displayed (whether or not after the fluctuating effect is finished). When the demo waiting time has elapsed after the reception, or after the end of the previous customer waiting demonstration effect), the customer waiting demonstration effect is started.

When the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted at the timing of T3, the main RAM 110c is initialized and the game control state is initialized. At this time, in the image display device, the state in which the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed is maintained, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variation display 81, sub second variation display 82, sub The first hold indicator 83, the sub second hold indicator 84, the sub general map variation display 85, the sub general figure hold indicator 86) also maintain the display contents.

When the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 at the timing of T4, the origin return process is started to return the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 to the origin position. The operation is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned off, and the image display device is powered by the power source instead of the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen. The effect symbol 70a of "135" which is the initial symbol at the time of throwing in, and the first standby screen in the state where the special symbol TZ is stopped (still) is displayed, and from the voice output device 9, an alarm and "RAM" are displayed. It is clear that the initialization notification sound consisting of the voice is output.

In addition, when the special symbol storage designation command (first hold number and second hold number=0) as a power-on command is received, the first hold number display area 70E of the image display device and the second hold number. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub universal figure variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (miss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub first hold indicator 83 and the sub second hold indicator 84 are in a display mode showing "0".

When the returning operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed at the timing of T5, the returning operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the 1st movable member LED, the 2nd movable member LED, and the production button LED maintain the state where it went out.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 ends, the origin return process ends, the initial operation process starts, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 starts. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are alternately lighted in blue and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LEDs are lighted in the order of red→green→blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends, the initial light emission of the effect button LED ends and the customer waiting light turns on (white lighting), and at the timing of T8, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 ends, the initial operation processing ends, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED complete the initial light emission and light up while waiting for a customer (white lighting). ), and at the timing of T10, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and the silent state is set.

It should be noted that the return operation, the initial operation, and the change effect (loss change effect) after the completion of the output of the initialization notification sound of the various types of accessories are already in progress and the jackpot effect (the opening effect, the round effect, and the ending effect). The timing of T4 also in the case where only the power supply (including the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped during the control state in which the effect control board can execute the effect according to the command such as being executed. The screen displayed on the image display device by the time the power-on command is received is a fluctuation effect screen (miss change effect screen, jackpot fluctuation effect screen) or jackpot effect screen (opening effect screen, round game effect screen, ending effect screen) ) Is the same as the case of restarting after the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped during the waiting state for the customer, and various accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button) The restoration operation and the initial operation in 17) are performed, and the initialization notification sound is output from the voice output device 9.

Further, in the case where there is a return abnormality in each type of accessory, the initial operation of each type of accessory or the light emission in the abnormality notification mode (flashing red) as in the specific example shown in FIG. 66, FIG. 67, or FIG. Will be done.

(Specific example 2 in the case where only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 78 shows only the power supply to the main control board 110 in the customer waiting state (while the power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the performance control board 130) after the origin return processing and the initial operation processing have already been completed. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a specific example 2 in the case where the process is stopped and then restarted.

Here, while the production control board 130 is in one of the control states in which the production according to the command can be executed, that is, in the customer waiting state (including the execution of the customer waiting demonstration production), the main control board 110 is operated. A case will be described in which the main power supply is resumed while the main power supply is stopped and the backup power supply is being continued.

At the timing of T1, it is in the customer waiting state after the return operation of the various types of accessories, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound have already been completed, and the image display device displays the initial pattern when the power is restored. A certain "753" effect symbol 70a, and the second standby screen in a state where the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed), or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member are displayed. The member LED and the effect button LED are lit while waiting for a customer.

In the case of the customer waiting state after the end of the return operation of the various types of accessories, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound, the change effect executed after the output of the initialization notification sound, the image display device is lost. The production design 70a to be shown and the special design TZ are the standby screen in the state of being stopped (still displayed), or the customer waiting demonstration production screen is displayed.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub universal figure variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (miss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, and the sub-universal figure hold indicator 86 are in a display mode showing "0".

When only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped at the timing of T2, the image display device maintains the state in which the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display is performed. Device 80 (sub first variation indicator 81, sub second variation indicator 82, sub first reserve indicator 83, sub second reserve indicator 84, sub universal figure variation indicator 85, sub universal figure reserve indicator 86 ) Also maintains the displayed contents.

Even when the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, the standby screen is being displayed (after receiving the customer waiting state designation command regardless of whether or not the variation effect is finished, or When the demo waiting time has elapsed after the last customer waiting demonstration production), the customer waiting demonstration production is started.

When the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted at the timing of T3, the processing for recovering the control state of the game is performed without initializing the main RAM 110c. At this time, in the image display device, the state in which the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed is maintained, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variation display 81, sub second variation display 82, sub The first hold indicator 83, the sub second hold indicator 84, the sub general map variation display 85, the sub general figure hold indicator 86) also maintain the display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the production control board 130 receives the power supply restoration designation command for waiting for a customer, which is transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are started. The return operation to the home position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned off, and the image display device replaces the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen with the power restoration. The effect design 70a of "753" which is the initial design of, and the second standby screen in the state where the special design TZ is stopped (still displayed) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 becomes silent.

In addition, when the special symbol storage designation command (first hold number and second hold number=0) as a power-on command is received, the first hold number display area 70E of the image display device and the second hold number. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub universal figure variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (miss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub first hold indicator 83 and the sub second hold indicator 84 are in a display mode showing "0".

When the returning operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed at the timing of T5, the returning operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the 1st movable member LED, the 2nd movable member LED, and the production button LED maintain the state where it went out.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 ends, the origin return process ends, the initial operation process starts, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 starts. At this time, the first movable member LED alternately lights blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights blue as initial light emission, and the effect button LED lights blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends, the initial light emission of the effect button LED ends and the customer waiting light turns on (white lighting), and at the timing of T8, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 ends, the initial operation processing ends, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED complete the initial light emission and light up while waiting for a customer (white lighting). ).

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in each type of accessory, light emission (flashing red) in the initial operation or abnormality notification mode of each type of accessory is performed as in the specific example shown in FIG. 70, FIG. 71, or FIG. Will be done.

(Specific example 3 when only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 79 shows the power supply to the main control board 110 during the execution of the variation effect after the origin return processing and the initial operation processing have already been completed (while the power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130). It is a figure which shows the specific example 3 in the case of restarting only after supply is stopped.

Here, during the execution of the variable effect, which is one of the control states in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and the backup power source is stopped. The case where the supply of the main power supply is restarted in the state where the supply of the power is continued will be described.

At the timing of T1, the variation effect is being executed, the variation effect screen is displayed on the image display device, and the variation output sound (BGM, SE, etc.) is output from the audio output device 9. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are lit during change. Further, the sub-first fluctuation display 81 is displaying the fluctuation, and the sub-first reservation display 83 displays the reserved number "1".

When only the power supply (excluding the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped at the timing of T2, the image display device maintains the state in which the variation effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (the sub first variation) is displayed. The display 81, the sub second change indicator 82, the sub first hold indicator 83, the sub second hold indicator 84, the sub general figure change indicator 85, the sub general figure hold indicator 86) also maintain the display contents. ..

When the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted at the timing of T3, the processing for recovering the control state of the game is performed without initializing the main RAM 110c. At this time, in the image display device, the state in which the variation effect screen is displayed is maintained, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variation indicator 81, sub second variation indicator 82, sub first pending indicator 83, The second sub-holding indicator 84, the sub-universal figure variation display 85, the sub-universal figure holding indicator 86) also maintain the display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the effect control board 130 receives the power supply restoration designation command for changing the special figure transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started. The return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned off, and the image display device displays a returning screen including the characters "Please restart the game". The audio output device 9 becomes silent, but the sub information display device 80 (the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, the sub first hold display 83, the sub second hold display 84, The sub-universal figure variation display 85 and the sub-universal figure reservation display 86) maintain the display contents.

When the returning operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed at the timing of T5, the returning operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the 1st movable member LED, the 2nd movable member LED, and the production button LED maintain the state where it went out.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 ends, the origin return process ends, the initial operation process starts, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 starts. At this time, the first movable member LED alternately lights blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights blue as initial light emission, and the effect button LED lights blue as initial light emission.

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T7, the initial light emission of the effect button LED ends and the LED turns off. At the timing of T8, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends, the second movable member 73 moves. The initial operation of the member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 ends, the initial operation processing ends, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED complete the initial light emission and are in a state of being turned off.

At the timing of T10, when the effect control board 130 receives the special symbol determination command transmitted from the main control board 110, the confirmation display with the variation effect loss is performed. At this time, in the image display device, the effect design 70a of "753", which is the initial design when the power is restored, and the stop screen (the same as the second standby screen) in which the special design TZ is stopped and displayed (still display). Is displayed, and the stop sound “Don♪” is output from the audio output device 9. Further, "1" is displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second reservation number display area 70F. In addition, the sub-first variation display 81 has a lost display mode (non-display mode) that indicates a loss.

In addition, when the result of this variation effect is a big hit, when the effect control board 130 receives the special symbol determination command, the confirmation display in the big effect of the variation effect is performed. At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a such as the jackpot effect symbol "777", and the confirmation screen in a state where the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed), and the sub first variable display 81. Then, it is a jackpot display mode indicating that it is a jackpot.

At the timing of T11, when the fluctuation start command (effect symbol designating command, fluctuation pattern designating command) transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the reserved figure displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E is “0”. Then, the variation effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the holding icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, variation display is started on the sub first variation indicator 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during variation, and the sub first hold indicator 83 is displayed. , "0" is displayed.

At the timing of T6, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are in the initial light emission mode when the power is restored, but special light emission different from the initial light emission mode when the light is turned off or the power is restored. By adopting the mode, it may be possible to grasp that the power restoration specification command is received during the variation effect.

Also, when there is a return abnormality in each type of accessory, the initial operation of each type of accessory or the light emission in the abnormality notification mode (flashing red) as in the specific example shown in FIG. 70, FIG. 71, or FIG. Will be done.

Further, even if the execution time of the variable effect recognized by the effect control board 130 has elapsed before the special symbol confirmation command is received, the temporary stop display and the stop display of the effect symbol 70a are not performed, The variation display on the sub first variation display or the sub second variation display is not ended.

(Specific example 4 in the case where only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 80 shows a power supply to the main control board 110 during the execution of the jackpot performance after completion of the origin return processing and the initial operation processing (during power supply to the main control board 110 and the performance control board 130). It is a figure which shows the specific example 4 in the case of restarting only after supply is stopped.

Here, during the execution of the big hit, which is one of the control states in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and the backup power source is stopped. The case where the supply of the main power supply is restarted in the state where the supply of the power is continued will be described.

At the timing of T1, the jackpot effect (here, the first round effect) is being executed, the jackpot effect (round effect) screen is displayed on the image display device, and a right hit is made on the upper right of the screen. The suggested right-handed display image MG is displayed, and the jackpot special symbol TZ (“777”) is stopped and displayed (still display) at the lower right of the screen. Further, "1" is displayed as the reserved number in the first reserved number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed as the reserved number in the second reserved number display area 70F.

At this time, the jackpot effect sound (BGM, SE, etc.) is output from the audio output device 9, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are lit during the jackpot. In addition, the sub-first variation display 81 displays a big hit (lights up).

At the timing of T2, if only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the jackpot performance screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variation) is displayed. The display 81, the sub second change indicator 82, the sub first hold indicator 83, the sub second hold indicator 84, the sub general figure change indicator 85, the sub general figure hold indicator 86) also maintain the display contents. ..

When the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted at the timing of T3, the processing for recovering the control state of the game is performed without initializing the main RAM 110c. At this time, in the image display device, the state in which the jackpot effect screen is displayed is maintained, and the sub information display device 80 (the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, the sub first pending display 83, The second sub-holding indicator 84, the sub-universal figure variation display 85, the sub-universal figure holding indicator 86) also maintain the display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-up recovery designation command for mid-big hit transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the origin of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. The return operation to the position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are in a state of being turned off, and the image display device is a jackpot including the characters "Please restart the game (middle jackpot)". Although the returning screen for medium use is displayed and the audio output device 9 is silent, the sub information display device 80 (the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, the sub first pending display 83, The second sub-holding indicator 84, sub-universal figure variation indicator 85, sub-universal figure pending indicator 86) maintain the display contents.

It should be noted that instead of displaying the returning screen for jackpot, the same returning screen as when the power supply to the main control board 110 (only the main power supply) is stopped during the variation effect shown in FIG. 79 is displayed. You may do it.

When the returning operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed at the timing of T5, the returning operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the 1st movable member LED, the 2nd movable member LED, and the production button LED maintain the state where it went out.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 ends, the origin return process ends, the initial operation process starts, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 starts. At this time, the first movable member LED alternately lights blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights blue as initial light emission, and the effect button LED lights blue as initial light emission.

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T7, the initial light emission of the effect button LED ends and the LED turns off. At the timing of T8, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends, the second movable member 73 moves. The initial operation of the member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 ends, the initial operation processing ends, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED complete the initial light emission and are in a state of being turned off.

At the timing of T10, when the effect control board 130 receives the second round opening (second round) round designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the jackpot effect (round effect) is restarted. At this time, in the image display device, a special big hit effect (round effect) screen is displayed instead of the normal big hit effect screen, and the big hit special symbol TZ (“777”) is not displayed.

Further, "1" is displayed as the reserved number in the first reserved number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed as the reserved number in the second reserved number display area 70F. Furthermore, the jackpot effect sound (BGM, SE, etc.) is output from the audio output device 9, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during the jackpot.

After that, when the effect control board 130 receives a round designation command for the third opening (third round) transmitted from the main control board 110, the image display device replaces the special jackpot effect (round effect) screen. , Ordinary jackpot effect (round effect) screen is displayed.

In addition, when the production control board 130 receives the ending designation command, not when the round control command is received by the production control board 130 when the special jackpot production screen is displayed, the normal ending production screen is displayed. Will be displayed.

Moreover, instead of switching to the normal jackpot effect screen when the round designation command is received while the special jackpot effect screen is displayed, the special jackpot effect screen is displayed until the ending control command is received by the effect control board 130. May be continued, or a special jackpot production screen may be continued until the production control board 130 receives a customer waiting state designation command or a variation start command after the jackpot game is over.

Further, at the timing of T6, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are in the initial light emission mode when the power is restored, but the special light emission mode different from the initial light emission mode when the light is turned off or the power is restored. Thus, it may be possible to grasp that the power restoration specification command has been received during the variation effect.

Also, when there is a return abnormality in each type of accessory, the initial operation of each type of accessory or the light emission in the abnormality notification mode (flashing red) as in the specific example shown in FIG. 70, FIG. 71, or FIG. Will be done.

77 to 80, when the power-on designation command or the power restoration designation command is received, various types of accessory (the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74, the effect button 17) are restored. However, the initial operation of various accessory may be performed without performing the return operation.

Thus, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, when the game control state is initialized, the identification characters (numbers, alphabets, etc.) in the plurality of effect symbols 70a are the first combination. The first initial effect symbol (“135”) is displayed, and when the control state of the game is restored, the second initial effect symbol (““ in which the identification characters in the plurality of effect symbols 70a are the second combination) is displayed. 753") is displayed. By doing so, it becomes possible to easily understand whether the game control state has been initialized or the game control state has been restored.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, when the control state of the game is restored, a specific display suggesting resumption of power supply is performed before displaying the effect symbol 70a on the image display device. It is possible, and the display mode of the specific display (only the initial screen is displayed) to be displayed on the image display device when the customer wait state is restored, and during the variable display of the special symbol and without holding memory/with holding memory The display mode (display of initial screen+returning screen) of the specific display to be displayed on the image display device later is made different. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from decreasing when the stopped power supply is resumed and the control state of the game is restored.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, the hold icon display area (first hold icon display area 70B, second hold icon display area 70D), and the sub hold indicator (sub first hold display). It is possible to perform a hold display indicating the number of hold storages on each of the device 83 and the sub second hold display 84), and the power supply stopped when there is a hold storage is restarted to restore the game control state. In this case, the hold display is not executed in the hold icon display area when the specific display (display of the returning screen) that indicates the resumption of power supply is being performed on the image display device, but the hold display is executed in the sub-hold display. It is possible. By doing this, when the stopped power supply is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, it is possible to ascertain the number of holding memories before the end of the specific display, which reduces the interest of the game. It becomes possible to suppress.

According to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, when the power supply stopped during the customer waiting demonstration production is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the customer waiting demonstration production screen is displayed again. Instead, the second standby screen in a state where the effect symbol 70a of "753" which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration is stopped and displayed (still display) is displayed. By doing this, it is not necessary to consider whether or not the state before the power supply is stopped is in the customer waiting demonstration production, and in the display control when the game control state is restored after the power supply is restarted. It is possible to reduce the processing load.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, as for the sub-variation display device (the sub-first variation display device 81, the sub-second variation display device 82), the power supply which is stopped during the variation production is restarted. Then, when the control state of the game is restored, even if the variable display of the special symbol is being executed (the returning screen is displayed), the variable display during the variable display of the special symbol ( (Blinking display) is not performed. By doing so, it becomes possible to reduce the processing load when the control state of the game is restored after the power supply is resumed.

In addition, when the variation display of the special symbol is executed when the control state of the game is restored (the returning screen is displayed), the sub variation display (sub first variation display 81, sub second variation display) The variable display (blinking display) may be performed in step 82). By doing this, it becomes possible to easily understand that the variable display of the special symbol is being executed when the control state of the game is restored.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, for the sub-holding indicators (the sub-first holding indicator 83, the sub-second holding indicator 84), a returning screen is displayed on the image display device. From that time (before the variable display is performed on the sub variable display and at the time of receiving the special symbol storage designation command), the display mode showing the number of holdings is set. By doing so, it is possible to make the player grasp the number of holdings immediately after the control state of the game is restored, and it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from decreasing.

In addition, when the sub-variation display device (sub first variation display device 81, sub second variation display device 82) performs the variation display (blinking display) when the returning screen is displayed on the image display device, The sub-holding indicator (sub-first holding indicator 83, sub-second holding indicator 84) may be configured to display the number of holdings at the start of this variable display. In this way, when the control state of the game is restored, the variable display of the special symbol is being executed, and it is possible to easily grasp the number of holdings at that time.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, when the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c, the power is restored to the customer waiting state without the initialization of the main RAM 110c. At the same timing as the case, that is, the timing at which the effect design 70a is displayed on the image display device (timing at which the initial screen ends), various character return operations are performed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the control of the returning operation of various accessory from becoming complicated, and it is possible to reduce the processing load involved in the returning operation of various accessory.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, in the case of power-on with initialization of the main RAM 110c or power restoration without initialization of the main RAM 110c, various types of accessory (the first movable member 73, During the returning operation of the second movable member 74 and the effect button 17), the light emitting portions (first movable member LED, second movable member LED, effect button LED) of various types of characters are turned off. ing. By doing so, it is possible to distinguish from the initial movement of various types of accessory, and it is possible to grasp that the returning movement is being performed.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, when there is a return abnormality in any of the various types of accessories, the light emitting unit of the role object having the return abnormality blinks red (abnormality notification mode). By doing so, the abnormality is notified. By doing so, it is possible to grasp the accessory having the abnormal return.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, when the abnormality notification is performed by blinking the light emitting unit of the accessory that has the restoration abnormality in red, until the next variation production is started. Abnormality notification continues. By doing so, it becomes possible to reliably notify the accessory that has the abnormal return.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in the accessory, a return operation may be performed to return the accessory having the return abnormality to the origin position at the timing when the next variation effect is started. Further, in the case where the abnormality notification is performed by blinking the light emitting portion of the accessory having the recovery abnormality in red, the abnormality notification may be canceled when the effect button 17 is operated.

According to the specific example shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, when the power supply stopped during the customer waiting state is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the effect design 70a is displayed on the image display device. After the timing (when the return operation is immediately completed, the effect pattern 70a is displayed), the initial operation of various types of accessories (the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74, the effect button 17) However, when the power supply stopped during the variable display of the special symbol is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the timing before the effect symbol 70a is displayed on the image display device (display of the returning screen) From inside) to perform the initial actions of various types of accessories. By doing so, it becomes possible to perform the initial operation of various accessory parts at an appropriate timing according to the state when the power supply is generated.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, regarding the board accessory (the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74), power-on accompanying initialization of the main RAM 110c and initialization of the main RAM 110c are performed. In the case of power recovery without accompanying, when the returning screen is displayed on the image display device (during special symbol variation display and before display of effect design 70a), sub-holding indicator (sub-first holding indicator 83) , The sub second hold indicator 84) is adapted to perform the initial operation after the display mode showing the number of holds is displayed. By doing so, it is possible to perform the initial operation of the board accessory after making the player grasp the number of holdings (progress of the game in the future), and it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from decreasing. Become.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, regarding the frame accessory (effect button 17), when the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c or the power is restored without the initialization of the main RAM 110c. , When the returning screen is displayed on the image display device (during the variable display of the special symbol and before the display of the effect symbol 70a), the sub-holding indicator (sub-first holding indicator 83, sub-second holding indicator 84) The initial operation is performed after the display of () indicates the number of holdings. By doing so, it is possible to carry out the initial operation of the frame character object after making the player grasp the number of holdings (progress of the game in the future), and it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from decreasing. Become.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, when the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c, the power is restored to the customer waiting state without the initialization of the main RAM 110c. The same timing as the case of being broken, that is, the timing after the effect design 70a is displayed on the image display device (the timing at which the effect design 70a is displayed when the return operation is immediately completed) from the beginning of various types of characters It is designed to work. By doing so, it is not necessary to complicate the control related to the initial operation of the various accessory, and it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the initial operation of the various accessory.

Moreover, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, even when the stop screen is displayed after the display of the returning screen, the stop sound of the effect design 70a is output. By doing so, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand that the variation effect that was being executed when the power supply was stopped, and it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing. Become.

When the stop screen is displayed after the returning screen is displayed, the stop sound of the effect design 70a may not be output.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, when the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be received, only the initial screen is displayed to restore the various actors. The operation, the initial operation, and the initial light emission are not executed. By doing so, it becomes possible to understand that an abnormality has occurred in which a command cannot be received when the power is turned on.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, even when the initial screen is displayed because the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be received, When the control board 130 receives a special symbol memory designation command based on the winning of the game ball from the main control board 110 to the starting opening when the control board 130 is in a control state capable of executing the effect according to the command, the winning sound is output. It is supposed to do. By doing so, it becomes possible to accurately inform that the game ball has won the start opening even when the initial screen is displayed.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, even when the initial screen is displayed because the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be received, When the control board 130 receives the fluctuation start command from the main control board 110 while the control board 130 is in a control state capable of executing the effect in accordance with the command, the fluctuation effect is executed without displaying the standby screen. There is. By doing so, the start of the variation effect will be executed without delay, and it is possible to execute the variation effect from the beginning to the end within the variation time range of the special symbol.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, even when the initial screen is displayed because the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be received, When the control board 130 is in a control state in which it is possible to execute an effect in accordance with the command, when a variation start command is received from the main control board 110, the variation effect is executed without executing the returning operation or the initial operation of the various accessory. Is designed to run. By doing so, it is possible to execute the effect using various accessory substances without being hindered by the returning operation or the initial operation during the execution of the variable effect.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, the effect control board 130 sends a command such as the return operation of various types of accessories and the customer waiting state after completion of the initial operation (including initial light emission). Even during the control state in which the corresponding effect can be executed, only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and the main control board 110 issues a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation. When the command is received again, the returning operation of various accessory and the initial operation (including the initial light emission) are executed again. By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without being ignored, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 are deviated, the deviation is caused. It is possible to solve the problem, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform the cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, the effect control board 130 responds to the command such as the returning operation of various types of accessory and the fluctuating effect after the initial operation (including initial light emission) is completed. Even in the control state in which the performance can be executed, the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and the power-on designation command or the power restoration designation command is issued from the main control board 110. When is received again, the returning operation of various accessory and the initial operation (including initial light emission) are executed again. By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without being ignored, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 are deviated, the deviation is caused. It is possible to solve the problem, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform the cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, the main control board 110 is also in the jackpot game after the return operation of various types of accessories and the initial operation (including initial light emission) have already been completed. When the power-on designation command or the power restoration designation command is received again from the main control board 110 by restarting after only stopping the power supply to the main control board 110, the restoration operation of various actors and the initial operation ( (Including initial light emission). By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without being ignored, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 are deviated, the deviation is caused. It is possible to solve the problem, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform the cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command such as in the customer waiting state after the output of the initialization notification sound has already been completed. Even in the control state, when the power-on designation command is received from the main control board 110 by restarting after only stopping the power supply to the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output again. It is supposed to do. By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without being ignored, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 are deviated, the deviation is caused. It is possible to solve the problem, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform the cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, the control in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, such as during the variable effect after the output of the initialization notification sound is already finished. Even in the state, when the power-on designation command is received from the main control board 110 by restarting after only stopping the power supply to the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output again. It is like this. By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without being ignored, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 are deviated, the deviation is caused. It is possible to solve the problem, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform the cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, the production control board 130 responds to the command such as during the jackpot game (opening production, round production, ending production) after the output of the initialization notification sound has already been completed. When the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110 by restarting after only stopping the power supply to the main control board 110, even during the control state in which the effect can be executed. , The initialization notification sound is output again. By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without being ignored, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 are deviated, the deviation is caused. It is possible to solve the problem, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform the cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

In addition, when the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the initialization output sound is output from the audio output device 9 instead of executing the return operation and the initial operation (including the initial light emission) of the various accessory. May be output only.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, the effect control board 130 sends a command such as the return operation of various types of accessories and the customer waiting state after completion of the initial operation (including initial light emission). Even during the control state in which the corresponding effect can be executed, the power-on instruction command is received again from the main control board 110 by restarting after only stopping the power supply to the main control board 110. In this case, the first standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen, and when the power restoration specification command is received again from the main control board 110, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. It is like this. By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without being ignored, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 are deviated, the deviation is caused. It is possible to solve the problem, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform the cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

Even if the effect control board 130 is in a control state in which it is possible to execute an effect according to a command, such as during a variation effect after the output of the initialization notification sound has ended or during a big hit game, the main control board When the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110 by restarting after only stopping the power supply to the 110, the initial standby screen is displayed and the first standby screen is displayed. ing. By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without being ignored, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 are deviated, the deviation is caused. It is possible to solve the problem, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform the cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, the effect control board 130 responds to the command such as the returning operation of various types of accessory and the fluctuating effect after the initial operation (including initial light emission) is completed. Even in the control state in which the effect can be executed, the main control board 110 issues a power recovery designation command by restarting after only the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped. When receiving, the returning screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without being ignored, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 are deviated, the deviation is caused. It is possible to solve the problem, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform the cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, the effect control board 130 responds to the command such as the returning operation of various accessory and the jackpot effect after the initial operation (including the initial light emission) is completed. Even in the control state in which the effect can be executed, the main control board 110 issues a power recovery designation command by restarting after only the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped. When received, the returning screen for mid-big hit is displayed without displaying the initial screen. By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without being ignored, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 are deviated, the deviation is caused. It is possible to solve the problem, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform the cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, the effect control board 130 performs the effect according to the command, such as during the variable effect after the output of the initialization notification sound is already finished or during the big hit game. Even in the control state in which the power supply to the main control board 110 is possible, if the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110 by restarting after only stopping the power supply to the main control board 110, the initial screen is displayed. The first standby screen is displayed without being displayed, and when the power restoration specification command is received again from the main control board 110, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without being ignored, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 are deviated, the deviation is caused. It is possible to solve the problem, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform the cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, the effect control is performed during the control state (customer waiting state, variable effect, jackpot effect) in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command. Even when the power supply to the main control board 130 is stopped while the power supply to the board 130 is continued, the display screen up to that point can be continuously displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the power supply to the main control means is stopped, and to prevent the interest of the game from decreasing.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, the effect control is performed during the control state (customer waiting state, variable effect, jackpot effect) in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command. Even when the power supply to the main control board 130 is stopped and then the power supply is restarted while the power supply to the board 130 is continued, the display screens up to that point can be continuously displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the power supply to the main control means is restarted, and to prevent the interest of the game from decreasing.

(Modification 1 when only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 81 shows only the power supply to the main control board 110 in the customer waiting state (while the power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the performance control board 130) after the origin return processing and the initial operation processing have already been completed. It is a figure which shows the modification 1 in the case of restarting after stopping.

Here, only the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is in the customer waiting state, which is one of the control states in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command. A case where power supply to the main control board 110 (main power supply, backup power supply) is restarted after the stop will be described.

At the timing of T1, it is in the customer waiting state after the return operation of the various types of accessories, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound have already been completed, and the image display device displays the initial pattern when the power is restored. A certain standby symbol 70a of "753" and the second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed) are displayed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED. Is lit while waiting for customers.

In addition, when the timing of T1 is the customer waiting state after the end of the return operation of the various types of accessories, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound, the variation effect executed is displayed on the image display device. Means that the standby screen in the state where the lost effect design 70a and the special design TZ are stopped (still displayed) is displayed.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub universal figure variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (miss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, and the sub-universal figure hold indicator 86 are in a display mode showing "0".

When only the power supply (including the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped at the timing of T2, the image display device maintains the state where the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, Information display device 80 (sub first variation indicator 81, sub second variation indicator 82, sub first reserve indicator 83, sub second reserve indicator 84, sub general map variation indicator 85, sub general map reserve display The device 86) also maintains the display content.

Even when only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, the standby screen is being displayed (whether or not the customer waiting state designation command is received, regardless of whether or not the variation effect is finished, or the previous time. When the demo waiting time elapses after the end of the customer waiting demonstration production), the customer waiting demonstration production is started.

When the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted at the timing of T3, the main RAM 110c is initialized. At this time, instead of the second standby screen, the image display device displays an initial screen including the characters "Reading", and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned off. To do.

At this time, the sub information display device 80 (the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, the sub first pending display 83, the sub second pending display 84, the sub public view variation display 85, the sub The universal figure hold display 86) is hidden.

When the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 at the timing of T4, the origin return process is started to return the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 to the origin position. The operation is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off, and instead of the initial screen, the image display device displays “135” which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on. The first standby screen in which the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (still display) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 issues an initialization notification consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM clear". Sound is output.

In addition, when the special symbol storage designation command (first hold number and second hold number=0) as a power-on command is received, the first hold number display area 70E of the image display device and the second hold number. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub universal figure variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (miss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub first hold indicator 83 and the sub second hold indicator 84 are in a display mode showing "0".

When the returning operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed at the timing of T5, the returning operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the 1st movable member LED, the 2nd movable member LED, and the production button LED maintain the state where it went out.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 ends, the origin return process ends, the initial operation process starts, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 starts. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are alternately lighted in blue and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LEDs are lighted in the order of red→green→blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends, the initial light emission of the effect button LED ends and the customer waiting light turns on (white lighting), and at the timing of T8, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 ends, the initial operation processing ends, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED complete the initial light emission and light up while waiting for a customer (white lighting). ), and at the timing of T10, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and the silent state is set.

It should be noted that, during the customer waiting demonstration production after the return operation of the various types of accessories, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound are finished, and the variation production (the loss variation production, the jackpot variation production) is being executed or the jackpot is produced. Even when only the power supply (including the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted after the production (opening, round game, ending) is being executed, the screen displayed on the image display device at the timing of T3 The example shown in FIG. 77 except that it is a customer waiting demo production screen, a variation production screen (miss variation production screen, jackpot variation production screen) and a jackpot production screen (opening production screen, round game production screen, ending production screen) And basically the same.

(Modification 2 when only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 82 shows only the power supply to the main control board 110 in the customer waiting state (while the power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the performance control board 130) after the origin return processing and the initial operation processing have already been completed. It is a figure which shows the modification 2 in the case of restarting after stopping.

Here, during the customer waiting state, which is one of the control states in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and the backup power supply is turned off. A case where the main power supply is resumed while the supply is continued will be described.

At the timing of T1, in the case of the customer waiting state after the return operation of the various types of accessories, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound have already been completed, the image display device is an initial pattern when the power is restored. The production pattern 70a of "753" and the second standby screen in the state where the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still display) or the customer waiting demonstration production screen is displayed, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member are displayed. The LED and the effect button LED are lit while waiting for the customer.

In the case of the customer waiting state after the end of the return operation of the various types of accessories, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound, the change effect executed after the output of the initialization notification sound, the image display device is lost. The production design 70a to be shown and the special design TZ are the standby screen in the state of being stopped (still displayed), or the customer waiting demonstration production screen is displayed.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub universal figure variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (miss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, and the sub-universal figure hold indicator 86 are in a display mode showing "0".

When only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped at the timing of T2, the image display device maintains the state in which the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display is performed. Device 80 (sub first variation indicator 81, sub second variation indicator 82, sub first reserve indicator 83, sub second reserve indicator 84, sub universal figure variation indicator 85, sub universal figure reserve indicator 86 ) Also maintains the displayed contents.

Even when only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, the standby screen is being displayed (whether or not the customer waiting state designation command is received, regardless of whether or not the variation effect is finished, or the previous time. When the demo waiting time elapses after the end of the customer waiting demonstration production), the customer waiting demonstration production is started.

When the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted at the timing of T3, the processing for recovering the control state of the game is performed without initializing the main RAM 110c. At this time, the image display device displays the initial screen including the characters “reading”, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned off.

At this time, the sub information display device 80 (the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, the sub first pending display 83, the sub second pending display 84, the sub public view variation display 85, the sub The universal figure hold display 86) is hidden.

At the timing of T4, when the production control board 130 receives the power supply restoration designation command for waiting for a customer, which is transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are started. The return operation to the home position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and the image display device replaces the initial screen with the initial symbol "753" when the power is restored. The production design 70a and the second standby screen in a state where the special design TZ is stopped (still displayed) is displayed.

In addition, when the special symbol storage designation command (first hold number and second hold number=0) as a power-on command is received, the first hold number display area 70E of the image display device and the second hold number. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub universal figure variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (miss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub first hold indicator 83 and the sub second hold indicator 84 are in a display mode showing "0".

When the returning operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed at the timing of T5, the returning operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the 1st movable member LED, the 2nd movable member LED, and the production button LED maintain the state where it went out.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 ends, the origin return process ends, the initial operation process starts, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 starts. At this time, the first movable member LED alternately lights blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights blue as initial light emission, and the effect button LED lights blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends, the initial light emission of the effect button LED ends and the customer waiting light turns on (white lighting), and at the timing of T8, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 ends, the initial operation processing ends, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED complete the initial light emission and light up while waiting for a customer (white lighting). ).

It should be noted that, during the customer waiting demonstration production after the return operation of the various types of accessories, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound are finished, and the variation production (the loss variation production, the jackpot variation production) is being executed or the jackpot is produced. Even when the power supply (excluding the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped and restarted during performance (opening, round game, ending), the screen displayed on the image display device at the timing of T3 78 to 80, except that it is a customer waiting demo production screen, a variation production screen (miss variation production screen, jackpot variation production screen) and a jackpot production screen (opening production screen, round game production screen, ending production screen) It is basically the same as the above example.

81 to 82, when various commands (the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74, the effect button 17) are restored, the power-on designation command or the power restoration designation command is received. However, the initial operation of various accessory may be performed without performing the return operation.

As described above, according to the modifications shown in FIGS. 81 to 82, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, the standby screen from which the effect design 70a is displayed is different from the standby screen. It is designed to switch to the initial screen. By doing so, it becomes possible to grasp that the power supply to the main control board 110 has stopped (the main control board 110 has an abnormality).

Further, according to the modified examples shown in FIGS. 81 to 82, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are displayed from the initial screen being displayed. , And the effect button LED is turned off. By doing so, it becomes easy to understand that the power supply to the main control board 110 has stopped (the main control board 110 has an abnormality).

It should be noted that, instead of starting the initial operation of the various characters from the timing of switching from the initial screen to the standby screen, the various characters from the timing of switching to the initial screen or the timing from the switching of the initial screen to the standby screen The initial operation of may be started.

Further, instead of switching from the standby screen to the initial screen when the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted, the standby screen is initialized when the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) is received. You may make it switch to a screen. In this case, the initial operation of various types of accessory may be started from the timing when the standby screen is switched to the initial screen, or the timing during which the initial screen is switched to the standby screen. The initial operation of various types of accessory may be started at the timing of switching.

Further, instead of switching from the standby screen to the initial screen when power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed, the initial screen may be displayed after switching from the standby screen to the non-display state. In this case, the initial operation of various types of accessory may be started at the timing of switching from the non-display state to the initial screen or the timing of switching from the initial screen to the standby screen. The initial operation of various types of accessory may be started at the timing of switching to.

(Modification when the second movable member has a return abnormality after the power is turned on)
FIG. 83 is a diagram showing a modified example in which the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality after the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, an initial screen in which the characters "Reading" are displayed is displayed as the initial operation of the image display device.

When the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 at the timing of T2, the origin return process is started to return the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 to the origin position. The operation is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off, and the image display device has an effect symbol 70a of "135" which is an initial symbol when the power is turned on, and The first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still display) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound composed of an alarm and a voice "RAM clear".

In addition, when the special symbol storage designation command (first hold number and second hold number=0) as a power-on command is received, the first hold number display area 70E of the image display device and the second hold number. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub universal figure variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (miss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub first hold indicator 83 and the sub second hold indicator 84 are in a display mode showing "0".

At the timing of T3, when the returning operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the returning operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the 1st movable member LED, the 2nd movable member LED, and the production button LED maintain the state where it went out.

At the timing of T4, when the return-to-origin process ends with the return abnormality occurring in the second movable member 74, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED blink red to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality. (Abnormality notification mode), the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the effect button LED lights up in the order of red, green, and blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends, the initial light emission of the effect button LED ends and the customer button lights up (white light), and the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 start. The initial operation processing ends without any operation being executed.

At the timing of T6, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and becomes silent, and at the timing of T7, the game ball to the first starting opening 45 When the first special symbol memory designation command (first hold number=1) based on winning is received, the hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E becomes "1", and the first hold icon display area 70B is displayed. While the first hold icon is displayed, the sub first hold indicator 83 is in the display mode showing "1", and the winning sound "pon♪" is output from the voice output device 9.

At the timing of T8, when the fluctuation start command (effect symbol designating command, fluctuation pattern designating command) is received from the main control board 110, the reserved figure displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes to "0" and fluctuates. Production (production design 70a, and variable display of special design TZ, movement of hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED ends, the variation display is started on the sub first variation indicator 81, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED The LED and the effect button LED are lit during the change, and the sub first hold display 83 is in a display mode showing "0".

Even when there is a return abnormality in the first movable member 73 when the power is turned on, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED blink in red to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality (abnormality notification mode). , The first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 do not perform the initial operation, and the initial operation process ends.

Further, even when the power is restored, if the first movable member 73 or the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED notify the occurrence of the return abnormality. Therefore, the red light blinks (abnormality notification mode), and the initial operation process ends without executing the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74.

As described above, according to the modification shown in FIG. 83, when one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, not only the movable member having the return abnormality but also the return abnormality is generated. The initial operation is not executed even for a movable member that does not exist. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that one movable member collides with the other movable member and breaks down. In addition, it is possible to prevent the movable member (particularly, the movable member on which the recovery abnormality has not occurred) from not operating during the execution of the game (variable effect, big hit game), and the interest of the game is reduced. Can be prevented.

Further, according to the modified example shown in FIG. 83, when one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, both the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are displayed. Blinks red to inform the operator of a recovery abnormality. By doing so, it is possible to make it easier to understand that there is an abnormality in the movable member, as compared with the case where only the movable member LED provided on one of the movable members having the restoration abnormality is blinking in red.

Further, according to the modified example shown in FIG. 83, even when one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 73 are movable. The initial operation is executed for the effect button 17 that is unlikely to collide with the member 74. By doing so, the operation of the effect button 17 can be confirmed, and it becomes possible to grasp the abnormality of the effect button 17.

Further, according to the modified example shown in FIG. 83, even when one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, the effect button LED provided in the effect button 17 returns. The initial light emission is performed without the red blinking for notifying the abnormality. Therefore, it is possible to easily understand that the effect button 17 has no return abnormality.

In addition, when the first movable member 73 or the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, the initial operation process may be ended without executing the initial operation for the effect button 17. In this case, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED may blink red in order to notify the occurrence of the restoration abnormality.

Further, when the effect button 17 has a return abnormality, the initial operation process may be ended without executing the initial operation for the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74. In this case, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED may blink red in order to notify the occurrence of the restoration abnormality.

(Example of effect when the icon change effect and lamp change effect are resumed after power supply to the gaming machine is stopped during execution)
84 and 85 are diagrams showing an example of an effect when the icon change effect and the lamp change effect are resumed after the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is stopped during execution.

As shown in FIG. 84(a), when the first hold icon (CD icon) is displayed on the first display portion 70B1 and the second display portion 70B2 of the first hold icon display area 70B, "728 It is assumed that the lost effect design 70a of “” is stopped and displayed.

After that, when the fluctuating effect in which the SPSP reach effect is executed is started, as shown in FIG. 84(b), the fluctuating display of the effect design 70a is started, and the first display portion 70B1 and the second display are performed. The first hold icon (CD icon) displayed in the section 70B2 is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C and the first display section 70B1.

Here, by changing and displaying the display mode of the icon shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C to a red character icon, the icon change effect is started, and accordingly, the winning opening lamp NR is turned off and flashes red. The lamp change effect is started by changing to the state where the lamp is changed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 84(c), while the production symbol 70a of "3" is stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) in the left and right variable display regions of the effect symbol 70a that has been variably displayed, the central variable display region. The reach effect (normal reach) in which the effect pattern 70a is variably displayed is executed.

Then, when the SP reach is developed, as shown in FIG. 84(d), the SP reach effect is started, and the effect pattern 70a is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the screen, and the first hold icon display area 70B and the second hold icon display area 70B are displayed. The hold icon display area 70D is erased together with the hold icons.

Then, when the SPSP reach is developed, as shown in FIG. 84(e), the SPSP reach effect is started, and the icon display area 70C in which the icon is displayed is erased together with the icon. At this time, the winning opening lamp NR is not turned off with the deletion of the icon, and the lamp change effect of the winning opening lamp NR is continued.

When the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is stopped at this timing, as shown in FIG. 84(f), the image display device is hidden and the winning opening lamp NR is turned off.

After that, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is resumed, as shown in FIG. 85(g), the image display device displays the initial screen including the characters "Reading", but the winning opening lamp NR is turned off. Keep the condition.

Then, when the effect control board 130 receives the second power supply restoration designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, as shown in FIG. 85(h), the image display device displays the words "Please restart the game". The returning screen including is displayed over the execution period of the SPSP reach production (including the execution period of the promotion production of whether or not the temporarily stopped jackpot production design is promoted to the jackpot production design of higher value for the player). However, the winning opening lamp NR also remains off.

After that, when the execution period of the SPSP reach effect that is a loss ends (the effect control board 130 receives a special symbol determination command indicating a loss), as shown in FIG. 85(i), a temporary stop display (shaking) of the effect symbol 70a. (Variation) without performing the initial design at the time of power restoration "753" production symbol 70a, and the special symbol TZ is stopped display (still display) stop screen (second standby screen) is displayed, The fluctuating effect is ended without restarting the lamp changing effect.

At this time, the same CD icon as that before the power supply is stopped is displayed on the first display portion 70B1 of the first hold icon display area 70B, and the icon is not displayed on the icon display area 70C, but a rectangular icon is displayed. By displaying the area image, the display space (display area) of the icon is secured in a state in which an effect image such as a background image can be displayed.

Then, when the next variation effect is started, as shown in FIG. 85(j), the variation display of the effect symbol 70a is started and is displayed on the first display section 70B1 and the second display section 70B2. The first holding icon (CD icon) that is being displayed is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C and the first display portion 70B1.

On the other hand, when the execution period of the SPSP reach effect that is a big hit ends (the effect control board 130 receives a special symbol confirmation command indicating a big hit), as shown in FIG. 85(k), a temporary stop display (shaking) of the effect symbol 70a. Without performing the fluctuation/rocking display), the big hit performance design 70a of "777" (reach state before power off was formed, which indicates the type of the big hit game (here, the first big hit game) this time was formed. The combination of the effect design different from the reach combination by the effect design of "↓ 3)", and the stop screen in the state where the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed) is displayed, and the lamp change effect is restarted by the winning opening lamp NR. The fluctuation production ends without doing.

It should be noted that not only the variable effect in which the SPSP reach effect is executed, but also other variable effects (the variable effect in which the normal fluctuation is executed, the variable effect in which the shortened change is executed, the variable effect in which the normal reach effect is executed, and the SP reach effect. Also, regarding the fluctuating effect that is executed), when the power supply stopped during the execution is restarted and the execution period of the effect ends, the temporary stop display (sway fluctuation/swing display) of the effect design 70a is not performed. 753" lost production design 70a, or a jackpot production design that is a combination of the same production design as the reach combination by the production design that formed the reach state before power off or a combination of different production designs (still display) Will be done.

Also, for the special symbol TZ, whether the control state of the game is initialized or restored, whether the subsequent state is the normal game state or a specific game state (low-probability time short gaming state, high-probability time short gaming state) Regardless of whether or not there is a special symbol TZ, it will be stopped and displayed (still display) with the same display mode (shape, design) and the same combination of numbers as the effect symbol 70a.

Then, when the opening of the jackpot game is started, as shown in FIG. 85(l), the image display device displays information indicating the type of jackpot game (“MAX jackpot” indicating the first jackpot game). The opening effect including is started, and the first hold icon display area 70B, the second hold icon display area 70D, and the icon display area 70C are erased together with the icons.

The winning opening lamp NR remains off during the display of the initial screen and/or the returning screen, but is not used in the lamp change effect (does not indicate the expectation of jackpot winning) Lighting mode (for example, white lighting) ), the winning opening lamp NR may be turned on.

As described above, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 84 to 85, the power supply stopped during the execution of the variable effect that is stopped and displayed after the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped (swing fluctuation) is restarted. After the control state of the game is restored, the special symbol fluctuation time has passed and the special symbol confirmation command (when the special symbol confirmation command is missed and the customer wait state is entered after that, the customer wait state designation When the command) is received, the temporary stop display (sway fluctuation/swing display) of the effect design 70a is not performed, and the effect design 70a is stopped (static display). By doing so, it is possible to let the player know that the variation effect that was being executed at the time when the power supply was stopped was completed, and it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIG. 84 to FIG. 85, the effect design 70a is stopped and displayed (static display) after the supply of power stopped during the execution of the loss variation effect is resumed and the control state of the game is restored. In this case, the combination of the effect symbols, which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, is not displayed (still display), instead of the normal lost effect symbol. By doing this, it is not necessary to perform a complicated process such as a lottery to determine the effect symbol to be stopped and displayed (still display), the power is restored to restore the control state of the game, and the power is supplied. It is possible to recognize that the variation effect that was being executed at the time of the stop was completed.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIG. 84 to FIG. 85, after the power supply stopped during the execution of the jackpot variation effect is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed (still display). In the case of winning, the combination of the jackpot effect symbols is displayed in a stopped state (still display). By doing so, it is possible to understand that the power is restored to restore the control state of the game, and that the fluctuation effect that was being executed when the power supply was stopped was the jackpot fluctuation effect. Become.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIGS. 84 to 85, when the combination of the big hit effect symbols is stopped and displayed (still display) after the control state of the game is restored, the reach state is formed before the power supply is stopped. It is possible to stop display (still display) a combination of jackpot effect designs that is different from the reach combination based on the effect patterns. By doing so, it is not necessary to be aware of the jackpot effect design that was scheduled to be stopped and displayed before the power supply was stopped, and it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the display control after the power supply is restarted.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 84 to 85, when the variable effect that is being executed when the power supply is stopped includes the above-described promotion effect execution period, the power supply is restarted and controlled. After the state is restored, the jackpot effect design is stopped and displayed (still display) without executing the promotion effect. By doing so, since the useless effect is not performed until the effect symbol is stopped and displayed (still display), the variable effect that was being executed when the power supply was stopped was the jackpot variable effect. It is possible for the player to immediately understand.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 84 to 85, the power supply stopped during the execution of the lost variation effect is resumed to restore the control state of the game, and the case where the jackpot variation effect is stopped. When the power supply is restarted and the game control state is restored, the display mode (display screen type, display screen display order) of the image display device after the power supply is restarted is the same. By doing this, it is possible to perform simple display control without paying attention to whether the loss variation effect is being executed or the jackpot variation effect is being executed. It is possible to reduce the processing load related to control.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIGS. 84 to 85, the special symbol TZ is in the same display mode as before the power supply is stopped after the power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored. Then, it is adapted to be stopped and displayed (still display) by a number which is the same combination as the effect design 70a. By doing so, it becomes easy to understand that the variation effect that was being executed when the power supply was stopped has ended.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIGS. 84 to 85, when the power supply stopped during the display of the icon is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the next screen after the display of the returning screen is finished. Until the variation effect (scrolling of the effect pattern 70a) is started, a rectangular area image is displayed in the icon display area 70C, so that the display space (display area) of the icon becomes a background image or the like. The effect image is secured in a displayable state, but the icon is not displayed. By doing so, it is possible to let the player know that the variation effect that was being executed at the time when the power supply was stopped was completed, and it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 84 to 85, when the power supply stopped while the hold icon is displayed and the control state of the game is restored, the next screen after the display of the returning screen is finished Until the change effect is started, a rectangular area image is displayed in the hold icon display area so that the display area (display area) of the hold icon is in a state in which an effect image such as a background image can be displayed. It is reserved and the hold icon is displayed. By doing this, even if the power supply is stopped, it is possible to understand that the pending fluctuation effect has not disappeared, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game. Becomes

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 84 to 85, the variable effect corresponding to the icon that has triggered the lamp change effect (the winning color of the winning opening lamp NR is the jackpot winning probability is high (blue, red). , Rainbow)) When the power supply that was stopped during the storage of special figure determination information) is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the prize change lamp NR is jackpot without restarting the lamp change effect. The notification mode (lighting off or white lighting) that does not indicate the expected degree of winning is set. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the control load after the power supply is resumed, and avoid a situation in which the player is confused that the lamp change effect is restarted even though the variable effect is not executed. It will be possible.

It should be noted that after the execution period of the jackpot variation effect is finished, the jackpot effect design 70a and the stop screen in which the special symbol TZ is displayed in a stopped state are displayed, but when the power is restored as in the case of a loss. The effect symbol 70a of the initial symbol "753" and the special symbol TZ may be displayed as the second standby screen in a stopped display (still display).

Moreover, after the execution period of the jackpot variation effect is finished, the jackpot effect design 70a and the stop screen in the state where the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed are displayed, but the jackpot effect design 70a is displayed without displaying the stop screen. The opening effect of the jackpot game in which is not displayed may be started. Moreover, you may display the information which shows the kind of jackpot game in the opening production, the jackpot special symbol TZ of "777" may be displayed, and the special symbol of "753" which is an initial symbol at the time of power restoration. TZ may be displayed.

In addition, after the execution period of the lost variation effect is finished, the effect symbol 70a, which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the special symbol TZ are displayed, and after the execution period of the jackpot variation effect is ended, the big hit You may start the opening effect of the big hit game without displaying the stop screen in the state where the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed.

In addition, when it is possible to execute a specific effect that encourages whether or not the jackpot game is executed without displaying the reach effect pattern 70a in the variable effect (expecting that the jackpot game is executed), if the specification is possible, After the power supply stopped during the execution of the production is restarted and the control state is restored, if it is lost, the production design 70a, which is the initial design when the power is restored, is stopped and displayed (still display), and if it is a big hit. The big hit effect design 70a may be stopped and displayed (still display).

Further, when the combination of the big hit performance symbols is stopped and displayed (still display) after the control state of the game is restored, one of a combination of a plurality of big hit performance symbols corresponding to the type of the big hit game executed thereafter. May be stopped and displayed.

In this case, for example, the combination of the jackpot effect design that suggests the execution of the first jackpot game is "333" and "777", and the combination of the jackpot performance symbols that suggests the execution of the second jackpot game is "222" and "222". It is assumed that 444”, “666”, and “888” are the combinations of the jackpot effect symbols that suggest execution of the third jackpot game are “111”, “555”, and “999”.

Then, if the reach combination before the stop of the power supply is "1↓1" which constitutes a part of the combination of the big hit performance symbols that suggests the execution of the third big hit game, the big hit game to be executed thereafter is the first. In the case of a jackpot game, either "333" or "777" (a combination of jackpot effect symbols different from the reach combination according to the effect symbols forming the reach state) is stopped and displayed, and then executed. When the big hit game is the third big hit game, one of "111", "555", and "999" (a combination of the same or different jackpot effect symbols as the reach combination by the effect symbol that has formed the reach state) It is recommended to display the stop.

Further, for the special symbol TZ, after the power supply is resumed and the control state is restored, the display is not stopped and displayed (still display) with the same number as the effect symbol 70a, but is different from the effect symbol 70a. You may make it a stop display (still display) with a number.

Moreover, after the power supply is restarted and the control state is restored, in the case of the normal game state and the customer waiting state, while the production symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (still display), the power is supplied. After the restart and control state is restored, in the specific game state (low-probability time short game state, high-probability time short game state) and customer waiting state, without displaying the production design 70a (still display), The special symbol TZ may be stopped and displayed (still display).

(Examples of continuous notice effect, hold icon change effect, and lamp change effect when restarting after power supply to the gaming machine is stopped)
86 and FIG. 87 are diagrams showing an example of effects when the continuous notice effect, the hold icon change effect, and the lamp change effect are resumed after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped.

As shown in FIG. 86(a), the first hold icon (CD icon) is displayed on the first display section 70B1, the second display section 70B2, and the third display section 70B3 of the first hold icon display area 70B. It is assumed that the lost effect design 70a of "728" is stopped and displayed while the player is present.

Then, when the variation effect that is the preliminary variation is started, as shown in FIG. 86(b), the variation display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the first display section 70B1, the second display section 70B2, and The first hold icon (CD icon) displayed on the third display portion 70B3 is shift-displayed on the icon display area 70C, the first display portion 70B1, and the second display portion 70B2, respectively.

Here, the effect image EF is displayed around the effect pattern 70a that starts the variable display, so that the first effect of the continuous notice effect is started and the first hold icon (shifted) displayed on the second display unit 70B2 ( The hold icon change effect is started by changing the display mode of the icon final display mode = red character icon) to a blue character icon, and accordingly, the winning opening lamp NR is turned off and is flashed in blue. The lamp change effect is started with.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 86(c), the effect image EF displayed around the effect design 70a is erased, and the effect design 70a starts scrolling at high speed. Then, when the variable time elapses, as shown in FIG. 86(d), after the effect design 70a indicating the loss is temporarily stopped and displayed, the loss effect design 70a of "259" and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed. ..

After that, when the variation effect which is the preliminary variation is started, as shown in FIG. 86(e), the variation display of the effect symbol 70a is started and the first display section 70B1 and the second display section 70B2 are displayed. The displayed first hold icon is shift-displayed in the icon display area 70C and the first display portion 70B1.

Here, the effect image EF is displayed around the effect pattern 70a that starts the variable display, so that the second effect of the continuous notice effect is started, and the hold icon change effect and the lamp change effect are continued. Become.

Then, as shown in FIG. 86(f), the effect image EF displayed around the effect design 70a is erased, and the effect design 70a starts scrolling at high speed. When the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is stopped at this timing, as shown in FIG. 86(g), the image display device is hidden and the winning opening lamp NR is turned off.

After that, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is resumed, as shown in FIG. 86(h), the image display device displays the initial screen including the characters "Reading". The state of being turned off is maintained without restarting the change effect.

Then, when the effect control board 130 receives the second power supply restoration designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, as shown in FIG. 87(i), the image display device displays the words "Please restart the game". Although the returning screen including is displayed for the execution period of the pre-variation, the winning opening lamp NR also remains off.

Then, when the execution period of the pre-variation ends (the effect control board 130 receives the special symbol determination command indicating a loss), as shown in FIG. 87(j), a temporary stop display (fluctuation variation) of the effect symbol 70a is performed. Without changing the power supply, the effect design 70a of "753" which is the initial design and the stop screen in which the special design TZ is stopped and displayed (still display) is displayed, and the lamp change effect is pre-varied without restarting. Ends.

At this time, the CD icon that is not the blue character icon before the power supply is stopped is displayed on the first display portion 70B1 of the first hold icon display area 70B, and the icon is not displayed on the icon display area 70C. However, when the rectangular area image is displayed, the display space (display area) of the icon is secured in a state in which an effect image such as a background image can be displayed.

After that, when the fluctuating effect in which the SPSP reach effect is executed is started, as shown in FIG. 87(k), the fluctuating display of the effect design 70a is started, and at the same time, the first display portion 70B1 is displayed. The 1-hold icon (CD icon) is shift-displayed in the icon display area 70C.

Here, when a lottery related to the icon change effect newly executed is won, the display mode of the icon shift-displayed in the icon display area 70C is changed to a blue character icon according to the result and the icon is changed. Change production is started. On the other hand, since the lottery related to the lamp change effect is not newly executed, the prize change lamp NR is kept off and the lamp change effect is not restarted.

In addition, when the lottery related to the alternative notice effect performed by restarting the power supply is won, the mini-character MCB is displayed on the image display device according to the result and the mini-character MCB is moved so as to be out of the frame. The notice production is executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 87(l), the dialogue output by the ally A is displayed in the dialogue window displayed on the image display device, and the voice output device 9 outputs the voice "Chance is coming!" according to the dialogue. The dialogue notice effect is executed when is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 87(m), while the effect symbol 70a of "3" is stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) in the left and right variable display areas of the effect symbol 70a that has been variably displayed, the central variable display area. The reach effect (normal reach) in which the effect pattern 70a is variably displayed is executed.

Then, when the SP reach is developed, as shown in FIG. 87(n), the SP reach effect is started, and the effect pattern 70a is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the screen, and the first hold icon display area 70B and the second hold icon display area 70B are displayed. The hold icon display area 70D is deleted.

Then, when the SPSP reach is developed, as shown in FIG. 87(o), the SPSP reach effect is started, and the icon display area 70C is erased together with the icon.

After that, when the execution period of SPSP reach production which becomes the big hit ends (production control baseplate 130 receives the special design decision command which shows the big hit), as shown in Figure 87 (p) this big hit game (here first The jackpot effect design 70a of "333" that suggests the type of jackpot game) and the special symbol TZ are temporarily stopped (swing fluctuation) and then stop displayed and the fluctuation effect ends.

The winning opening lamp NR remains off during the display of the initial screen and/or the returning screen, but is not used in the lamp change effect (does not indicate the expectation of jackpot winning) Lighting mode (for example, white lighting) ), the winning opening lamp NR may be turned on.

If the special symbol confirmation command cannot be received during the variation effect (temporary stop display of the effect design 70a (fluctuation variation)), the temporary stop display (fluctuation variation) of the effect design 70a is not stopped and displayed, The temporary stop display (fluctuation fluctuation) will continue.

Thus, according to the example productions shown in FIGS. 86 to 87, when the power supply stopped during the execution of the continuous announcement production is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the special figure stored at the time of restoration The alternative notice effect different from the continuous notice effect can be executed without restarting the continuous notice effect in the variable effect corresponding to the determination information. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the player's dissatisfaction with the end of the continuous announcement effect due to the stop of the power supply, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 86 to 87, it is displayed as a special icon (including the case where the final display mode has not changed and the case where the final display mode has changed) When the supply of power stopped during the display of the icon is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the hold icon that was displayed as the special icon is displayed as the normal icon. By doing so, it is not necessary to be aware of the display mode of the hold icon when the power supply is stopped, and it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the display control after the power supply is restarted.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIG. 86 to FIG. 87, when the power supply stopped during the execution of the icon change effect is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the special figure determination information stored at the time of restoration In the variable effect corresponding to, the hold icon change effect is not executed, but the icon change effect can be executed again. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the player's dissatisfaction with the end of the icon change effect due to the stop of the power supply, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 86 to 87, even when the icon change effect is executed again during the execution of the variable effect corresponding to the special figure determination information stored at the time of restoration, It will not be executed from the continuation of the stage suggested before the power supply was stopped. By doing so, it is possible to execute the icon change effect in accordance with the content of the current change effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 86 to 87, the variable effect corresponding to the hold icon that has triggered the execution of the lamp change effect (the winning color of the winning opening lamp NR is a color with a high expectation for jackpot winning (blue, red). , Rainbow)), even if the control state of the game is restored by restarting the power supply stopped during the storage of special figure determination information that will be changed), the winning opening is not restarted. The lamp NR is set to be in a notification mode (extinguished or lit in white) that does not suggest the jackpot winning expectation. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the control load after the power supply is resumed, and avoid a situation in which the player is confused that the lamp change effect is restarted even though the variable effect is not executed. It will be possible.

(Specific example when the connection state of various detection means changes)
88(a) and 88(b) are diagrams showing a specific example when the connection state of various detection means changes in the customer waiting state.

Here, the wirings from the first starting opening detection switch 45a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, and the radio wave detection sensor 54a are combined into one connector, and this connector is connected to the connector of the main control board 110. And

First, FIG. 88(a) will be described.
FIG. 88(a) is a diagram showing a specific example when the connection state of the first starting opening detection switch 45a changes in the customer waiting state.

At the timing of T1, it is assumed that the first starting opening detection switch 45a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, and the radio wave detection sensor 54a are normally connected to the main control board 110. At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753" which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, and the first standby screen in the state where the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed). ..

At the timing of T2, for example, when the connector connected to the main control board 110 is in the half-inserted state and only the first starting opening detection switch 45a is in the unconnected state, the main control board 110 detects the occurrence of the connection error. Then, the effect control board 130 executes the connection error notification.

At this time, the image display device displays an error notification image EG including the characters “connection error detection” indicating that a connection error has occurred, and the audio output device 9 displays an alarm and “connection error”. A connection error notification sound composed of the voice is output.

At the timing of T3, when the half-insertion of the connector connected to the main control board 110 is released and the first starting opening detection switch 45a returns to the connected state, it is detected that the connection error is released by the main control board 110. However, the connection error notification continues until the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off.

Next, FIG. 88(b) will be described.
FIG. 88(b) is a diagram showing a specific example when the connection state of the first starting opening detection switch 45a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, and the radio wave detection sensor 54a changes in the customer waiting state.

At the timing of T1, it is assumed that the first starting opening detection switch 45a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, and the radio wave detection sensor 54a are normally connected to the main control board 110. At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753" which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, and the first standby screen in the state where the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed). ..

At the timing of T2, for example, when the connector connected to the main control board 110 is in the half-inserted state and the first starting opening detection switch 45a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, and the radio wave detection sensor 54a are not connected, The main control board 110 detects the occurrence of a magnetic error, a radio wave error, and a connection error, and the effect control board 130 executes a magnetic error notification, a radio wave error notification, and a connection error notification.

At this time, the image display device displays the characters "magnetic error detection" indicating the occurrence of a magnetic error, the characters "radio wave error detection" indicating the occurrence of a radio wave error, and the "connection error" indicating the occurrence of a connection error. The error notification image EG including the characters "Detection" is displayed, and the voice output device 9 outputs a magnetic error notification sound including a warning and a voice "magnetic error".

At the timing of T3, when the half-insertion of the connector connected to the main control board 110 is released and the magnetic detection sensor 53a, the radio wave detection sensor 54a, and the first starting opening detection switch 45a return to the connected state, the main control board Although it is detected by 110 that the magnetic error, the radio wave error, and the connection error have been released, various error notifications continue until the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off.

When the signal line for command communication between the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 is changed from the connected state to the unconnected state, the main control board 110 does not detect the occurrence of the connection error, and the error occurs. Notification is not executed.

As described above, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 88, specific detection means (starting mouth detection switch, magnetic detection) for detecting a predetermined event (starting winning, magnetism, radio wave, etc.) connected to the main control board 110. When the sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a) change from the connected state to the disconnected state, an error notification is given. By doing so, it is possible to grasp the occurrence of an abnormality (half-insertion of connector, disconnection, fraudulent activity), and it is possible to take prompt action.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 88, the specific detection means (starting mouth detection switch, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a) for detecting a predetermined event (start prize, magnetism, radio wave, etc.) Even when the connected state is returned to the connected state, error notification of a magnetic error or a radio wave error is continued until the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts on the magnetic detection sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 88, error notification is not issued even when the payout control board 120 changes from the connected state to the unconnected state. By doing so, it is possible to continue the game as it is in a case where there is a low possibility of cheating, and it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from decreasing.

In addition, also in the case where the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is started while the specific detection means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a) connected to the main control board 110 are not connected. , During the display of the initial screen or after the end of the initial screen (when the display of the first standby screen or the second standby screen is started), various error notifications (connection error notification, magnetic error notification in the same notification mode as in FIG. 88), (Radio wave error notification) may be performed.

In this case, even if the magnetic detection sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a change from the unconnected state to the connection state, the error notification (magnetic error notification, radio wave error notification) is continued, but the first starting opening detection switch 45a The connection error notification may be canceled when the unconnected state is changed to the connected state. By doing so, it is possible to continue the game as it is in a case where there is a low possibility of cheating, and it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from decreasing.

In addition, a radio error notification sound related to a radio error having a lower priority (importance) than a magnetic error or a connection error notification sound related to a connection error having a lower priority (importance) than a radio error is referred to as a magnetic error. Although they are not output when they occur at the same time, the notification sounds relating to the errors that have occurred may be output in order.

In addition, in the magnetic error notification, the radio wave error notification, and the connection error notification, the error notification sound may be output without displaying the error notification image EG, or the error notification image EG may be displayed and the error notification sound may be displayed. May not be output.

(Second embodiment)
Hereinafter, a second embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

(Initial processing of lamp/driving controller)
The accessory initial processing of the lamp/drive control unit 150 will be described with reference to FIG. 89. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing the accessory initial processing of the lamp/drive controller 150.
Note that, here, the same processes as the accessory initial process of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted, and different processes will be described.

In step R101A, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not there is a power ON flag set in the lamp RAM 150c at the start of power supply. If there is no power-on flag, the process moves to step R102A, and if there is a power-on flag, the power-on flag is cleared in step R101B.

In step R102A, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) transmitted from the main control board 110 is received. Moves the process to step R102B, and moves the process to step R104 when the power-on command is not received.

In step R102B, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed since the power was turned on. If a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds after completion of the power-on last time and the initial operation should be completed) has passed, the process moves to step R103, and the predetermined time has not passed. In that case, the process proceeds to step R104.

In step R103, the lamp CPU 150a performs the origin return process of the accessory (the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74, the effect button 17) to the initial process number updated in each process of the accessory initial process. Set "1" of.

Thus, according to the modified example of the accessory initializing process shown in FIG. 89, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is started, the returning operation of various accessory and the initial operation are started. Has become. By doing this, it is not necessary to be aware of whether the game control state is initialized or the game control state is restored, and the return operation of various actors after the start of power supply, and the initial state. It is possible to reduce the processing load related to the operation.

Further, according to the modified example of the accessory initializing process shown in FIG. 89, after a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed since the power supply to the gaming machine 1 was started, a power-on command (power-on designation) When a command, a power supply restoration designation command) is received, the restoration operation and the initial operation of various types of accessories are performed again. By doing so, the main control board 110 is not normally started and the command at power-on is transmitted later than usual (an abnormality occurs in the power supply line from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110). It is possible to understand that.

In addition, when the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) is received, regardless of the elapsed time from the start of the power supply to the gaming machine 1, the restoration operation of various actors, and The initial operation may be performed. By doing so, it is not necessary to be aware of the elapsed period from the start of power supply to the gaming machine 1, and it is possible to simplify the processing when the power-on command is received.

(Specific example when there is no recovery abnormality in various accessories after turning on the power)
FIG. 90 is a diagram showing a specific example in which there is no return abnormality in the various types of accessory (the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74, the effect button 17) after the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c.

The power-on with initialization of the main RAM 110c includes a power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized after the setting change processing is performed, and a power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without the setting change processing. However, here, a case will be described in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process and the power is turned on.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin returning process is started and the returning operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 to the origin position is started. To be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off. In addition, the sub first variation indicator 81, the sub second variation indicator 82, the sub first reserve indicator 83, the sub second reserve indicator 84, and the sub general figure variation indicator 85 are in a non-display state. ing.

When the returning operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed at the timing of T2, the returning operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the 1st movable member LED, the 2nd movable member LED, and the production button LED maintain the state where it went out.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 ends, the origin return processing ends, the initial operation processing starts, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 starts.

Further, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission modes of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED change and light up alternately in red and white. Then, the light emitting mode of the effect button LED is changed to light in the order of red→green→blue.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a, which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (statically displayed), and the voice is displayed. The output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a sound "RAM clear".

Further, when the special symbol storage designation command (first hold number and second hold number=0) as a power-on command is received, the first hold number display area 70E of the image display device, and the second hold number. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub universal figure variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (miss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, and the sub-universal figure hold indicator 86 are in a display mode showing "0".

At the timing of T4, the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends, and at the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 starts.

At the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 ends, the initial operation process ends, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED light up while waiting for a customer (white light up). Become. At the timing of T7, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and the silent state is set.

At the timing of T8, when the first special symbol memory designation command (first holding number=1) based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 45 is received, the holding displayed in the first holding number display area 70E The number becomes “1”, the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, the sub first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing “1”, and the winning sound is output from the voice output device 9. "Pon♪" is output.

At the timing of T9, when the variation start command (effect symbol designating command, variation pattern designating command) is received from the main control board 110, the reserved figure displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes to "0" and fluctuates. Production (production design 70a, and variable display of special design TZ, movement of hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, variation display is started on the sub first variation indicator 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during variation, and the sub first hold indicator 83 is displayed. , "0" is displayed.

(Specific example when the second movable member has a return abnormality after the power is turned on)
FIG. 91 is a diagram showing a specific example in which the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality after the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c. Here, the case where the main RAM 110c is initialized and the power is turned on without performing the setting change process will be described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin returning process is started and the returning operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 to the origin position is started. To be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off. In addition, the sub first variation indicator 81, the sub second variation indicator 82, the sub first pending indicator 83, the sub second pending indicator 84, and the sub general figure variation indicator 85 maintain the non-display state. To do.

When the returning operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed at the timing of T2, the returning operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the 1st movable member LED, the 2nd movable member LED, and the production button LED maintain the state where it went out.

At the timing of T3, when the origin return process ends with the return abnormality occurring in the second movable member 74, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. .. In addition, the second movable member LED is in a red blinking (abnormality notification mode) for notifying the occurrence of the recovery abnormality.

Further, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission mode of the first movable member LED changes, and the first movable member LED lights up alternately in red and white, and the effect button LED turns red → Lights in the order of green → blue.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a, which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (statically displayed), and the voice is displayed. The output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a sound "RAM clear".

Further, when the special symbol storage designation command (first hold number and second hold number=0) as a power-on command is received, the first hold number display area 70E of the image display device, and the second hold number. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub universal figure variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (miss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, and the sub-universal figure hold indicator 86 are in a display mode showing "0".

At the timing of T4, the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends, and at the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends, the initial operation processing of the second movable member 74 is not executed. finish.

At the timing of T6, when the initialization notification sound output period (for example, 60 seconds) elapses, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and a silent state is set.

At the timing of T7, when the first special symbol memory designation command (first holding number=1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 45 is received, the holding displayed in the first holding number display area 70E The number becomes “1”, the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, the sub first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing “1”, and the winning sound is output from the voice output device 9. "Pon♪" is output.

At the timing of T8, when the fluctuation start command (effect symbol designating command, fluctuation pattern designating command) is received from the main control board 110, the reserved figure displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes to "0" and fluctuates. Production (production design 70a, and variable display of special design TZ, movement of hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the second movable member LED ends, the variation display is started on the sub first variation indicator 81, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED The light turns on during the change, and the sub first hold indicator 83 is in a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example when the first movable member has a return abnormality after the power is turned on)
FIG. 92 is a diagram showing a specific example in the case where the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality after the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c. Here, the case where the main RAM 110c is initialized and the power is turned on without performing the setting change process will be described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin returning process is started and the returning operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 to the origin position is started. To be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off. In addition, the sub first variation indicator 81, the sub second variation indicator 82, the sub first pending indicator 83, the sub second pending indicator 84, and the sub general figure variation indicator 85 maintain the non-display state. To do.

At the timing of T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed in the state where the return abnormality occurs in the first movable member 73, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED is in a red blinking (abnormality notification mode) for notifying the occurrence of the recovery abnormality.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 ends and the origin return processing ends, the initial operation processing starts and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 and the effect button 17 starts.

Further, when the effect control board 130 receives a power-on designation command as a power-on command transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emitting mode of the second movable member LED changes and the second movable member LED lights up alternately in red and white. , The light emitting mode of the effect button LED changes and lights in the order of red→green→blue.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a, which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (statically displayed), and the voice is displayed. The output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a sound "RAM clear".

Further, when the special symbol storage designation command (first hold number and second hold number=0) as a power-on command is received, the first hold number display area 70E of the image display device, and the second hold number. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub universal figure variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (miss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, and the sub-universal figure hold indicator 86 are in a display mode showing "0".

At the timing of T4, the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends, and at the timing of T5, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 ends, and the initial operation processing of the first movable member 73 is not executed. finish.

At the timing of T7, when the first special symbol memory designation command (first holding number=1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 45 is received, the holding displayed in the first holding number display area 70E The number becomes “1”, the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, the sub first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing “1”, and the winning sound is output from the voice output device 9. "Pon♪" is output.

At the timing of T8, when the fluctuation start command (effect symbol designating command, fluctuation pattern designating command) is received from the main control board 110, the reserved figure displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes to "0" and fluctuates. Production (production design 70a, and variable display of special design TZ, movement of hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED ends, the variation display is started on the sub first variation indicator 81, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED The light turns on during the change, and the sub first hold indicator 83 is in a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example when there is a return abnormality in the production button after turning on the power)
FIG. 93 is a diagram showing a specific example in the case where the effect button 17 has a return abnormality after the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c. Here, the case where the main RAM 110c is initialized and the power is turned on without performing the setting change process will be described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin returning process is started and the returning operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 to the origin position is started. To be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off. In addition, the sub first variation indicator 81, the sub second variation indicator 82, the sub first pending indicator 83, the sub second pending indicator 84, and the sub general figure variation indicator 85 maintain the non-display state. To do.

At the timing of T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed in the state where the return abnormality has occurred in the effect button 17, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the effect button LED blinks in red (abnormality notification mode) for notifying the occurrence of the recovery abnormality.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 ends and the origin return process ends, the initial operation process starts and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 starts. The operation is not started.

Further, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission modes of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED change and light up alternately in red and white. To do.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a, which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (statically displayed), and the voice is displayed. The output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a sound "RAM clear".

Further, when the special symbol storage designation command (first hold number and second hold number=0) as a power-on command is received, the first hold number display area 70E of the image display device, and the second hold number. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub universal figure variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (miss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, and the sub-universal figure hold indicator 86 are in a display mode showing "0".

When the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends at the timing of T4, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 starts.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 ends, the initial operation process ends, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are lit while waiting for a customer (white lighting). At the timing of T6, when the initialization notification sound output period (for example, 60 seconds) elapses, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and a silent state is set.

At the timing of T7, when the first special symbol memory designation command (first holding number=1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 45 is received, the holding displayed in the first holding number display area 70E The number becomes “1”, the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, the sub first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing “1”, and the winning sound is output from the voice output device 9. "Pon♪" is output.

At the timing of T8, when the fluctuation start command (effect symbol designating command, fluctuation pattern designating command) is received from the main control board 110, the reserved figure displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes to "0" and fluctuates. Production (production design 70a, and variable display of special design TZ, movement of hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the effect button LED ends, the variable display is started on the sub first variable indicator 81, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are changing. It is lit, and the sub first hold indicator 83 is in a display mode showing "0".

Note that, in the specific example shown in FIGS. 90 to 93, the case where the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting changing process has been described, but the main RAM 110c is initialized after the setting is changed. When the power is turned on, the production control board 130 receives the setting change designation command after the dark screen (initial screen) is displayed to display the setting change screen, and then the power-on designation command is performed. When the board 130 receives the first standby screen, the return operation and the initial operation of the various types of accessories (the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74, the effect button 17) are started. .. The first standby screen may be displayed by receiving the setting value designation command.

(Specific example when there is no recovery abnormality in various accessories after power restoration)
FIG. 94 is a diagram showing a specific example in the case where there is no return abnormality in the various types of accessories (the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74, the effect button 17) after the power is restored without initializing the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin returning process is started and the returning operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 to the origin position is started. To be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off. In addition, the sub first variation indicator 81, the sub second variation indicator 82, the sub first reserve indicator 83, the sub second reserve indicator 84, and the sub general figure variation indicator 85 are in a non-display state. ing.

When the returning operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed at the timing of T2, the returning operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the 1st movable member LED, the 2nd movable member LED, and the production button LED maintain the state where it went out.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 ends, the origin return processing ends, the initial operation processing starts, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 starts.

Further, when the effect control board 130 receives the first power supply restoration designation command as the power-on command transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission mode of the first movable member LED changes to alternately turn on blue and white. At the same time, the light emission mode of the second movable member LED and the effect button LED changes and lights up in blue.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753" which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, and the second standby screen in the state where the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed).

Further, when the special symbol storage designation command (first hold number and second hold number=0) as a power-on command is received, the first hold number display area 70E of the image display device, and the second hold number. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub universal figure variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (miss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, and the sub-universal figure hold indicator 86 are in a display mode showing "0".

At the timing of T4, the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends, and at the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 starts.

At the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 ends, the initial operation process ends, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED light up while waiting for a customer (white light up). Become.

At the timing of T7, when the first special symbol memory designation command (first holding number=1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 45 is received, the holding displayed in the first holding number display area 70E The number becomes “1”, the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, the sub first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing “1”, and the winning sound is output from the voice output device 9. "Pon♪" is output.

At the timing of T8, when the fluctuation start command (effect symbol designating command, fluctuation pattern designating command) is received from the main control board 110, the reserved figure displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes to "0" and fluctuates. Production (production design 70a, and variable display of special design TZ, movement of hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, variation display is started on the sub first variation indicator 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during variation, and the sub first hold indicator 83 is displayed. , "0" is displayed.

(Specific example when the second movable member has a return abnormality after the power is restored)
FIG. 95 is a diagram showing a specific example in the case where the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality after the power supply is restored without initializing the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin returning process is started and the returning operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 to the origin position is started. To be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off. In addition, the sub first variation indicator 81, the sub second variation indicator 82, the sub first pending indicator 83, the sub second pending indicator 84, and the sub general figure variation indicator 85 maintain the non-display state. To do.

When the returning operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed at the timing of T2, the returning operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the 1st movable member LED, the 2nd movable member LED, and the production button LED maintain the state where it went out.

At the timing of T3, when the origin return process ends with the return abnormality occurring in the second movable member 74, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. .. At this time, the second movable member LED is in a red flashing state (abnormality notification mode) for notifying the occurrence of the recovery abnormality.

Furthermore, when the production control board 130 receives the power supply restoration designation command for waiting for a customer, which is transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission mode of the first movable member LED is changed and the blue light and the white light are alternately lit to produce the production. The light emitting mode of the button LED changes and lights up in blue.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753" which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, and the second standby screen in the state where the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed).

Further, when the special symbol storage designation command (first hold number and second hold number=0) as a power-on command is received, the first hold number display area 70E of the image display device, and the second hold number. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub universal figure variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (miss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, and the sub-universal figure hold indicator 86 are in a display mode showing "0".

At the timing of T4, the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends, and at the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends, the initial operation processing of the second movable member 74 is not executed. Upon completion, the first movable member LED and the effect button LED are turned on while the customer is waiting (lighted white).

At the timing of T6, when the first special symbol memory designation command (first holding number=1) based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 45 is received, the holding displayed in the first holding number display area 70E The number becomes “1”, the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, the sub first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing “1”, and the winning sound is output from the voice output device 9. "Pon♪" is output.

At the timing of T7, when the fluctuation start command (effect symbol designating command, fluctuation pattern designating command) is received from the main control board 110, the hold figure displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes to "0" and changes. Production (production design 70a, and variable display of special design TZ, movement of hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the second movable member LED ends, the variation display is started on the sub first variation indicator 81, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED The light turns on during the change, and the sub first hold indicator 83 is in a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example when the first movable member has a return abnormality after the power is restored)
FIG. 96 is a diagram showing a specific example of the case where the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality after the power supply is restored without initializing the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin returning process is started and the returning operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 to the origin position is started. To be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off.
In addition, the sub first variation indicator 81, the sub second variation indicator 82, the sub first pending indicator 83, the sub second pending indicator 84, and the sub general figure variation indicator 85 maintain the non-display state. To do.

At the timing of T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed in the state where the return abnormality occurs in the first movable member 73, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED becomes a red blinking (abnormality notification mode) for notifying the occurrence of the recovery abnormality, and the second movable member LED and the effect button LED are maintained in the off state.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 ends and the origin return processing ends, the initial operation processing starts and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 and the effect button 17 starts.

Further, when the production control board 130 receives the power supply restoration designation command for waiting for a customer, which is transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission modes of the second movable member LED and the production button LED are changed and lighted in blue. ..

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753" which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, and the second standby screen in the state where the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed).

Further, when the special symbol storage designation command (first hold number and second hold number=0) as a power-on command is received, the first hold number display area 70E of the image display device, and the second hold number. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub universal figure variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (miss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, and the sub-universal figure hold indicator 86 are in a display mode showing "0".

At the timing of T4, the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends, and at the timing of T5, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 ends, and the initial operation processing of the first movable member 73 is not executed. Upon completion, the first movable member LED and the effect button LED are turned on while the customer is waiting (lighted white).

At the timing of T6, when the first special symbol memory designation command (first holding number=1) based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 45 is received, the holding displayed in the first holding number display area 70E The number becomes “1”, the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, the sub first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing “1”, and the winning sound is output from the voice output device 9. "Pon♪" is output.

At the timing of T7, when the fluctuation start command (effect symbol designating command, fluctuation pattern designating command) is received from the main control board 110, the hold figure displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes to "0" and changes. Production (production design 70a, and variable display of special design TZ, movement of hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED ends, the variation display is started on the sub first variation indicator 81, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED The light turns on during the change, and the sub first hold indicator 83 is in a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example when the production button has a recovery abnormality after the power is restored)
FIG. 97 is a diagram showing a specific example in the case where the effect button 17 has a return abnormality after the power supply is restored without initializing the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin returning process is started and the returning operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 to the origin position is started. To be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off. In addition, the sub first variation indicator 81, the sub second variation indicator 82, the sub first pending indicator 83, the sub second pending indicator 84, and the sub general figure variation indicator 85 maintain the non-display state. To do.

At the timing of T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed in the state where the return abnormality has occurred in the effect button 17, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the effect button LED becomes a red blinking (abnormality notification mode) for notifying the occurrence of the recovery abnormality, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are maintained in the off state.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 ends and the origin return process ends, the initial operation process starts and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 starts. The operation is not started.

Furthermore, when the production control board 130 receives a power supply restoration designation command for waiting for a customer, which is transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission mode of the first movable member LED is changed to alternately light up in blue and white. 2 The light emitting mode of the movable member LED changes and lights up in blue.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753" which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, and the second standby screen in the state where the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed).

Further, when the special symbol storage designation command (first hold number and second hold number=0) as a power-on command is received, the first hold number display area 70E of the image display device, and the second hold number. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub universal figure variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (miss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, and the sub-universal figure hold indicator 86 are in a display mode showing "0".

When the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends at the timing of T4, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 starts.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 ends, the initial operation process ends, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are lit while waiting for a customer (white lighting).

At the timing of T6, when the first special symbol memory designation command (first holding number=1) based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 45 is received, the holding displayed in the first holding number display area 70E The number becomes “1”, the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, the sub first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing “1”, and the winning sound is output from the voice output device 9. "Pon♪" is output.

At the timing of T7, when the fluctuation start command (effect symbol designating command, fluctuation pattern designating command) is received from the main control board 110, the hold figure displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes to "0" and changes. Production (production design 70a, and variable display of special design TZ, movement of hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the effect button LED ends, the variable display is started on the sub first variable indicator 81, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are changing. It is lit, and the sub first hold indicator 83 is in a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example when the state after power restoration is displaying the fluctuation of the special symbol and there is pending storage)
FIG. 98 is a diagram showing a specific example in a case where the state after power recovery without initialization of the main RAM 110c is in the special symbol variation display (miss variation variation display) and with pending storage.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin returning process is started and the returning operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 to the origin position is started. To be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off. In addition, the sub first variation indicator 81, the sub second variation indicator 82, the sub first reserve indicator 83, the sub second reserve indicator 84, and the sub general figure variation indicator 85 are in a non-display state. ing.

When the returning operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed at the timing of T2, the returning operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the 1st movable member LED, the 2nd movable member LED, and the production button LED maintain the state where it went out.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 ends, the origin return processing ends, the initial operation processing starts, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 starts.

Further, when the production control board 130 receives the power supply restoration designation command for changing the special figure transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission mode of the first movable member LED changes to alternately turn on blue and white, The light emission mode of the second movable member LED and the effect button LED changes and lights up in blue. At this time, the image display device displays a returning screen including the characters "Please restart the game", and the audio output device 9 maintains silence.

Further, when the special symbol storage designation command (first hold number=3, second hold number=0) as a power-on command is received, the first holding number is displayed because the returning screen is displayed on the image display device. The state where no reserved numbers are displayed in the display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F is maintained.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub universal figure variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (miss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub first hold indicator 83 has a display mode showing "3", and the sub second hold indicator 84 and the sub general figure hold display 86 have a display mode showing "0".

At the timing of T4, the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends, and at the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 starts.

At the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 ends, the initial operation processing ends, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned off.

At the timing of T7, when the special symbol fixing command is received from the main control board 110, the effect display 70a of "753" which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (still). The stop screen in the displayed state (the same as the second standby screen) is displayed, and the stop sound is output from the audio output device 9.

At this time, the three first hold icons are displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, but the icon display area 70C is secured in a state where the display area can display an effect image such as a background image ( The pedestal image is displayed), but the icon is not displayed.

At the timing of T8, when the variation start command (effect design designation command, variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the hold figure displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes to "2" and changes. Production (production design 70a, and variable display of special design TZ, movement of hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, variation display is started on the sub first variation indicator 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during variation, and the sub first hold indicator 83 is displayed. , "2" is displayed.

(Specific example when the power on command was not received normally when the power was turned on)
FIG. 99 is a diagram showing a specific example when the power-on designation command is not normally received when the power is turned on.

When the power-on designation command cannot be normally received, power is supplied to the effect control board 130, but the main control board 110 has a broken power line or the power line connector is not connected ( Power supply (main power supply and backup power supply) is not supplied due to (including half-inserted state), second case in which command communication line from main control board 110 to effect control board 130 is broken, command The third case and the like in which the connector of the communication line is in the non-connection state (including the half-insertion state) can be cited, but the first case will be explained here.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, when the power supply is started without supplying the power to the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73, Also, the returning operation of the effect button 17 to the origin position is started.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off. Moreover, the sub 1st fluctuation indicator 81, the sub 2nd fluctuation indicator 82, the sub 1st reservation indicator 83, the sub 2nd reservation indicator 84, the sub public figure fluctuation indicator 85, and the sub public figure reservation indicator. 86 is in a non-display state.

When the returning operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed at the timing of T2, the returning operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the 1st movable member LED, the 2nd movable member LED, and the production button LED maintain the state where it went out.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 ends, the origin return processing ends, the initial operation processing starts, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 starts. At the timing, the initial operation of the effect button 17 is finished, and at the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is finished, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started, and at the timing of T6, the second movable member 73 is moved. When the initial operation of the member 74 ends, the initial operation processing ends, and the effect control board 130 enters a control state in which an effect corresponding to the command can be executed.

At the timing of T7, when the power line to the main control board 110 is connected, a process for initializing the game control state is performed and a power-on designation command is transmitted. Then, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 is started, even though the effect control board 130 is in a control state capable of executing an effect corresponding to the command. , And the return operation of the effect button 17 to the origin position is started.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a, which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (statically displayed), and the voice is displayed. The output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a sound "RAM clear".

After that, when the returning operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the returning operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the 1st movable member LED, the 2nd movable member LED, and the production button LED maintain the state where it went out.

At the timing of T8, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 ends, the origin return process ends, the initial operation process starts, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 starts. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are alternately turned on in red and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LEDs are turned on in the order of red→green→blue as initial light emission.

At timing T9, the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends, and at timing T10, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 starts.

At the timing of T11, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 ends, the initial operation processing ends, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED ends and the customer waits. When the output of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses after the light is turned on (white lighting), the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and a silent state is set.

Although the production control board 130 displayed the first standby screen when it received the power-on designation command, instead of displaying the first standby screen immediately, a dark color display screen as a kind of initial screen is displayed. The first standby screen may be displayed after the display for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds). In this case, the initialization notification sound may be output from the start of displaying the dark color display screen, or may be output from the start of displaying the first standby screen.

(Specific example when the power restoration specification command cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 100 is a diagram showing a specific example in the case where the power restoration specification command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on.

When the power restoration specification command cannot be normally received, power is supplied to the performance control board 130, but the main control board 110 has a broken power line or the power line connector is not connected ( Power supply (only main power supply) is not supplied due to (including half-inserted state), second case where command communication line from main control board 110 to effect control board 130 is broken, command communication line The third case and the like in which the connector is in the non-connection state (including the half-insertion state) can be mentioned. Here, the first case will be described.

Since the timing from T1 to T7 is the same as the timing from T1 to T7 in FIG. 99, the description thereof is omitted here, and the timing after T7 will be described.

At the timing of T7, when the power supply line to the main control board 110 is connected, a process for recovering the control state of the game is performed and a power supply recovery designation command is transmitted. Then, when the effect control board 130 receives the power supply restoration designation command, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 is started, even though the effect control board 130 is in a control state capable of executing the effect according to the command. , And the return operation of the effect button 17 to the origin position is started.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect design 70a of "753", which is the initial design when the power is restored, and the second standby screen in which the special design TZ is stopped (still displayed), and the voice is displayed. The output device 9 maintains a silent state.

After that, when the returning operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the returning operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the 1st movable member LED, the 2nd movable member LED, and the production button LED maintain the state where it went out.

At the timing of T8, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 ends, the origin return process ends, the initial operation process starts, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 starts. At this time, the first movable member LED is alternately lighted in blue and white as initial light emission, and the second movable member LED and the effect button LED are lighted in blue as initial light emission.

At timing T9, the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends, and at timing T10, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 starts.

At the timing of T11, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 ends, the initial operation processing ends, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED ends and the customer waits. Lights up (white light up).

In addition, the production control board 130 was displaying the second standby screen when it received the power restoration command, but instead of displaying the second standby screen immediately, a dark color display screen as a kind of initial screen is displayed. The second standby screen may be displayed after the display for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds).

Further, although the sound output device 9 is set to be in the silent state when the power restoration command is received, a notification sound (alarm etc.) indicating that the power is turned on (can be grasped) is given for a predetermined period. You may make it output over (for example, 30 seconds). In this case, the warning may be the same as when the power-on designation command is received, or a different warning.

99 to 100, when the power-on designation command or the power restoration designation command is received, various types of accessories (the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74, the effect button 17) are restored. However, the initial operation of various accessory may be performed without performing the return operation.

(Specific example when the command cannot be received normally when the power is turned on when the power is turned on)
FIG. 101 is a diagram showing a specific example in the case where the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be normally received when the power is turned on.

The case where the power supply restoration designation command cannot be normally received means that the power is not supplied to the main control board 110, the case where the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the production control board 130 is broken, and the command communication line The case where the connector is in a non-connected state (including a half-inserted state) and the like can be mentioned.

Since the timing from T1 to T5 is the same as the timing from T1 to T5 in FIG. 99, the description thereof is omitted here and the timing after T5 will be described.

At the timing of T5, the special symbol memory designation command (first reserve number and second time) without receiving the first power supply restoration designation command as the power ON command transmitted from the main control substrate 110, When the hold number=0) is received, the image display device maintains the state in which the initial screen is displayed.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub universal figure variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (miss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub first hold indicator 83 and the sub second hold indicator 84 are in a display mode showing "0".

At the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 ends, the initial operation processing ends, and the display state of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED changes and the light is turned off. Becomes

At the timing of T7, when the first special symbol memory designating command (first holding number=1) based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 45 is received, the initial screen remains displayed on the image display device. However, the sub first hold indicator 83 becomes a display mode showing "1", and the winning sound "Pong♪" is output from the voice output device 9.

At the timing of T8, when the variation start command (effect design designation command, variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the image display device displays the effect design 70a of "753" which is the initial design at the time of power restoration, and , The special design TZ is stopped and displayed (still display), the second standby screen is momentarily displayed, and then the variable effect (effect design 70a, and the variable display of the special design TZ, the movement of the hold icon, or to the icon) Change, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, variation display is started on the sub first variation indicator 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during variation, and the sub first hold indicator 83 is displayed. , "0" is displayed.

(Specific example 1 in the case where only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 102 shows only the power supply to the main control board 110 in the customer waiting state (while the power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the production control board 130) after the home position return processing and the initial operation processing have already been completed. It is a figure which shows the specific example 1 in the case of restarting after stopping.

A case where only the power supply to the main control board is restarted after being stopped is a case where the power supply lines from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 (main power supply line, backup power supply line) are disconnected and then contacted by an external factor. In some cases, after the connector of the power supply line (main power supply line, backup power supply line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 is in the non-connection state (including the half insertion state), the connector is in the connection state. Can be mentioned.

Here, while the production control board 130 is in one of the control states in which the production according to the command can be executed, that is, in the customer waiting state (including the execution of the customer waiting demonstration production), the main control board 110 is operated. A case where the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) is restarted after the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) is stopped will be described.

At the timing of T1, the return operation of various types of accessories, and the customer waiting state after the initial operation is completed, the image display device, the production design of "753" which is the initial design when the power is restored. 70a and the second standby screen in the state where the special symbol TZ is stopped (still) is displayed, or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button The LED is lit while waiting for customers.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub universal figure variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (miss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, and the sub-universal figure hold indicator 86 are in a display mode showing "0".

When only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped at the timing of T2, the image display device maintains the state in which the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first screen) is displayed. 1 fluctuation indicator 81, sub 2nd fluctuation indicator 82, sub 1st reservation indicator 83, sub 2nd reservation indicator 84, sub public figure fluctuation indicator 85, sub general figure reservation indicator 86) maintain.

When the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted at the timing of T3, the main RAM 110c is initialized. At this time, in the image display device, the state in which the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed is maintained, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variation display 81, sub second variation display 82, sub The first hold indicator 83, the sub second hold indicator 84, the sub general map variation display 85, the sub general figure hold indicator 86) also maintain the display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command as the power-on command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started. The return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED alternately light up in red and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LED lights up in white as initial light emission. The effect symbol 70a of "135" which is the initial symbol at the time of throwing in, and the first standby screen in the state where the special symbol TZ is stopped (still) is displayed, and from the voice output device 9, an alarm and "RAM" are displayed. It is clear that the initialization notification sound consisting of the voice is output.

In addition, when the special symbol storage designation command (first hold number and second hold number=0) as a power-on command is received, the first hold number display area 70E of the image display device and the second hold number. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub universal figure variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (miss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub first hold indicator 83 and the sub second hold indicator 84 are in a display mode showing "0".

When the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed at the timing of T5, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started, and the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed at the timing of T6. Then, the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started.

At the timing of T7, the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends, and at the timing of T8, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 starts.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 ends, the initial operation processing ends, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED complete the initial light emission and light up while waiting for a customer (white lighting). ), and at the timing of T10, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and the silent state is set.

It should be noted that the return operation, the initial operation, and the change effect (loss change effect) after the completion of the output of the initialization notification sound of the various types of accessories are already in progress and the jackpot effect (the opening effect, the round effect, and the ending effect). The timing of T4 also in the case where only the power supply (including the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped during the control state in which the effect control board can execute the effect according to the command such as being executed. The screen displayed on the image display device by the time the power-on command is received is a fluctuation effect screen (miss change effect screen, jackpot fluctuation effect screen) or jackpot effect screen (opening effect screen, round game effect screen, ending effect screen) ) Is the same as the case of restarting after the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped during the waiting state for the customer, and various accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button) The restoration operation and the initial operation in 17) are performed, and the initialization notification sound is output from the voice output device 9.

In addition, when there is an abnormality in each type of accessory, the initial operation of each type of accessory or the light emission (flashing red) in the abnormality notification mode is performed as in the specific example shown in FIG. 91, FIG. 92, or FIG. Will be done.

(Specific example 2 in the case where only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 103 shows only the power supply to the main control board 110 in the customer waiting state (while the power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the performance control board 130) after the origin return processing and the initial operation processing have already been completed. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a specific example 2 in the case where the process is stopped and then restarted.

Here, while the production control board 130 is in one of the control states in which the production according to the command can be executed, that is, in the customer waiting state (including the execution of the customer waiting demonstration production), the main control board 110 is operated. A case will be described in which the main power supply is resumed while the main power supply is stopped and the backup power supply is being continued.

At the timing of T1, in the case of the customer waiting state after the return operation of the various types of accessories, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound have already been completed, the image display device is an initial pattern when the power is restored. The production pattern 70a of "753" and the second standby screen in the state where the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still display) or the customer waiting demonstration production screen is displayed, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member are displayed. The LED and the effect button LED are lit while waiting for the customer.

In the case of the customer waiting state after the end of the return operation of the various types of accessories, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound, the change effect executed after the output of the initialization notification sound, the image display device is lost. The production design 70a to be shown and the special design TZ are the standby screen in the state of being stopped (still displayed), or the customer waiting demonstration production screen is displayed.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub universal figure variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (miss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, and the sub-universal figure hold indicator 86 are in a display mode showing "0".

When only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped at the timing of T2, the image display device maintains the state in which the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display is performed. Device 80 (sub first variation indicator 81, sub second variation indicator 82, sub first reserve indicator 83, sub second reserve indicator 84, sub universal figure variation indicator 85, sub universal figure reserve indicator 86 ) Also maintains the displayed contents.

At the timing of T3, when the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted, a process for restoring the game control state is performed. At this time, in the image display device, the state in which the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed is maintained, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variation display 81, sub second variation display 82, sub The first hold indicator 83, the sub second hold indicator 84, the sub general map variation display 85, the sub general figure hold indicator 86) also maintain the display contents.

Even when the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, the standby screen is being displayed (after receiving the customer waiting state designation command regardless of whether or not the variation effect is finished, or When the demo waiting time has elapsed after the last customer waiting demonstration production), the customer waiting demonstration production is started.

At the timing of T4, when the effect control board 130 receives the power supply restoration designation command as the power-on command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started. The return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED is alternately lighted in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED is lighted in blue as initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lighted in white as initial light emission, In the image display device, instead of the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen, the effect symbol 70a of "753" which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (still display). The second standby screen of the state is displayed.

In addition, when the special symbol storage designation command (first hold number and second hold number=0) as a power-on command is received, the first hold number display area 70E of the image display device and the second hold number. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub universal figure variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (miss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub first hold indicator 83 and the sub second hold indicator 84 are in a display mode showing "0".

At the timing of T5, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started, and when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is performed. When finished, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 ends, the origin return process ends, the initial operation process starts, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 starts.

At the timing of T7, the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends, and at the timing of T8, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 starts.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 ends, the initial operation process ends, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED ends and the customer waits. Lights up (white light up).

When there is a return abnormality in each type of accessory, the initial operation or initial light emission of each type of accessory is performed as in the specific example shown in FIG. 95, FIG. 96, or FIG.

(Specific example 3 when only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 104 shows the power supply to the main control board 110 during the execution of the variable effect after the origin return processing and the initial operation processing have already been completed (power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130). It is a figure which shows the specific example 3 in the case of restarting only after supply is stopped.

Here, during the execution of the variable effect, which is one of the control states in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and the backup power source is stopped. The case where the supply of the main power supply is restarted in the state where the supply of the power is continued will be described.

At the timing of T1, the variation effect is being executed, the variation effect screen is displayed on the image display device, and the variation output sound (BGM, SE, etc.) is output from the audio output device 9. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are lit during change. Further, the sub-first fluctuation display 81 is displaying the fluctuation, and the sub-first reservation display 83 displays the reserved number "1".

When only the power supply (excluding the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped at the timing of T2, the image display device maintains the state in which the variation effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (the sub first variation) is displayed. The display 81, the sub second change indicator 82, the sub first hold indicator 83, the sub second hold indicator 84, the sub general figure change indicator 85, the sub general figure hold indicator 86) also maintain the display contents. ..

When the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted at the timing of T3, the processing for recovering the control state of the game is performed without initializing the main RAM 110c. At this time, in the image display device, the state in which the variation effect screen is displayed is maintained, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variation indicator 81, sub second variation indicator 82, sub first pending indicator 83, The second sub-holding indicator 84, the sub-universal figure variation display 85, the sub-universal figure holding indicator 86) also maintain the display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the effect control board 130 receives the power supply restoration designation command for changing the special figure transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started. The return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED is alternately lighted in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED is lighted in blue as initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lighted in white as initial light emission, On the image display device, a returning screen including the characters "Please restart the game" is displayed, and the sound output device 9 becomes silent, but the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub The second fluctuation indicator 82, the sub first pending indicator 83, the sub second pending indicator 84, the sub general figure variation indicator 85, the sub general figure pending indicator 86) maintain the display contents.

When the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed at the timing of T5, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started, and the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed at the timing of T6. Then, the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started.

At the timing of T7, the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends, and at the timing of T8, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 starts.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 ends, the initial operation process ends, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED complete the initial light emission and are turned off. Becomes

At the timing of T10, when the effect control board 130 receives the special symbol determination command transmitted from the main control board 110, the confirmation display with the variation effect loss is performed. At this time, in the image display device, the effect design 70a of "753" which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the stop screen in the state where the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed) are displayed, and the voice output device 9 is displayed. Stop sound is output from. Further, "1" is displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second reservation number display area 70F. In addition, the sub-first variation display 81 has a lost display mode (non-display mode) that indicates a loss.

In addition, when the result of this variation effect is a big hit, when the effect control board 130 receives the special symbol determination command, the confirmation display in the big effect of the variation effect is performed. At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a such as the jackpot effect symbol "777" and the stop screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed), and the sub first variable display 81 Then, the jackpot display mode indicating that the jackpot is hit is displayed, and the stop sound is output from the audio output device 9.

At the timing of T11, when the fluctuation start command (effect symbol designating command, fluctuation pattern designating command) transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the reserved figure displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E is “0”. Then, the variation effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the holding icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, variation display is started on the sub first variation indicator 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during variation, and the sub first hold indicator 83 is displayed. , "0" is displayed.

At the timing of T4, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are in the initial light emission mode when the power is restored, but the special light emission mode different from the initial light emission mode when the light is turned off or the power is restored. Thus, it may be possible to grasp that the power restoration specification command has been received during the variation effect.

Further, in the case where there is a return abnormality in each type of accessory, as in the specific example shown in FIG. 95, FIG. 96, or FIG. Will be done.

Further, even if the execution time of the variable effect recognized by the effect control board 130 has elapsed before the special symbol confirmation command is received, the temporary stop display and the stop display of the effect symbol 70a are not performed, The variation display on the sub first variation display or the sub second variation display is not ended.

(Specific example 4 in the case where only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 105 shows a power supply to the main control board 110 during the execution of the jackpot performance (during the power supply to the main control board 110 and the performance control board 130) after the origin return processing and the initial operation processing have already been completed. It is a figure which shows the specific example 4 in the case of restarting only after supply is stopped.

Here, during the execution of the big hit, which is one of the control states in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and the backup power source is stopped. The case where the supply of the main power supply is restarted in the state where the supply of the power is continued will be described.

At the timing of T1, the jackpot effect (here, the first round effect) is being executed, the jackpot effect (round effect) screen is displayed on the image display device, and the jackpot special symbol TZ (“777”) Is stopped (still). Further, "1" is displayed as the reserved number in the first reserved number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed as the reserved number in the second reserved number display area 70F.

At this time, the jackpot effect sound (BGM, SE, etc.) is output from the audio output device 9, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are lit during the jackpot. In addition, the sub-first variation display 81 displays a big hit (lights up).

At the timing of T2, if only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the jackpot performance screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variation) is displayed. The display 81, the sub second change indicator 82, the sub first hold indicator 83, the sub second hold indicator 84, the sub general figure change indicator 85, the sub general figure hold indicator 86) also maintain the display contents. ..

When the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted at the timing of T3, the processing for recovering the control state of the game is performed without initializing the main RAM 110c. At this time, in the image display device, the state in which the jackpot effect screen is displayed is maintained, and the sub information display device 80 (the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, the sub first pending display 83, The second sub-holding indicator 84, the sub-universal figure variation display 85, the sub-universal figure holding indicator 86) also maintain the display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-up recovery designation command for mid-big hit transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the origin of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. The return operation to the position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED is alternately lighted in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED is lighted in blue as initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lighted in white as initial light emission, On the image display device, a returning-in-progress screen for a big hit medium including the characters "Please restart the game (middle big hit)" is displayed, and the sound output device 9 becomes silent. In addition, the sub information display device 80 (the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, the sub first hold display 83, the sub second hold display 84, the sub public figure change display 85, the sub public display). The figure hold display 86) maintains the display content.

It should be noted that instead of displaying the returning screen for mid-hit, the same returning screen as when the power supply to the main control board 110 (only the main power supply) is stopped during the variation effect shown in FIG. 104 is displayed. You may do it.

When the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed at the timing of T5, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started, and the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed at the timing of T6. Then, the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started.

At the timing of T7, the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends, and at the timing of T8, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 starts.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 ends, the initial operation process ends, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED complete the initial light emission and are turned off. Becomes

At the timing of T10, when the effect control board 130 receives the second round opening (second round) round designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the jackpot effect (round effect) is restarted. At this time, in the image display device, a special big hit effect (round effect) screen is displayed instead of the normal big hit effect screen, and the big hit special symbol TZ (“777”) is not displayed.

Further, "1" is displayed as the reserved number in the first reserved number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed as the reserved number in the second reserved number display area 70F. Furthermore, the jackpot effect sound (BGM, SE, etc.) is output from the audio output device 9, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during the jackpot.

After that, when the effect control board 130 receives a round designation command for the third opening (third round) transmitted from the main control board 110, the image display device replaces the special jackpot effect (round effect) screen. , Ordinary jackpot effect (round effect) screen is displayed.

In addition, when the production control board 130 receives the ending designation command, not when the round control command is received by the production control board 130 when the special jackpot production screen is displayed, the normal ending production screen is displayed. Will be displayed.

Moreover, instead of switching to the normal jackpot effect screen when the round designation command is received while the special jackpot effect screen is displayed, the special jackpot effect screen is displayed until the ending control command is received by the effect control board 130. May be continued, or a special jackpot production screen may be continued until the production control board 130 receives a customer waiting state designation command or a variation start command after the jackpot game is over.

Also, at the timing of T4, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are in the initial light emission mode when the power is restored, but the special light emission mode different from the initial light emission mode when the light is turned off or the power is restored. Thus, it may be possible to grasp that the power restoration specification command has been received during the variation effect.

Further, in the case where there is a return abnormality in each type of accessory, as in the specific example shown in FIG. 95, FIG. 96, or FIG. Will be done.

102 to 105, when various commands (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) are restored when the power-on designation command or the power restoration designation command is received. However, the initial operation of various accessory may be performed without performing the return operation.

Thus, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, when the game control state is initialized, the identification characters (numbers, alphabets, etc.) in the plurality of effect symbols 70a are the first combination. The first initial effect symbol (“135”) is displayed, and when the control state of the game is restored, the second initial effect symbol (““ in which the identification characters in the plurality of effect symbols 70a are the second combination) is displayed. 753") is displayed. By doing so, it becomes possible to easily understand whether the game control state has been initialized or the game control state has been restored.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, when the game control state is restored, a specific display suggesting resumption of power supply is displayed before displaying the effect design 70a on the image display device. It is possible, and the display mode of the specific display (only the initial screen is displayed) to be displayed on the image display device when the customer wait state is restored, and during the variable display of the special symbol and without holding memory/with holding memory The display mode (display of initial screen+returning screen) of the specific display to be displayed on the image display device later is made different. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from decreasing when the stopped power supply is resumed and the control state of the game is restored.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, the holding icon display area (first holding icon display area 70B, second holding icon display area 70D) and the sub holding display (sub first holding display) It is possible to perform a hold display indicating the number of hold storages on each of the device 83 and the sub second hold display 84), and the power supply stopped when there is a hold storage is restarted to restore the game control state. In this case, the hold display is not executed in the hold icon display area when the specific display (display of the returning screen) that indicates the resumption of power supply is being performed on the image display device, but the hold display is executed in the sub-hold display. It is possible. By doing this, when the stopped power supply is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, it is possible to ascertain the number of holding memories before the end of the specific display, which reduces the interest of the game. It becomes possible to suppress.

According to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, when the power supply stopped during the customer waiting demonstration production is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the customer waiting demonstration production screen is displayed again. Instead, the second standby screen in a state where the effect symbol 70a of "753" which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration is stopped and displayed (still display) is displayed. By doing this, it is not necessary to consider whether or not the state before the power supply is stopped is in the customer waiting demonstration production, and in the display control when the game control state is restored after the power supply is restarted. It is possible to reduce the processing load.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, as for the sub fluctuation indicator (the sub first fluctuation indicator 81, the sub second fluctuation indicator 82), the power supply which is stopped during the fluctuation production is restarted. Then, when the control state of the game is restored, even if the variable display of the special symbol is being executed (the returning screen is displayed), the variable display during the variable display of the special symbol ( (Blinking display) is not performed. By doing so, it becomes possible to reduce the processing load when the control state of the game is restored after the power supply is resumed.

In addition, when the variation display of the special symbol is executed when the control state of the game is restored (the returning screen is displayed), the sub variation display (sub first variation display 81, sub second variation display) The variable display (blinking display) may be performed in step 82). By doing this, it becomes possible to easily understand that the variable display of the special symbol is being executed when the control state of the game is restored.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, for the sub-holding indicators (the sub-first holding indicator 83, the sub-second holding indicator 84), the returning screen is displayed on the image display device. From that time (before the variable display is performed on the sub variable display and at the time of receiving the special symbol storage designation command), the display mode showing the number of holdings is set. By doing so, it is possible to make the player grasp the number of holdings immediately after the control state of the game is restored, and it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from decreasing.

In addition, when the sub-variation display device (sub first variation display device 81, sub second variation display device 82) performs the variation display (blinking display) when the returning screen is displayed on the image display device, The sub-holding indicator (sub-first holding indicator 83, sub-second holding indicator 84) may be configured to display the number of holdings at the start of this variable display. In this way, when the control state of the game is restored, the variable display of the special symbol is being executed, and it is possible to easily grasp the number of holdings at that time.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, when the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c, the power is restored to the customer waiting state without the initialization of the main RAM 110c. At the same timing as that of the case, that is, immediately after the power is turned on (the timing at which the initial screen is displayed), the returning operation of various types of accessory is performed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the control of the returning operation of various accessory from becoming complicated, and it is possible to reduce the processing load involved in the returning operation of various accessory.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, in the case of power-on with initialization of the main RAM 110c or power restoration without initialization of the main RAM 110c, various types of accessory (the first movable member 73, During the returning operation of the second movable member 74 and the effect button 17), the light emitting portions (first movable member LED, second movable member LED, effect button LED) of various types of characters are turned off. ing. By doing so, it is possible to distinguish from the initial movement of various types of accessory, and it is possible to grasp that the returning movement is being performed.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, when there is a return abnormality in any of the various types of winning objects, the light emitting unit of the winning role of the returning abnormality blinks in red (error notification mode) By doing so, the abnormality is notified. By doing so, it is possible to grasp the accessory having the abnormal return.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, when the abnormality notification is given by blinking the light emitting unit of the accessory having the return abnormality in red, until the next variation effect is started. Abnormality notification continues. By doing so, it becomes possible to reliably notify the accessory that has the abnormal return.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in the accessory, a return operation may be performed to return the accessory having the return abnormality to the origin position at the timing when the next variation effect is started. Further, in the case where the abnormality notification is performed by blinking the light emitting portion of the accessory having the recovery abnormality in red, the abnormality notification may be canceled when the effect button 17 is operated.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, when the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c, the power is restored to the customer waiting state without the initialization of the main RAM 110c. At the same timing as that of the case, that is, immediately after the power is turned on (timing at which the initial screen is displayed), the initial operation of various types of accessory is performed. By doing so, it is not necessary to complicate the control related to the initial operation of the various accessory, and it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the initial operation of the various accessory.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, for the board accessory (the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74), power-on accompanying initialization of the main RAM 110c and initialization of the main RAM 110c are performed. In the case of power recovery without accompanying, the sub-holding indicator (sub-first holding indicator 83, sub-second holding indicator 84) becomes a display mode indicating the number of holdings (the returning screen is displayed on the image display device). The initial operation is performed before. By doing so, it becomes easy to avoid the inconvenience that the progress of the production is hindered by the initial operation of the board accessory. It is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, with respect to the frame accessory (effect button 17), when the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c or the power is restored without the initialization of the main RAM 110c. , The sub-holding indicator (the first sub-holding indicator 83, the second sub-holding indicator 84) performs the initial operation before the display mode showing the number of holdings (the returning screen is displayed on the image display device) It is like this. By doing so, it becomes easy to avoid the inconvenience that the progress of the production is hindered by the initial movement of the frame accessory. It is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

Moreover, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, even when the stop screen is displayed after the display of the returning screen, the stop sound of the effect design 70a is output. By doing so, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand that the variation effect that was being executed when the power supply was stopped, and it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing. Become.

When the stop screen is displayed after the returning screen is displayed, the stop sound of the effect design 70a may not be output.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, even when the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be received, the restoration operation, initial operation, Also, the initial light emission is executed and the initial screen is continuously displayed. By doing so, it becomes possible to understand that an abnormality has occurred in which a command cannot be received when the power is turned on.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, even when the initial screen is continuously displayed because the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be received. When the special control memory designation command based on the winning of the game ball to the starting opening from the main control board 110 is received when the effect control board 130 is in a control state capable of executing the effect according to the command, the winning sound is received. Is to be output. By doing so, it becomes possible to accurately inform that the game ball has won the start opening even when the initial screen is displayed.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, even when the initial screen is displayed because the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be received, When the control board 130 receives the fluctuation start command from the main control board 110 after the control state in which the effect according to the command can be executed is achieved, the fluctuation effect is executed without displaying the standby screen. There is. By doing so, the start of the variation effect will be executed without delay, and it is possible to execute the variation effect from the beginning to the end within the variation time range of the special symbol.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, the effect control board 130 sends a command such as a return operation of various types of accessories and a customer waiting state after completion of initial operations (including initial light emission). Even during the control state in which the corresponding effect can be executed, only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and the main control board 110 issues a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation. When the command is received again, the returning operation of various accessory and the initial operation (initial light emission) are executed again. By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without being ignored, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 are deviated, the deviation is caused. Can be eliminated.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, the effect control board 130 responds to the command such as the returning operation of various types of accessory and the fluctuating effect after the initial operation (including initial light emission) is completed. Even in the control state in which the performance can be executed, the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and the power-on designation command or the power restoration designation command is issued from the main control board 110. When is received again, the returning operation of various accessory and the initial operation (initial light emission) are executed again. By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without being ignored, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 are deviated, the deviation is caused. Can be eliminated.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, the effect control board 130 responds to the command such as a jackpot game during the return operation of various types of accessories and the initial operation (including initial light emission). Even in the control state in which the performance can be executed, the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and the power-on designation command or the power restoration designation command is issued from the main control board 110. When is received again, the returning operation of various accessory and the initial operation (including initial light emission) are executed again. By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without being ignored, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 are deviated, the deviation is caused. Can be eliminated

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, the effect control board 130 can perform the effect according to the command such as in the customer waiting state after the output of the initialization notification sound has already been completed. Even in the control state, when the power-on designation command is received from the main control board 110 by restarting after only stopping the power supply to the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output again. It is supposed to do. By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without being ignored, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 are deviated, the deviation is caused. Can be eliminated.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, the control in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, such as during the variable effect after the output of the initialization notification sound is already finished. Even in the state, when the power-on designation command is received from the main control board 110 by restarting after only stopping the power supply to the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output again. It is like this. By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without being ignored, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 are deviated, the deviation is caused. Can be eliminated.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, the control in which the effect control board 130 such as during the big hit game after the output of the initialization notification sound has already finished can execute the effect according to the command. Even in the state, when the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110 by restarting after only stopping the power supply to the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output again. It is supposed to do. By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without being ignored, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 are deviated, the deviation is caused. Can be eliminated.

When the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the initialization output sound is output from the audio output device 9 instead of executing the return operation, the initial operation, and the initial light emission of the various types of accessories. You may just do it.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, the effect control board 130 sends a command such as a return operation of various types of accessories and a customer waiting state after completion of initial operations (including initial light emission). Even during the control state in which the corresponding effect can be executed, the power-on instruction command is received again from the main control board 110 by restarting after only stopping the power supply to the main control board 110. In this case, the first standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen, and when the power restoration specification command is received again from the main control board 110, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. It is like this. By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without being ignored, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 are deviated, the deviation is caused. Can be eliminated.

It should be noted that the effect control board 130 is capable of executing an effect according to a command, such as a varying effect or a big hit effect after the return operation of various types of accessory and the initial operation (including initial light emission) have been completed. Even in the state, when the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110 by restarting after only stopping the power supply to the main control board 110, the initial screen is not displayed. The first standby screen is displayed. By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without being ignored, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 are deviated, the deviation is caused. Can be eliminated.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, the effect control board 130 responds to the command such as the returning operation of various types of accessory and the fluctuating effect after the initial operation (including initial light emission) is completed. Even in the control state in which the effect can be executed, the main control board 110 issues a power recovery designation command by restarting after only the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped. When receiving, the returning screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without being ignored, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 are deviated, the deviation is caused. Can be eliminated.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, the effect control board 130 responds to the command such as the returning operation of various accessory and the jackpot effect after the initial operation (including initial light emission) is already completed. Even in the control state in which the effect can be executed, the main control board 110 issues a power recovery designation command by restarting after only the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped. When received, the returning screen for mid-big hit is displayed without displaying the initial screen. By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without being ignored, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 are deviated, the deviation is caused. Can be eliminated.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, the effect control board 130, such as during a variable effect after the completion of the output of the initialization notification sound or during a big hit game, executes the effect according to the command. Even in the control state in which the power supply to the main control board 110 is possible, if the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110 by restarting after only stopping the power supply to the main control board 110, the initial screen is displayed. The first standby screen is displayed without being displayed, and when the power restoration specification command is received again from the main control board 110, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without being ignored, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 are deviated, the deviation is caused. Can be eliminated.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, the effect control is performed in the control state (customer waiting state, variable effect, jackpot effect) in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command. Even when the power supply to the main control board 130 is stopped while the power supply to the board 130 is continued, the display screen up to that point can be continuously displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the power supply to the main control means is stopped, and to prevent the interest of the game from decreasing.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, the effect control is performed in the control state (customer waiting state, variable effect, jackpot effect) in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command. Even when the power supply to the main control board 130 is stopped and then the power supply is restarted while the power supply to the board 130 is continued, the display screens up to that point can be continuously displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the power supply to the main control means is restarted, and to prevent the interest of the game from decreasing.

It should be noted that the control states in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command are the customer waiting state, the fluctuating effect, and the big hit effect. The command waiting state (for example, during display of the initial screen) may be included in the control state in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command.

In the present embodiment, the effect design 70a is composed of only the numbers (identification characters) of "1" to "9", but may be composed of numbers (identification characters)+characters (decoration portion). In this case, the character may be different for each number, such as "1" and the character A and "2" and the character B. In addition, in the normal game state, the effect symbol 70a is displayed as a number + character, and in the specific game state (low accuracy time short game state, high accuracy time short game state), the effect symbol 70a is a number only or a character smaller than the number + normal game state. May be displayed with.

Further, three kinds of effect modes A to C in the normal game state may be provided, and at least one of the design of the numbers of the effect design 70a and the design of the character may be different for each effect mode. Further, two types of effect modes D to E in the highly accurate short time game state may be provided, and at least one of the design of the numbers of the effect design 70a and the design of the character may be different for each effect mode. Further, two kinds of effect modes F to G in the low certainty time short game state may be provided, and at least one of the design of the numbers of the effect design 70a and the design of the character may be different for each effect mode.

In this case, when the power supply is stopped in any of the effect modes A to C in the normal game state, and then the power supply is restarted to restore the control state of the game, the effect mode A is set without fail. At the same time, after the display of the initial screen or the returning screen is finished, the effect design 70a corresponding to the effect mode A is displayed in a static manner without being rocked. On the other hand, when the control state of the game is initialized, the effect mode A is always set, and after the display of the initial screen, the effect pattern 70a corresponding to the effect mode A is statically displayed without swinging. Will be.

When the power supply is stopped in any of the production modes D to E in the high-accuracy time short game state, the power supply is restarted after that and the game control state is restored, the production mode D is always Along with the setting, after the display of the initial screen or the returning screen is finished, the effect symbol 70a corresponding to the effect mode D is statically displayed without swinging. On the other hand, when the control state of the game is initialized, the effect mode A is always set, and after the display of the initial screen, the effect pattern 70a corresponding to the effect mode A is statically displayed without swinging. Will be.

Furthermore, in the low accuracy time short game state, when the power supply is stopped in any of the production modes F to G, and then the power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the production mode F is always Along with the setting, after the display of the initial screen or the returning screen is finished, the effect symbol 70a corresponding to the effect mode F is displayed in a static state without being rocked. On the other hand, when the control state of the game is initialized, the effect mode A is always set, and after the display of the initial screen, the effect pattern 70a corresponding to the effect mode A is statically displayed without swinging. Will be.

Further, when the effect design 70a is reduced and displayed in the SP reach effect in the normal game state or the SPSP reach effect, the effect pattern 70a is changed to only numbers, and the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect is finished and the effect pattern 70a is provisional. When the stop display (swing display) is performed, the effect symbol 70a may be returned to the number+character.

In this case, during SP reach or SPSP reach in the normal game state, that is, the power supply is stopped when the effect design 70a is changed to only numbers, then the power supply is restarted and the game control state is restored. When this is done, after the display of the returning screen is finished, the effect symbol 70a of the number and the character is displayed in a static manner without being rocked. On the other hand, when the control state of the game is initialized, after the display of the initial screen is finished, the effect symbol 70a of the number+character is displayed in a static manner without being rocked.

Furthermore, during SP reach or SPSP reach in a specific game state (low-probability time short game state, high-precision time short game state), that is, power supply is stopped when the effect symbol 70a is only numbers, and then power supply is performed. When the control state of the game is restored by resuming, after the display of the returning screen is finished, the effect design 70a of only the numbers is displayed in a static manner without swinging. On the other hand, when the control state of the game is initialized, after the display of the initial screen is finished, the effect symbol 70a of the number+character is displayed in a static manner without being rocked.

<Content 1 of the invention described in the present embodiment>
In the conventional gaming machine, when the start condition is satisfied, the determination information as to whether or not to execute the special game advantageous to the player is acquired, and the determination information is stored. Then, when the determination condition is satisfied, the stored determination information is determined, a variation effect is executed according to the result of the determination, and a special game is executed when the variation effect has a special result. Some of these gaming machines display a pending image corresponding to undetermined determination information (see, for example, JP-A-2015-33530). In addition, the gaming machine improves the interest of the game by changing the normal hold image to a hold image in a display mode that suggests that the variation effect may have a special result. However, there is still room for improvement in the above-mentioned gaming machine in order to improve the interest of the game.

As a first configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a main control unit (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a signal from the main control unit. In a gaming machine provided with sub-control means (effect control section 130m) for controlling the effect of the game based on (command etc.), is the main control means performing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player? The subordinate control unit includes a determination unit (main CPU 110a) for determining whether or not the right for determination and a holding unit (main RAM 110c) capable of holding the right for the determination. Image display means (display/sound control unit 140) for displaying the (holding icon) on the display means (first image display device 70) and a predetermined notification effect (effect output device 9) on the effect means (sound output device 9) in the course of the game. And an image display means for displaying an image to be displayed on the display means at each predetermined frame update timing. It is possible to perform a change effect (icon change effect) that is configured to be updated and changes from the hold image to a special hold image indicating the possibility of performing the special game, and the change effect is the A first change effect (change effect at the time of winning) executed at a frame update timing in response to reception of a command (starting mouth winning award designation command) transmitted from the main control means and indicating that the right has occurred; Second change effect (normal change pattern 02, character action change pattern 01, and symbol action change) executed at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the command (variation pattern designation command) indicating the result of determination transmitted from Pattern 01), the effect execution means starts the notification effect at a frame update timing at which the first change effect is started, and a frame update timing different from a frame update timing at which the first change effect ends. Then, the notification effect is ended. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a second configuration for solving the above problem, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a main control unit (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a signal from the main control unit. In a gaming machine provided with sub-control means (effect control section 130m) for controlling the effect of the game based on (command etc.), is the main control means performing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player? A determination means (main CPU 110a) for determining whether or not, a holding means (main RAM 110c) capable of holding the right of the determination, and a variable display of the symbol based on the result of the determination, and then the symbol is stopped and displayed. And a variation control means for controlling the image display means (display/display) to display a holding image (holding icon) corresponding to the held right on the display means (first image display device 70). A voice control unit 140), and a performance executing unit (display/voice control unit 140) for causing the production unit (voice output device 9) to execute a predetermined notification production (icon generation (change) notification sound) in the course of the game. The image display means is configured to update the image to be displayed on the display means each time a predetermined frame update timing is reached, and a special indication indicating whether or not the special game is performed from the reserved image. It is possible to perform a change effect (icon change effect) of changing to a hold image, and the change effect is a command (variation pattern designation command) indicating that the variable display of the symbols transmitted from the main control means is started. ) A first change effect (normal change pattern 01) to be executed at a frame update timing according to the reception of a frame), and a predetermined command after receiving a command (fluctuation pattern designation command) indicating the result of the determination transmitted from the main control means. And a second change effect (normal change pattern 02, character effect change pattern 01, and symbol effect change pattern 01) executed at the frame update timing, the effect execution means starts the first change effect. The notification effect is started at a frame update timing, and the notification effect is ended at a frame update timing different from the frame update timing at which the first change effect is ended. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a third configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a main control unit (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a signal from the main control unit. In a gaming machine provided with sub-control means (effect control section 130m) for controlling the effect of the game based on (command etc.), is the main control means performing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player? A determination means (main CPU 110a) for determining whether or not, a holding means (main RAM 110c) capable of holding the right of the determination, and a variable display of the symbol based on the result of the determination, and then the symbol is stopped and displayed. And a variation control unit (main CPU 110a) for causing the sub-control unit to hold the pre-determination hold image (hold icon) corresponding to the right that is being held, and after the determination is made for the right. Image display means (display/sound control section 140) for displaying the post-judgment reserved image (the relevant icon) corresponding to the right on the display means (first image display device 70), and the rendering means (in the course of the game) And a sound execution device (display/sound control unit 140) for causing the sound output device 9) to execute a predetermined notification effect (icon generation (change) notification sound), and the image display means has a predetermined frame update timing. Each time it is configured to update the image to be displayed on the display means, the pre-judgment special hold image or the post-judgment pre-judgment image or the judgment post-judgment image showing the possibility of performing the special game It is possible to perform a change effect (icon change effect) that changes to a special reserved image, and the change effect is a command transmitted from the main control means (variation pattern designation command) when the variable display of the symbol starts. ), which is predetermined at the time of receiving the first change effect (normal change pattern 01) executed at the frame update timing according to the above) and the command (fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control means and indicating the result of the determination. And a second change effect (normal change pattern 02, character effect change pattern 01, and symbol effect change pattern 01) to be executed at a predetermined frame update timing, and the effect execution means starts the first change effect. Than the case where the notification effect is started at the frame update timing that is performed, the notification effect is ended at a frame update timing different from the frame update timing when the first change effect ends, and the pre-determination special reserved image is changed. If you change to the special reserved image after the above judgment , The rate at which the second change effect is executed is high. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and signals from the main control means. In a gaming machine provided with sub-control means (effect control section 130m) for controlling the effect of the game based on (command etc.), is the main control means performing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player? The subordinate control unit corresponds to the reserved right, which includes a judging unit (main CPU 110a) for judging whether or not the right to be judged and a holding unit (main RAM 110c) for holding a predetermined number of the right. Image display means (display/sound control unit 140) for displaying a hold image (hold icon) on the display means (first image display device 70), and predetermined notification to the production means (sound output device 9) in the course of the game. And an effect display means (display/voice control section 140) for executing an effect (icon generation (change) notification sound), and the image display means causes the display means to display each time a predetermined frame update timing is reached. It is possible to perform a change effect (icon change effect) that is configured to update the image and changes from the reserved image to a special reserved image indicating the possibility of performing the special game, and the change effect is When the number of the reserved rights is changed, the frame update timing is executed according to the command (starting mouth winning designation command, variation pattern designation command, special symbol storage designation command) transmitted from the main control means. Predetermined predetermined frame update after receiving the first change effect (change effect at winning, normal change pattern 01) and the command (variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control means and indicating the result of the determination A second change effect (normal change pattern 02, character action change pattern 01, and symbol action change pattern 01) executed at a timing, and the display mode of the special reserved image is the first display mode (blue character icon). And a second display mode (red character icon) that is more likely to play the special game than the first display mode, and the effect execution means is a frame update timing at which the first change effect is started. Starts the notification effect, ends the notification effect at a frame update timing different from the frame update timing at which the first change effect ends, and causes the second change effect to be generated more than when the first change effect is executed. Is more likely to change to the second display mode, and the first change When changing to the second display mode in the production, the special game is performed when the number of the reserved rights is a second number that is larger than the first number than when the number is the first number. You're more likely to do that. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

The "special pending image" and "pre-judgment special pending image" mean that the shape is changed from the normal holding icon, the color is changed, or a color indicating the jackpot winning expectation degree around the holding icon. The one that displays an effect, the one that displays a character that indicates the jackpot winning expectation around (near) the hold icon, and the character image that suggests an effect to be executed around (near) the hold icon (for example, "SP"). And "Pseudo-relation" etc.) are included.

In addition, the "special reserved image after determination" means that the shape is changed from the normal icon, the color is changed, or the effect of the color indicating the jackpot winning expectation degree is displayed around the icon, A character that indicates the expected jackpot winning degree is displayed around (near) the icon, and a character image that suggests an effect to be executed around (near) the icon (for example, "SP" or "pseudo-link"). ) Is included.

The “first display mode” includes a special icon (flashing CD icon), a blue character icon, a green character icon, and the like.
The "second display mode" includes a red character icon, a rainbow character icon, and the like.

Further, the “post-judgment hold image” and the “post-judgment special hold image” are displayed from the start to the end of the fluctuating effect, are displayed for a predetermined period after the start of the fluctuating effect, and The specific period (SP reach, SPSP reach, etc.) during the performance includes that the display is erased.

<Content 2 of the invention described in the present embodiment>
In the conventional gaming machine, the determination information acquired by the satisfaction of the acquisition condition is stored as a hold storage, and it is determined whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the determination information, and the determination result is stored. It is common to execute the variable effect based on the above. In such a gaming machine, by performing an increase display or a decrease display of the hold image corresponding to each of the hold memories, or by displaying an execution image corresponding to the hold memory for which the variation effect has been executed, There is one that allows the player to grasp the progress of the game (see, for example, JP-A-2017-018225). However, the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 has a problem in that it is difficult to immediately grasp the number of reserved memories when the number of reserved memories changes.

As a first configuration for solving the above problems, a main control unit (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game effect control based on signals (commands, etc.) from the main control unit. In the gaming machine provided with the sub-control means (production control board 130), the main control means has the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (entering the game ball into the starting opening). ), a determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, and a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been executed as a pending storage, The sub-control unit includes a variation effect execution unit capable of executing a variation effect according to the result of the determination on the image display unit (image display device), and first holding information (holding number) indicating the number of holding storages. Number) and information display means capable of displaying second hold information (hold icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the hold storages, and the image display means has a predetermined frame update timing (1/ 30 ms), the display image is updated every time, and the information display means can execute the reduced display of the first suspended information and the reduced display of the second suspended information when the number of the suspended memories decreases. Yes, the reduction display of the first suspension information (1 is subtracted from the frame update timing when the reduction display of the second suspension information (moving to the center of the adjacent display unit in the suspension icon display area) is completed. The update timing to the reserved number) is completed earlier than the frame update timing. By doing so, it becomes easy to grasp the number of reserved memories.

As a second configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game effect control based on a signal (command or the like) from the main control means. In the gaming machine provided with the sub-control means (production control board 130), the main control means has the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (entering the game ball into the starting opening). ), a determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, and a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been executed as a pending storage, The sub-control unit includes a variation effect execution unit capable of executing a variation effect according to the result of the determination on the image display unit (image display device), and first holding information (holding number) indicating the number of holding storages. Number) and information display means capable of displaying second hold information (hold icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the hold storages, and the image display means has a predetermined frame update timing (1/ 30 ms), the display image is updated every time, and the information display means displays the reduced display of the first hold information and the second hold information when the variation effect is started when the number of the hold storages decreases. It is possible to execute a change display that changes to the execution information (the icon), and the change display of the second hold information to the execution information (movement from the hold icon display area to the center of the icon display area) is completed. The frame update timing at which the reduced display of the first hold information (update to the hold number subtracted by 1) is completed is earlier than the different frame update timing. By doing so, it becomes easy to grasp the number of reserved memories.

As a third configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a game effect control based on signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. In the gaming machine provided with the sub-control means (production control board 130), the main control means has the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (entering the game ball into the starting opening). ), a determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, and a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been executed as a pending storage, The sub-control unit includes a variation effect execution unit capable of executing a variation effect according to the result of the determination on the image display unit (image display device), and first holding information (holding number) indicating the number of holding storages. Number) and information display means capable of displaying second hold information (hold icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the hold storages, and the image display means has a predetermined frame update timing (1/ 30 ms), the display image is updated every time, and the information display means can execute the reduced display of the first suspended information and the reduced display of the second suspended information when the number of the suspended memories decreases. Yes, when the number of the pending storages increases, the increasing display of the first pending information and the increasing display of the second pending information can be executed, and the pending storage of the pending storage is displayed during the decreasing display of the second pending information. If the number is increased, the first hold is performed even before the frame update timing at which the reduced display of the second hold information (moving to the center of the adjacent display unit in the hold icon display area) is completed. The increase display of information (update to the reserved digit to which 1 is added) is started. By doing so, it becomes easy to grasp the number of reserved memories.

As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a game effect control based on signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. In the gaming machine provided with the sub-control means (production control board 130), the main control means has the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (entering the game ball into the starting opening). ), a determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, and a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been executed as a pending storage, The sub-control unit includes a variation effect execution unit capable of executing a variation effect according to the result of the determination on the image display unit (image display device), and first holding information (holding number) indicating the number of holding storages. Number) and information display means capable of displaying second hold information (hold icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the hold storages, and the image display means has a predetermined frame update timing (1/ 30 ms), the display image is updated every time, and the information display unit displays the reduced display of the first suspension information and the second suspension information where the variable display is started when the number of the suspension storages decreases. It is possible to execute a change display for changing the execution information (the icon), and it is possible to execute an increase display of the first hold information and an increase display of the second hold information when the number of the hold memories increases. Yes, if the number of the held storages increases during the change display of the second hold information, the decrease display of the second hold information (movement from the hold icon display area to the center of the icon display area) is completed. Even before the frame update timing becomes, the increase display of the first hold information (update to the hold digit incremented by 1) is started. By doing so, it becomes easy to grasp the number of reserved memories.

As a fifth configuration for solving the above problem, main game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and game performance control based on signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means In the gaming machine provided with the sub-control means (production control board 130), the main control means has the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (entering the game ball into the starting opening). ), a determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, and a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been executed as a pending storage, The sub-control unit includes a variation effect execution unit capable of executing a variation effect according to the result of the determination on the image display unit (image display device), and first holding information (holding number) indicating the number of holding storages. Number) and information display means capable of displaying second hold information (hold icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the hold storages, and the image display means has a predetermined frame update timing (1/ 30 ms), the display image is updated every time, and the information display unit can execute the increase display of the first hold information and the increase display of the second hold information when the number of the hold memories increases. Yes, if the number of the held storages increases during the execution of the variable effect, the increase display of the second holding information (enlargement of the holding icon additionally displayed in the holding icon display area to the normal size) is completed. The frame update timing at which the increased display of the first hold information (update to the hold digit by which 1 is added) is completed is earlier than the frame update timing at. By doing so, it becomes easy to grasp the number of reserved memories.

As a sixth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game effect control based on signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. In the gaming machine provided with the sub-control means (production control board 130), the main control means has the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (entering the game ball into the starting opening). ), a determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, and a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been executed as a pending storage, The sub-control unit includes a variation effect execution unit capable of executing a variation effect according to the result of the determination on the image display unit (image display device), and first holding information (holding number) indicating the number of holding storages. Number) and information display means capable of displaying second holding information (holding icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the holding storages, and the variation effect executing means is provided during execution of the variation effect. It is possible to execute a specific effect (SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, full rotation reach effect) that expects the execution of the special game, and the information display means, when the number of the hold memories increases, the first hold information. And an increase display of the second hold information can be executed, and when the number of the hold memories increases during the execution of the specific effect, the increase display of the first hold information (1 is added. Update to the hold number) is executed, but the increase display of the second hold information is executed until a predetermined condition is satisfied (specific effect ends, the lost effect design or the jackpot effect design that has been reduced and displayed is enlarged) It is supposed not to be done. By doing so, it becomes easy to grasp the number of reserved memories.

As a seventh configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a game effect control based on signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. In the gaming machine provided with the sub-control means (production control board 130), the main control means has the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (entering the game ball into the starting opening). ), a determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, and a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been executed as a pending storage, It is provided with a normal game state and a game state control means capable of controlling to a specific game state which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and the sub control means displays a variation effect according to the result of the determination. Fluctuation effect execution means that can be executed by the display means (image display device), first holding information (holding number) indicating the number of the holding storages, and second holding information indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the holding storages ( And an information display unit capable of displaying a hold icon), wherein the information display unit displays an increase display of the first hold information and an increase display of the second hold information when the number of the hold storages increases. The storage means stores the determination information based on the satisfaction of the first acquisition condition (the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening) as the first reserved memory, and the second acquisition condition is satisfied. The determination information based on (entering the game ball into the second starting opening) is stored as a second holding memory, and when the number of the first holding memory is increased in the specific game state, the first holding information is stored. Although the increase display (update to the holding digit with 1 added) is executed, a predetermined condition is satisfied for the increase display of the second holding information (the last variation effect in the specific game state is finished, and the normal game state is returned). It won't run until you do. By doing so, it becomes easy to grasp the number of reserved memories.

(Content 3 of the invention described in the present embodiment)
In a conventional gaming machine, it is general that a gaming machine can determine whether to execute a special game advantageous to a player based on the acquired determination information and execute the special game according to the result of the determination. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that initializes the control state of the game after starting the power supply or restores the state before the stop of the power supply (for example, JP-A-2017-189604). (See the official gazette). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is a problem that it is difficult to know whether the game control state has been initialized or the game control state has been restored.

As a first configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable) capable of operating (moving, emitting light) in a predetermined mode. A member 74, an effect button 17), and an initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after starting the power supply or restoring the state before the stop of the power supply. , Production control capable of performing an initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the movable effect means after the start of power supply, and performing the effect operation (effect operation, effect light emission) of the movable effect means during execution of a game. Means (production control board 130), and the production control means, when the control state of the game is initialized, and when the control state of the game is restored, the operation mode of the initial operation (operation Mode, light emission mode, etc.). By doing so, it becomes possible to easily understand whether the game control state has been initialized or the game control state has been restored.

As a second configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, an operating means (production button 17) that can be operated by the player and can emit light in a predetermined mode, and power. Initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of the supply or restoring the state before the stop of the power supply, and the operation means of the operating means after the start of the power supply. The effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing the initial light emission and effect light emission of the operating means during the execution of the game is provided, and the effect control means initializes the control state of the game. The light emitting mode (light emitting mode or the like) of the initial light emission is made different depending on whether the game control state is restored or not. By doing so, it becomes possible to easily understand whether the game control state has been initialized or the game control state has been restored.

As a third configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, movable effect means (first movable member 73) that can operate in a predetermined manner and can emit light in a predetermined manner. , A second movable member 74), and an initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of the power supply or restoring the state before the stop of the power supply. , Production control means (production control board 130) capable of performing the initial operation and the initial light emission of the movable production means after the start of the power supply, and performing the production operation and the production light emission of the movable production means during the execution of the game. ) And, the effect control means, when the control state of the game is initialized and when the control state of the game is restored, the operation mode of the initial operation of the movable effect means (the number of steps or Although the operation mode such as the operation of each process is the same, the light emission mode (light emission mode and the like) of the initial light emission of the movable effect means is different. By doing so, it becomes possible to easily understand whether the game control state has been initialized or the game control state has been restored.

As a fourth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, movable effect means (first movable member 73) capable of operating in a predetermined manner and capable of emitting light in a predetermined manner. , A second movable member 74), and an initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of the power supply or restoring the state before the stop of the power supply. , An effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing the initial light emission of the movable effect means after the start of power supply and performing the effect light emission of the movable effect means during the execution of the game, When the production means includes a first movable production means (first movable member 73) and a second movable production means (second movable member 74), the production control means initializes the game control state. In the case where the control state of the game is restored, at least a part of the light emission mode of the initial light emission in the first movable effect means is the same, but the light emission mode of the initial light emission in the second movable effect means. Are different. By doing so, it becomes possible to easily understand whether the game control state has been initialized or the game control state has been restored.

As a fifth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, it is advantageous for the player based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition. A determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game), and initialize the control state of the game after starting the power supply, or stop the power supply. Initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of restoring the previous state, and variable display of a plurality of effect symbols displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means. The production control means (production control board 130) capable of performing accompanying variable production is provided, and the plurality of production symbols include identification characters (numbers, alphabets, etc.) that can identify each, and the production is performed. When the control state of the game is initialized, the control means sets the identification characters in the plurality of effect symbols displayed on the display means to the first combination (for example, “135”), and the control state of the game. When is restored, the identification characters in the plurality of effect symbols displayed on the display means are set to the second combination (for example, “753”). By doing so, it becomes possible to easily understand whether the game control state has been initialized or the game control state has been restored.

(Content 4 of the invention described in the present embodiment)
In the conventional gaming machines, a gaming machine is generally used which initializes the control state of the game after starting the power supply or restores the state before the stop of the power supply. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that performs an initial operation of the movable effect means after the start of power supply (for example, see JP-A-2016-187648). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is a problem that a suitable initial operation may not be performed for the movable effect means.

As a first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, a first position (origin position) and a second position (position near the center of the first image display device 70) Between the movable effect means (the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74) operable between and, the control state of the game is initialized after the start of the power supply, or the state before the stop of the power supply is restored. With an initial processing means (main control board 110) that can be performed, an initial operation of the movable effect means is performed after the start of power supply, and an effect operation of the movable effect means can be performed during execution of a game. The control means (production control board 130) is provided, and the production control means has the movable production means in the second position at the start of power supply (power restoration) when the control state of the game is restored. In this case, the initial operation is performed after the returning operation of the movable effect means to the first position is performed. By doing so, it is possible to perform a suitable initial operation for the movable effect means.

As a second configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, a first position (origin position) and a second position (position near the center of the first image display device 70) Between the movable effect means (the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74) operable between and, the control state of the game is initialized after the start of the power supply, or the state before the stop of the power supply is restored. With an initial processing means (main control board 110) that can be performed, an initial operation of the movable effect means is performed after the start of power supply, and an effect operation of the movable effect means can be performed during execution of a game. The control means (production control board 130) is provided, and the production control means has the movable production means in the second position at the start of power supply (power restoration) when the control state of the game is restored. In this case, when the movable effect means returns to the first position and the movable effect means returns to the first position, the initial operation is performed, but when the movable effect means does not return to the first position. The initial operation is not performed. By doing so, it is possible to perform a suitable initial operation for the movable effect means.

As a third configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, a first position (origin position) and a second position (position near the center of the first image display device 70) Between the movable effect means (the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74) operable between and, the control state of the game is initialized after the start of the power supply, or the state before the stop of the power supply is restored. With an initial processing means (main control board 110) that can be performed, an initial operation of the movable effect means is performed after the start of power supply, and an effect operation of the movable effect means can be performed during execution of a game. Control means (production control board 130), the movable production means includes a first movable production means (first movable member 73) and a second movable production means (second movable member 74), The effect control means is such that the first movable effect means is at the second position and the second movable effect means is at the first position at the start of power supply (power supply recovery) when the control state of the game is restored. If the first movable effect means is returned to the first position, and the first movable effect means does not return to the first position, the initial operation of the first movable effect means is The initial operation of the second movable effect means is performed without performing the operation. By doing so, it is possible to perform a suitable initial operation for the movable effect means.

As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, a first position (origin position) and a second position (position near the center of the first image display device 70) Between the movable effect means (the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74) operable between and, the control state of the game is initialized after the start of the power supply, or the state before the stop of the power supply is restored. With an initial processing means (main control board 110) that can be performed, an initial operation of the movable effect means is performed after the start of power supply, and an effect operation of the movable effect means can be performed during execution of a game. Control means (production control board 130), the movable production means includes a first movable production means (first movable member 73) and a second movable production means (second movable member 74), The effect control means is such that the first movable effect means is at the second position and the second movable effect means is at the first position at the start of power supply (power supply recovery) when the control state of the game is restored. If the first movable effect means is returned to the first position, and if the first movable effect means does not return to the first position, the initial operation of the second movable effect means is performed. It is supposed not to do. By doing so, it is possible to perform a suitable initial operation for the movable effect means.

As a fifth configuration for solving the above problems, in a game machine capable of playing a game, a first position (origin position) and a second position (position near the center of the first image display device 70) Between the movable effect means (the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74) operable between and, the control state of the game is initialized after the start of the power supply, or the state before the stop of the power supply is restored. With an initial processing means (main control board 110) that can be performed, an initial operation of the movable effect means is performed after the start of power supply, and an effect operation of the movable effect means can be performed during execution of a game. Control means (production control board 130), the movable production means includes a first movable production means (first movable member 73) and a second movable production means (second movable member 74), The effect control means is such that the first movable effect means is in the second position and the second movable effect means is the first when the power supply is started (power is turned on) when the game control state is initialized. When it is in the position, the operation of returning the first movable effect means to the first position is performed, and when the first movable effect means does not return to the first position, the initial operation of the first movable effect means. Is performed, the initial operation of the second movable effect means is performed. By doing so, it is possible to perform a suitable initial operation for the movable effect means.

As a sixth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, a first position (origin position) and a second position (position near the center of the first image display device 70) Between the movable effect means (the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74) operable between and, the control state of the game is initialized after the start of the power supply, or the state before the stop of the power supply is restored. With an initial processing means (main control board 110) that can be performed, an initial operation of the movable effect means is performed after the start of power supply, and an effect operation of the movable effect means can be performed during execution of a game. Control means (production control board 130), and the movable production means includes a first movable production means (first movable member 73), a second position of the first movable production means, and a second position of itself. And a second movable effect means (second movable member 74) having an overlapping portion, and the effect control means, when the power supply is started (power is turned on) when the control state of the game is initialized, When the first movable effect producing means is in the second position and the second movable effect producing means is in the first position, a returning operation of the first movable effect producing means to the first position is performed to perform the first movable operation. If the rendering means does not return to the first position, the initial operation of the second movable rendering means is not performed. By doing so, it is possible to perform a suitable initial operation for the movable effect means.

(Content 5 of the invention described in the present embodiment)
In the conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the obtained determination information, and the variation accompanied by the variable display of the effect symbol displayed on the display means according to the result of the determination. A game machine capable of executing an effect is common. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that initializes the control state of the game after starting the power supply or restores the state before the stop of the power supply (for example, JP-A-2017-189604). (See the official gazette). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is room for improvement in the control of the display means when the power supply stopped during the fluctuation production is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, and the interest of the game is reduced. There was a problem that there is a possibility.

As a first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, it is advantageous for the player based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition. A determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game), and initialize the control state of the game after starting the power supply, or stop the power supply. Initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of restoring to the previous state, and fluctuation accompanied by variable display of the effect symbol displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means. The production control means (production control board 130) capable of performing the production is provided, and in the variation production, the production symbols displayed in the variation are displayed in a swinging manner (temporary stop display), and then static display ( It is possible to stop display), the effect control means, when the power supply stopped during the execution of the variable effect of swinging and displaying the effect symbol is resumed to restore the control state of the game, At the timing (when the special symbol confirmation command is received, when the customer waiting command is received), it is possible to statically display on the display means without swinging the effect symbol. By doing so, it is possible to let the player know that the variation effect that was being executed at the time when the power supply was stopped was completed, and it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

As a second configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, determination information (special figure determination) obtained by establishment of an acquisition condition (entering a game ball into a starting opening) Based on the information), the determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, and the control state of the game after the start of power supply. Initial processing means (main control board 110) that can be initialized or restored to the state before the stop of power supply, and display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means. And a production control means (production control board 130) capable of performing a variation production accompanied by a variation display of a plurality of production symbols displayed, and in the variation production, a reach state is achieved by a part of the production symbols. When the reach control is resumed by restarting the supply of power stopped during the execution of the reach effect, the effect control means includes a reach variation effect for forming and displaying the reach effect, and a predetermined timing ( It is possible to display a combination of the effect symbols different from the reach combination by the effect symbol that was formed and displayed in the reach state when receiving the special symbol confirmation command and the customer waiting command) in the stationary state on the display means. .. By doing so, it is possible to let the player know that the variation effect that was being executed at the time when the power supply was stopped was completed, and it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

(Content 6 of the invention described in the present embodiment)
In the conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the obtained determination information, and the variation accompanied by the variable display of the effect symbol displayed on the display means according to the result of the determination. A game machine capable of executing an effect is common. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that initializes the control state of the game after starting the power supply or restores the state before the stop of the power supply (for example, JP-A-2017-189604). (See the official gazette). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is room for improvement in the control of the display unit when the stopped power supply is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, which may reduce the interest of the game. There was a problem that there is.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, determination information (special figure determination) obtained by establishment of an acquisition condition (entering a game ball into a starting opening) Information) as a storage memory (main control board 110), and determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player based on the determination information (main control board 110). Main control board 110), initialization processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of the power supply, or for restoring the state before the stop of the power supply, and the determination of the determination means Depending on the result, it is provided with effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing variable effect accompanied by variable display of effect symbols displayed on the display means (image display device), and in the state of the gaming machine. Are a customer waiting state in which the variation effect is not executed, a first state which is an execution period of the variation effect in a state where the hold memory is not present, and an execution period of the variation effect in a state where the hold memory is present. Including the second state, the effect control means, when the control state of the game is restored, it is possible to perform a specific display (display of the initial screen, etc.) before displaying the effect design on the display means. And a mode of the specific display (only the display of the initial screen) when the power supply stopped in the customer waiting state is restarted and restored to the customer waiting state, and stopped in the first state or the second state The display mode of the specific display (display of initial screen+returning screen) when the power supply is restarted and restored to the first state or the second state is configured to be different. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from decreasing when the stopped power supply is resumed and the control state of the game is restored.

(Content 7 of the invention described in the present embodiment)
In the conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the obtained determination information, and the variation accompanied by the variable display of the effect symbol displayed on the display means according to the result of the determination. A game machine capable of executing an effect is common. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine in which a player waits for an effect when the player is not playing a game (for example, see JP-A-2018-064835). However, the gaming machine described in the above patent document has a problem that the customer waiting effect is not executed at an appropriate time according to the state of the gaming machine.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, determination information (special figure determination) obtained by establishment of an acquisition condition (entering a game ball into a starting opening) Based on the information), the determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, and the control state of the game after the start of power supply. Initial processing means (main control board 110) that can be initialized or restored to the state before the stop of power supply, and display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means. The production control means (production control board 130) capable of performing the variation production accompanied by the variation display of the produced production symbols, and the production control means, after statically displaying the production symbols on the display means. When a predetermined period of time has passed, it is possible to execute a customer waiting effect (customer waiting demonstration effect) on the display means, and when the effect symbol is statically displayed after the change time of the variable effect, and the control state. The period until the customer waiting effect is executed can be different from the case where the effect symbol is statically displayed after the initialization or after the control state is restored. By doing so, the customer waiting effect can be executed at an appropriate time according to the state of the gaming machine, and the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

(Content 8 of the invention described in the present embodiment)
In the conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the obtained determination information, and the variation accompanied by the variable display of the effect symbol displayed on the display means according to the result of the determination. A game machine capable of executing an effect is common. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that displays execution information corresponding to the determination information during execution of the variation effect on the display means (see, for example, JP-A-2018-064835). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is room for improvement in the control of the display unit when the stopped power supply is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, which may reduce the interest of the game. There was a problem that there is.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, determination information (special figure determination) obtained by establishment of an acquisition condition (entering a game ball into a starting opening) Based on the information), the determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, and the control state of the game after the start of power supply. Initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing or restoring to the state before the stop of the power supply, and an effect displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means. The production control means (production control board 130) capable of performing the variation production accompanied by the variable display of the symbols, and the production control means, when the control state of the game is restored, the production on the display means. It is possible to perform a specific display (display of an initial screen, etc.) before displaying a symbol, and to the determination information during execution of the variation effect in a predetermined display area (the icon display area 70C) of the display means. It is possible to display the corresponding execution information (the icon), and when the power supply stopped during the display of the execution information is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the next from the end of the specific display Until the variable display is started, the predetermined display area is secured in a predetermined state (a state in which an effect image such as a background image can be displayed), but the execution information is stored in the predetermined display area. It is not displayed. By doing so, it is possible to let the player know that the variation effect that was being executed at the time when the power supply was stopped was completed, and it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

(Content 9 of the invention described in the present embodiment)
In the conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the obtained determination information, and the variation accompanied by the variable display of the effect symbol displayed on the display means according to the result of the determination. A game machine capable of executing an effect is common. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that executes a pre-reading notice effect over a plurality of variable effects based on a result of advance determination of the determination information (for example, JP-A-2017-143904). reference). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is a possibility that the interest of the game may decrease when the power supply stopped during the look-ahead notice presentation is resumed and the control state of the game is restored. there were.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, determination information (special figure determination) obtained by establishment of an acquisition condition (entering a game ball into a starting opening) It is possible to determine whether to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player based on the storage device (main control board 110) capable of storing information) and the determination information. Judgment means (main control board 110), pre-judgment means (main control board 110) capable of judging the judgment information before judgment by the judgment means, and initialization of the game control state after the start of power supply Or, depending on the determination result of the initial processing means (main control board 110) and the determination means for restoring the state before the stop of the power supply, the effect pattern displayed on the display means (image display device) And a production control means capable of performing a variation production accompanied by a variation display (production control board 130), wherein the production control means is a plurality of times of the variation production based on the determination result of the advance determination means. It is possible to execute a predetermined look-ahead notice effect (continuous notice effect), and when the power supply stopped during the execution of the look-ahead notice effect is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the look-ahead notice effect It is possible to execute a notice effect (for example, an alternative notice effect) different from the prefetch notice effect in the change effect that is executed next to the change effect in which the power supply is stopped, without restarting. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the player's dissatisfaction with the end of the continuous announcement effect due to the stop of the power supply, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

(Content 10 of the invention described in the present embodiment)
In the conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the obtained determination information, and the variation accompanied by the variable display of the effect symbol displayed on the display means according to the result of the determination. A game machine capable of executing an effect is common. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that executes a specific effect that suggests step by step the degree of expectation that a special game will be executed over a plurality of variable effects (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017). -143904 gazette). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is a problem that the interest of the game may decrease when the power supply stopped during the specific performance is restarted and the control state of the game is restored. It was

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, determination information (special figure determination) obtained by establishment of an acquisition condition (entering a game ball into a starting opening) It is possible to determine whether to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player based on the storage device (main control board 110) capable of storing information) and the determination information. Judgment means (main control board 110), pre-judgment means (main control board 110) capable of judging the judgment information before judgment by the judgment means, and initialization of the game control state after the start of power supply Or, depending on the determination result of the initial processing means (main control board 110) and the determination means for restoring the state before the stop of the power supply, the effect pattern displayed on the display means (image display device) The production control means (production control board 130) capable of performing the variation production accompanied by the variation display, and the production control means stages the degree of expectation that the special game is executed over the plurality of the variation productions. It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, icon change effect) that is suggested by the user, and when the power supply stopped during the execution of the specific effect is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the power supply is The specific effect can be executed in the variable effect executed next to the stopped variable effect, but is not executed from the continuation of the stage suggested before the stop of the power supply. By doing so, it is possible to execute the icon change effect in accordance with the content of the current change effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Content 11 of the invention described in the present embodiment)
In the conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the obtained determination information, and the variation accompanied by the variable display of the effect symbol displayed on the display means according to the result of the determination. A game machine capable of executing an effect is common. Among such gaming machines, a gaming machine that executes a specific production that gradually changes the display mode of the identification information that is displayed corresponding to each piece of determination information for which execution of the variation production has not ended There was (for example, refer to Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2018-061728). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, when the power supply stopped during the change performance is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the processing load related to the display control after the power supply is restarted is high. There was a risk of becoming.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, determination information (special figure determination) obtained by establishment of an acquisition condition (entering a game ball into a starting opening) It is possible to determine whether to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player based on the storage device (main control board 110) capable of storing information) and the determination information. Judgment means (main control board 110), pre-judgment means (main control board 110) capable of judging the judgment information before judgment by the judgment means, and initialization of the game control state after the start of power supply Or, depending on the determination result of the initial processing means (main control board 110) and the determination means for restoring the state before the stop of the power supply, the effect pattern displayed on the display means (image display device) And a production control unit capable of performing a variation production accompanied by a variation display (production control board 130), wherein the production control unit is configured to determine whether the determination information and the variation production for which the execution of the variation production is not completed are performed. It is possible to display the identification information (the icon, the hold icon) corresponding to each of the determination information that has not been started, and the special game is executed by changing the display mode of the identification information stepwise. It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, icon change effect) that suggests a degree of expectation, and the display mode includes a first-stage mode (for example, a CD icon) and a second-stage mode (for example, blue). Character icon) and a third-stage mode (red character icon), and the power supply stopped during the display of the identification information that changes to the third-stage mode in the second-stage mode restarts the game. When the control state is restored, the identification information displayed in the second stage mode is displayed in the first stage mode. By doing so, it is not necessary to be aware of the display mode of the hold icon when the power supply is stopped, and it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the display control after the power supply is restarted.

(Content 12 of the invention described in the present embodiment)
In the conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the obtained determination information, and the variation accompanied by the variable display of the effect symbol displayed on the display means according to the result of the determination. A game machine capable of executing an effect is common. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that displays the number of pending storages, which is the determination information that has not been determined, in the display area (for example, see JP-A-2018-061728). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, when the stopped power supply is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, it takes time to grasp the number of pending storages, which is an interesting aspect of the game. There was a problem that could decrease.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, determination information (special figure determination) obtained by establishment of an acquisition condition (entering a game ball into a starting opening) Information) as a storage memory (main control board 110), and determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player based on the determination information (main control board 110). Main control board 110), initialization processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of the power supply, or for restoring the state before the stop of the power supply, and the determination of the determination means Depending on the result, the effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing the variable effect accompanied by the variable display of the effect symbols displayed on the display means (image display device) is provided, and the control state of the game is When restored, it is possible to perform a specific display (display of an initial screen or the like) before displaying the effect design on the display means, and the first display area (sub first hold display 83, sub second). The hold display 84) and a second display area (first hold icon display area 70B, second hold icon display area 70D) different from the first display area display a hold display indicating the number of the hold storages. It is possible to perform, when the power supply stopped in the state with the hold storage is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the hold display is executed in the second display area during execution of the specific display. However, the hold display can be executed in the first display area. By doing this, when the stopped power supply is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, it is possible to grasp the number of holding memories before the end of the specific display, and the interest of the game is reduced. Can be suppressed.

(Content 13 of the invention described in this embodiment)
In the conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the obtained determination information, and the variation accompanied by the variable display of the effect symbol displayed on the display means according to the result of the determination. A game machine capable of executing an effect is common. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that executes an effect that suggests the degree of expectation that a special game will be executed (see, for example, JP-A-2017-143904). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, when the power supply stopped during the performance suggesting the degree of expectation that the special game is executed is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the interest of the game is increased. There was a problem that it could decrease.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, determination information (special figure determination) obtained by establishment of an acquisition condition (entering a game ball into a starting opening) It is possible to determine whether to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player based on the storage device (main control board 110) capable of storing information) and the determination information. Judgment means (main control board 110), pre-judgment means (main control board 110) capable of judging the judgment information before the judgment means, and initialization of the game control state after the start of power supply Or, depending on the determination result of the initial processing means (main control board 110) and the determination means for restoring the state before the stop of the power supply, the effect pattern displayed on the display means (image display device) The effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing the variable effect accompanied by the variable display and the light emitting means (winning hole lamp NR) capable of changing to any of a plurality of notification modes are provided, and the effect control is provided. The means is capable of executing a change effect (a lamp change effect) that suggests the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed by changing the light emitting means to a specific notification mode, and during the execution of the change effect. When the power supply that has been stopped is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the light emitting means is set to a notification mode (white lighting or extinction) different from the specific notification mode. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the control load after the power supply is resumed, and avoid a situation in which the player is confused that the lamp change effect is restarted even though the variable effect is not executed. This makes it possible to prevent the interest in the game from being lowered.

(Content 14 of the invention described in the present embodiment)
A conventional gaming machine is provided with a main control means capable of controlling the progress of the game and a performance control means capable of controlling a performance according to a signal (command or the like) from the main control means. Is common. Among such gaming machines, there has been a gaming machine provided with a movable effect means capable of operating in a predetermined mode (for example, see JP-A-2016-187648). However, in such a gaming machine, the case where the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means are deviated from each other is not considered.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and production according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means In the gaming machine provided with the effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling, movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member) capable of operating (moving, emitting light) in a predetermined mode. 74, an effect button 17), and the effect control means executes the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the movable effect means and the effect operation (effect operation, effect light emission) of the movable effect means. And a predetermined signal (power-on designating command, power restoration designating command) from the main control means during a control state (customer waiting state, variable performance, big hit production) in which performance corresponding to the signal can be executed. Etc.), it is possible to perform the initial operation. By doing so, it becomes possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly perform the cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means. Become.

As a second configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and an effect according to a signal (command or the like) from the main control means In the gaming machine provided with the effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling, movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member) capable of operating (moving, emitting light) in a predetermined mode. 74, an effect button 17), and the effect control means executes the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the movable effect means and the effect operation (effect operation, effect light emission) of the movable effect means. It is possible to execute a customer waiting effect in a waiting state (customer waiting state) in which a game is not in progress, and a predetermined signal (power-on designation from the main control means during the execution of the customer waiting effect). Command, power restoration specification command, etc.), the initial operation can be executed. By doing so, it becomes possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly perform the cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means. Become.

As a third configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and an effect according to a signal (command or the like) from the main control means In the gaming machine provided with the effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling, movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member) capable of operating (moving, emitting light) in a predetermined mode. 74, an effect button 17), and the effect control means executes the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the movable effect means and the effect operation (effect operation, effect light emission) of the movable effect means. It is possible, and it is possible to execute a variation effect to inform the player whether or not to execute an advantageous special game (big hit game), and from the main control means during execution of the variation effect. When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received, it is possible to execute the initial operation. By doing so, it becomes possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly perform the cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means. Become.

As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and an effect according to a signal (command or the like) from the main control means In the gaming machine provided with the effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling, movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member) capable of operating (moving, emitting light) in a predetermined mode. 74, an effect button 17), and the effect control means executes the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the movable effect means and the effect operation (effect operation, effect light emission) of the movable effect means. It is possible to perform a special game effect (big hit effect, opening effect, round effect, ending effect) during execution of a special game (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player. When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during execution, it is possible to execute the initial operation. By doing so, it becomes possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly perform the cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means. Become.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game, and an effect according to a signal (command or the like) from the main control means In the gaming machine provided with the effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling, movable effect means (first movable member 73) capable of operating in a predetermined mode and emitting light in a predetermined light emission mode. , A second movable member 74), and an initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of the power supply or restoring the state before the stop of the power supply. And the production control means can execute the initial operation and the initial light emission of the movable production means, and can execute the production operation and the production light emission of the movable production means. The operation mode of the initial operation of the movable effect means (the operation mode such as the number of steps or the movement of each step) is the same when the game control state is initialized and when the game control state is restored. However, a control state (customer waiting state, variation production, jackpot) in which the light emission mode (emission color, light emission pattern, etc.) of the initial light emission of the movable production means is different and the production according to the signal can be executed When a predetermined signal (power-on designating command, power restoration designating command, etc.) is received from the main control means during production, it is possible to execute the initial operation of the movable production means. By doing so, it becomes possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly perform the cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means. Become.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and production according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means In the gaming machine provided with the effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling, the effect means (the first movable member 73) capable of operating (operation, light emission, sound output, image display) in a predetermined manner. , The second movable member 74, the effect button 17, various LEDs, the sound output device 9, the image display device), and the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning the game ball into the starting opening). ), a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, and a control state of the game is initialized after the start of power supply. Or an initial processing unit (main control board 110) capable of recovering the state before the power supply is stopped, wherein the effect control unit performs the initial operation (initial operation, It is possible to perform initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display) and production operation (production operation, production light emission, production sound output, production image display) of the movable production means, and the determination of the determination means. Depending on the result, it is possible to execute a variation effect accompanied by a variation display of the effect symbol displayed on the display means (image display device), and in the variable effect, the effect symbol displayed in the variable state is shaken. It is possible to perform a dynamic display (temporary stop display) and then a static display (stop display), and the effect control means resumes the power supply stopped during the execution of the variable effect in which the effect symbol is displayed in a swinging manner. Then, when the control state of the game is restored, it is possible to statically display the effect symbol at a predetermined timing (when a special symbol confirmation command is received, when a customer wait command is received) without swinging the effect symbol. In addition, a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) from the main control means during a control state (customer waiting state, variation production, big hit production) capable of executing the production corresponding to the signal. If it receives, it is possible to perform the initial operation. By doing so, it becomes possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly perform the cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means. Become.

As a seventh configuration for solving the above problems, a main control unit (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and an effect according to a signal (command or the like) from the main control unit In the gaming machine provided with the effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling, the effect means (the first movable member 73) capable of operating (operation, light emission, sound output, image display) in a predetermined manner. , The second movable member 74, the effect button 17, various LEDs, the audio output device 9, the image display device), and the determination information (special figure determination) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (entering the game ball into the starting opening). Information) as a storage memory (main control board 110), and determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player based on the determination information (main control board 110). The main control board 110), and the initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of the power supply or for restoring the state before the stop of the power supply, The control means performs an initial operation of the effect means (initial operation, initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display) and effect operation of the effect means (effect operation, effect light emission, effect sound output, effect image display). It is possible to execute, it is possible to execute the variable effect accompanied by the variable display of the effect symbol displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means, The states include a customer waiting state in which the fluctuation effect is not executed, a first state which is an execution period of the fluctuation effect in a state in which there is no holding memory, and an execution period of the fluctuation effect in a state in which the holding memory is present. And the second state, which is, when the control state of the game is restored, the effect control means performs a specific display (display of an initial screen, etc.) before displaying the effect design on the display means. Is possible, and the display mode of the specific display (only the initial screen is displayed) when the power supply stopped during the customer waiting state is resumed and the customer waiting state is restored, and the first state or the first state In response to the signal, the display mode of the specific display (display of the initial screen+returning screen) when the power supply stopped in the two states is restarted and restored to the first state or the second state, When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during a control state (customer waiting state, fluctuation production, big hit production) capable of executing the production, It is possible to carry out the operation. By doing so, it becomes possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly perform the cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means. Become.

As an eighth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and an effect according to a signal (command or the like) from the main control means In the gaming machine provided with the effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling, the effect means (the first movable member 73) capable of operating (operation, light emission, sound output, image display) in a predetermined manner. , The second movable member 74, the effect button 17, various LEDs, the audio output device 9, the image display device), and the determination information (special figure determination) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (entering the game ball into the starting opening). Information) as a storage memory (main control board 110), and determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player based on the determination information (main control board 110). The main control board 110), and the initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of the power supply or for restoring the state before the stop of the power supply, The control means performs an initial operation of the effect means (initial operation, initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display) and effect operation of the effect means (effect operation, effect light emission, effect sound output, effect image display). It is possible to execute, it is possible to execute the variable effect accompanied by the variable display of the effect symbol displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means, the display means When a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the effect design is statically displayed, it is possible to execute a customer waiting effect (customer waiting demonstration effect) on the display means, and the effect design is changed after the variation time of the variable effect has elapsed. In the case of static display, and in the case of statically displaying the effect design after initialization of the control state or after restoration of the control state, it is possible to make different the period until the customer waiting effect is executed, A predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during a control state (customer waiting state, variation production, big hit production) capable of executing the production corresponding to the signal. In that case, it is possible to carry out the initial operation. By doing so, it becomes possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly perform the cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means. Become.

◆ As a ninth configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game, and an effect according to a signal (command or the like) from the main control means In the gaming machine provided with the effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling, the effect means (the first movable member 73) capable of operating (operation, light emission, sound output, image display) in a predetermined manner. , The second movable member 74, the effect button 17, various LEDs, the audio output device 9, the image display device), and the determination information (special figure determination) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (entering the game ball into the starting opening). Information) as a storage memory (main control board 110), and determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player based on the determination information (main control board 110). The main control board 110), and the initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of the power supply or for restoring the state before the stop of the power supply, The control means performs an initial operation of the effect means (initial operation, initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display) and effect operation of the effect means (effect operation, effect light emission, effect sound output, effect image display). It is possible to execute, it is possible to execute a variable effect accompanied by a variable display of the effect symbol displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means, and in advance, Based on the determination result of the determination means, it is possible to execute a predetermined look-ahead notice effect (continuous notice effect) over the variation effect a plurality of times, and the power supply that is stopped during the execution of the look-ahead notice effect is restarted. When the control state of the game is restored by the pre-reading notice effect is not restarted, the notice effect different from the pre-reading notice effect in the variation effect executed next to the variation effect in which power supply is stopped (for example, (Alternative notice effect) can be executed and a predetermined signal (power-on designation command) from the main control means during a control state (customer waiting state, variable effect, big hit effect) capable of executing an effect corresponding to the signal. , Power restoration command, etc.) is received, the initial operation can be executed. By doing so, it becomes possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly perform the cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means. Become.

As a tenth structure for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and an effect according to a signal (command or the like) from the main control means In the gaming machine provided with the effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling, the effect means (the first movable member 73) capable of operating (operation, light emission, sound output, image display) in a predetermined manner. , The second movable member 74, the effect button 17, various LEDs, the audio output device 9, the image display device), and the determination information (special figure determination) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (entering the game ball into the starting opening). Information) as a storage memory (main control board 110), and determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player based on the determination information (main control board 110). The main control board 110), and the initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of the power supply or for restoring the state before the stop of the power supply, The control means performs an initial operation of the effect means (initial operation, initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display) and effect operation of the effect means (effect operation, effect light emission, effect sound output, effect image display). It is possible to execute, it is possible to execute the variable effect accompanied by the variable display of the effect symbol displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means, and a plurality of times It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, icon change effect) that suggests the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed over the variable effect, and the power supply that is stopped during the execution of the specific effect is restarted. Then, when the control state of the game is restored, it is possible to execute the specific effect in the variation effect that is executed next to the variation effect in which the power supply is stopped, but it was suggested before the power supply was stopped. It is not executed from the continuation of the stage, and a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, command to turn on power, When the power restoration command etc.) is received, the initial operation can be executed. By doing so, it becomes possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly perform the cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means. Become.

As an eleventh configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and an effect according to a signal (command or the like) from the main control means In a gaming machine equipped with a production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling, a light emitting means (winning hole lamp NR) that can be changed to any of a plurality of notification modes, and operate in a predetermined mode. (Operation, light emission, sound output, image display) possible production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17, various LEDs, voice output device 9, image display device) and acquisition conditions are satisfied. Based on the storage information (main control board 110) capable of storing the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by (entering the game ball into the starting opening) as a pending storage, the player is notified to the player. Judgment means (main control board 110) capable of judging whether or not to execute an advantageous special game (big hit game), and initialize the control state of the game after starting the power supply, or before stopping the power supply And an initial processing unit (main control board 110) for restoring the state, the production control unit performs the initial operation of the production unit (initial operation, initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display), and the production. It is possible to execute the production operation (production operation, production light emission, production sound output, production image display) of the means, and the special game is expected to be executed by changing the light emitting means to a specific notification mode. It is possible to execute a change effect that suggests a degree (lamp change effect), and when the power supply stopped during the execution of the change effect is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, The main control is performed during a control state (customer waiting state, variation production, jackpot production) in which control is performed in a notification mode (white lighting or extinction) different from a specific notification mode, and effects corresponding to the signal can be executed. When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the means, the initial operation can be executed. By doing so, it becomes possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly perform the cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means. Become.

As a twelfth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and an effect according to a signal (command or the like) from the main control means A sound output means (voice output device 9) capable of outputting a game effect sound (BGM, SE, etc.) in a gaming machine provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling The production control means can output a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power restoration notification sound, etc.) indicating the start of power supply from the voice output means, and responds to the signal. When a predetermined signal (power-on designating command, power restoration designating command, etc.) is received from the main control means during a control state in which production can be executed (customer waiting state, variation production, jackpot production) It is possible to output a notification sound. By doing so, it becomes possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly perform the cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means. Become.

◆ As a thirteenth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game, and an effect according to a signal (command or the like) from the main control means A sound output means (voice output device 9) capable of outputting a game effect sound (BGM, SE, etc.) in a gaming machine provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling And the production control means can output a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power recovery notification sound, etc.) indicating the start of power supply from the voice output means, and the game is in progress. It is possible to execute a customer waiting effect in a standby state (waiting state for a customer), and receive a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) from the main control means during execution of the customer waiting effect. In this case, it is possible to output the predetermined notification sound. By doing so, it becomes possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly perform the cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means. Become.

◆ As a fourteenth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and an effect according to a signal (command or the like) from the main control means A sound output means (voice output device 9) capable of outputting a game effect sound (BGM, SE, etc.) in a gaming machine provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling The production control means can output a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power recovery notification sound, etc.) indicating the start of power supply from the voice output means, which is advantageous for the player. It is possible to execute a variation effect for notifying whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game), and a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration from the main control means during execution of the variation effect. When a designated command or the like) is received, the predetermined notification sound can be output. By doing so, it becomes possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly perform the cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means. Become.

◆ As a fifteenth structure for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game, and an effect according to a signal (command or the like) from the main control means A sound output means (voice output device 9) capable of outputting a game effect sound (BGM, SE, etc.) in a gaming machine provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling It is possible for the effect control means to output a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power recovery notification sound, etc.) indicating the start of power supply from the sound output means, which is advantageous for the player. It is possible to execute a special game effect (big hit effect, opening effect, round effect, ending effect) during execution of the special game (big hit game), and a predetermined signal from the main control means during execution of the special game effect. When a (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received, it is possible to output the predetermined notification sound. By doing so, it becomes possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly perform the cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means. Become.

(Content 15 of the invention described in the present embodiment)
A conventional gaming machine is generally provided with a main control means for controlling the progress of the game and an effect control means for controlling an effect according to a command from the main control means. Among such gaming machines, there has been a gaming machine provided with a display means capable of displaying an effect image (see, for example, JP-A-2016-187648). However, such a gaming machine does not consider the case where the power supply to the main control means is stopped while the power supply to the effect control means is continued.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and production according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means In the gaming machine provided with the effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the effect, a display means (image display device 70, 71) capable of displaying effect images (variable effect, jackpot effect, etc.) is provided. The production control means is capable of displaying a game standby screen (still display screen of production symbols) on the display means in a standby state (customer waiting state) in which a game is not in progress. When the power supply to the main control means is stopped during the display, it is possible to continue the display of the game standby screen. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the power supply to the main control means is stopped, and to prevent the interest of the game from decreasing.

(Content 16 of the invention described in the present embodiment)
A conventional gaming machine is generally provided with a main control means for controlling the progress of the game and an effect control means for controlling an effect according to a command from the main control means. Among such gaming machines, there is one that executes an abnormality notification based on an input signal from a predetermined detecting means (see, for example, JP-A-2017-113441). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is a possibility that the abnormality notification may not be properly performed.

As a first configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, a detection means (starting mouth detection switch, a start opening detection switch, for detecting a predetermined event (starting winning, magnetism, radio wave, etc.) Magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.) and control means (main control board 110 and/or effect control board 130) for performing predetermined control (big hit judgment, abnormality judgment, etc.) based on an input signal from the detection means. And, when the control means and the detection means are in a non-connection state (connector disconnection, disconnection, etc.) when power supply to the gaming machine is started, a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic field) Anomaly notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.) can be executed. By doing so, it becomes possible to appropriately notify the abnormality.

As a second configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, detection means (starting mouth detection switch, magnetic detection) for detecting a predetermined event (start prize, magnetism, radio wave, etc.) Sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.) and control means (main control board 110 and/or effect control board 130) for performing predetermined control (big hit determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on an input signal from the detection means, If the control means and the detection means are in a non-connected state (connector disconnection, disconnection, etc.) when power supply to the gaming machine is started, a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification) , Radio wave abnormality notification, etc.) can be executed, and if the control means and the detection means are in a connected state during execution of the predetermined abnormality notification, for a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds have passed, power is turned off, etc.). The execution of the predetermined abnormality notification is continued. By doing so, it becomes possible to appropriately notify the abnormality.

As a third configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, detection means (starting mouth detection switch, magnetic detection) for detecting a predetermined event (starting winning, magnetism, radio wave, etc.) Sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.) and control means (main control board 110 and/or effect control board 130) for performing predetermined control (big hit determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on an input signal from the detection means, When the control means and the detection means are in a non-connected state (connector disconnection, disconnection, etc.) during power supply to the game machine, a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality) Notification). By doing so, it becomes possible to appropriately notify the abnormality.

As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, detection means (starting mouth detection switch, magnetic detection) for detecting a predetermined event (start prize, magnetism, radio wave, etc.) Sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.) and control means (main control board 110 and/or effect control board 130) for performing predetermined control (big hit determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on an input signal from the detection means, When the control means and the detection means are in a non-connected state (connector disconnection, disconnection, etc.) during power supply to the game machine, a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality) If the control means and the detection means are in a connected state during execution of the predetermined abnormality notification, the predetermined notification is performed for a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds have elapsed, power is turned off, etc.). Continue execution of abnormality notification. By doing so, it becomes possible to appropriately notify the abnormality.

Note that the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, and can also be used for a spinning drum type gaming machine (so-called slot machine). Furthermore, it can be used for a ball game machine and an arrangement ball game machine.

Further, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is supposed to shift to a high-probability gaming state for a predetermined number of times after the completion of all the jackpot games, but in a particular round game of the jackpot game, a game ball passes through a specific area. In this case, the gaming machine may be shifted to a high-probability gaming state for a predetermined number of times after the jackpot game is over.

In addition, after all jackpot games are over, transition to the high-probability gaming state, and if you win the falling lottery that is executed at the start of the variable display of the special symbols in the high-probability gaming state, the high-probability gaming state is ended and normal It may be a gaming machine that returns to the gaming state.

Also, if the type of jackpot special symbol is a normal symbol, after the jackpot game is over, transition to a low-probability game state, and if the type of jackpot special symbol is a specific symbol, next time after the jackpot game is over. It may be a gaming machine that shifts to a high-probability gaming state that continues until a big hit game.

Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are not executed simultaneously (in parallel), and the variable display of the second special symbol is given priority. Although it is supposed to be executed, it may be a gaming machine in which the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed simultaneously (in parallel).

It should be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are exemplifications in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description but by the scope of the claims, and is intended to include meanings equivalent to the scope of the claims and all modifications within the scope.

1 Gaming Machine 5 Gaming Board 44 Universal Figure Gate 45 First Starting Port 47 Second Starting Port 50 Big Winning Port 70 First Image Display 71 Second Image Display 110 Main Control Board 110a Main CPU
120 payout control board 130 production control board 130a sub CPU

Claims (1)

In gaming machines that can play games,
Detection means for detecting a predetermined event,
A control means for performing a predetermined control based on an input signal from the detection means,
When the control means and the detection means are in a disconnected state during the power supply to the gaming machine, it is possible to execute a predetermined abnormality notification,
A gaming machine, characterized in that, when the control means and the detection means are connected during execution of the predetermined abnormality notification, the predetermined abnormality notification is continued for a predetermined period.